CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY FROM Digitized by Microsoft® Cornell University Library PA 258.C98 1871 The student's Greek grammar: a grammar o 3 1924 021 601 046 All books are subject to recall after two weeks Olin/Kroch Library DATE DUE JJ^^pl*^®^ PRINTED IN U.S.A. Digitized by Microsoft® This book was digitized by Microsoft Corporation in cooperation with Corneii University Libraries, 2007. You may use and print this copy in iimited quantity for your personai purposes, but may not distribute or provide access to it (or modified or partiai versions of it) for revenue-generating or other commerciai purposes. Digitized by Microsoft® 'HE STUDENTS' MANU (Continued). VIII.-LANGUAGE, LITERATURE, &i!, THE STUDENT'S ENGLISH LANGUAGE. By GEORGE P. MARSH. Edited with additional Cliapters and Notes. Poat Svo. 7s. (xl. THE STUDENT'S ENGLISH LITERATURE. By T. B. SHAW, M.A. Edited with Notes and lUiistrations. Post Svo. 7t.6d. THE STUDENT'S SPECIMENS OP ENGLISH LITE- RATURE, aeleoted from the Best Weiteks. By THOS. B. SHAW, M.A. Edited with Additions. Post Svo. It. 6d. IX.-GEOGRAPHY. THE STUDENT'S ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY. By Rev. W. L. B EVAN. M.A. Woodcuts. Post Svo. 7s. ed. THE STUDENT'S MODERN GEOGRAPHY. By Rev. W. Ij.' BEVAN. Woodcuts. Post Svo. 7a. M. X.-PHILOSOPHY AND LAW. THE STUDENT'S MORAL PHILOSOPHY. With Quo- tations and References. By WILLIAM FLEMING, D.D. Post Svo. 7s. ed. THE STUDENT'S BLACKSTONE. A Ststematio Abridgement of the entibe Commentaries, adapted to the Present State of tiik Law. By E. MALCOLM KEBK, LL.D. Post Svo. 7s. lid. ELEMENTARY SCHOOL HISTORIES. MRS. MARKHAM'S HISTORY OF ENGLAND. From the First Inv.asiou by the Romans ; -with Conversations at the end of each Chapter. Nevj Sdition, continued to 1S65. With 100 Woodcuts. 12mo. 4s. MRS. MARKHAM'S HISTORY OF FRANCE. From the Conquest by the Ganls ; with Conversations at the end of each Chapter. New £dUion, coutiuued to 1S61. With 70 Woodcuts. 12n)o. is. MRS. MARKHAM'S HISTORY OF GERMANY. From the Invasion by the Romans under Marius. New Edition, continued to 1867. With 50 Woodcuts. 12mo. 4>. LITTLE ARTHUR'S HISTORY OF ENGLAND. By Lady Callcott. New Edition, continued to the Marriage of the Prince of Wales. Woodcuts. ISmo. 'Is. Qd. STORIES FOB CHILDREN : selected from the Histort OF England. B^ Mr. Croker. Woodcuts. 16mo. 2«. Qd. DR. WM. SMITH'S SMALLER SERIES. A SMALLER HISTORY OF GREECK With 74 Wood- cuts. 16mo. St. 6d. A SMALLER HISTORY OF ROME. AVith 79 Woodcuts. 16mo. U. 6(1. A SMALLER HISTORY OP ENGLAND. With 63 Wood- cuts. 16mo. 3«L Qd. A SMALLER CLASSICAL MYTHOLOGY. With Trans- lationfl from tho Ancient Poets, and Questions On the Work. With 90 Woodcuts. 16mo. Ss. id. A SMALLER HISTORY OF LITERATURE. 16mo. 3s. 6d. SPECIMENS OP ENGLISH LITERATURE. Selected from the Chief Writers, and arranged Chronologically, with Notes. 16mo. Ss. ad. A SMALLER SCRIPTURE HISTORY. In Three Parts: Old Testament Histoiy ; Connection of Old and New Testa- ments ; New Testament History to a.d. 70. With Illustration!^ 16mo, 3». M. JOHN MURRAY, ALBEMARLE STREET. January, 1871. Cornell University Library The original of tliis book is in tine Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archi)^e.^or^^d^tai^s^u31 924021 601 046 The Student's Greek Grammar. A GEAIMAE OF THE GEEEK LANGUAGE. By DE. GEOEGE CUETIUS, PROFESSOR IN THE TTNIVERSITT OF LEIPZIG. TRANSLATED UNDER THE REVISrON OF THE AUTHOR. By WILLIAM SMITH, D.C.L., LL.D., EDITOR OP THE CLASSICAL AND LATIN DICTIONARIES. For tbe Uae of Colleges and the Upper Forms in Schools. FOURTH EDITION. LONDON: JOHN MUEEAY, ALBEMARLE STREET. 1871. Digitized by Microsoft® 4^ S- S"^1r CURTIUS' GREEK GRAMMAR EXPLAINED. Now Beady, ELUCIDATIONS OF THE STUDENT'S GREEK GRAM- MAR. Translated from the German of Ernest Cuktids, with the Author's Aid and Sanction. By Evelyn Abbot. Post 8vo. 7s. 6d. THE STUDENT'S LATIN GRAMMAR. By William Smith, D.C.L., and Theophilus D. Hall, M.A, New Aditwn. Post 8vo. 6s. FOR THE MIDDLE AND LOWER FORMS IN SCHOOLS. A SMALLER LATIN GRAMMAR. By Dr. William Smith. 12mo. 3s. Gd. A SMALLER GREEK GRAMMAR. Abridged from Cuetius' Larger Work. 12mo. 3s. 6d. ■ A FIRST GREEK COURSE. Being a Delectus and Exercise- Book adapted to the Greek Grammar of Dr. Geokcje CuRTins. 12mo. 3s. 6d. "'■■CORr^'ELL Ur-ilVERSITY; /n.o. LONDON ■ raiKTEiD BT WILLUAM CLOWES AND SONS, STAMFORD STEKF.T. AMD CHARING CROSS. Digitized by Microsoft® EDITOR'S PREFACE. The Greek Grammar of Dr. Curtius is acknowledged by the most competent scholars, both in this country and in Germany, to be the best representative of the present advanced state of Greek scholarship. It is, indeed, almost the only Grammar which exhibits the inflexions of the language in a reaUy scientific form; while its extensive use in the schools of Germany, and the high commendations it has received from practical teachers in that country, are a sufficient proof of its excellence as a school-book. It is surprising to find that many of the public and private schools in this country continue to use Grammars, which ignore all the improvements and discoveries of modem philology, and still cling to the division of the substantives into ten declensions, the designation of the Second Perfect as the Perfect Middle, and similar exploded errors. Dr. Curtius has stated so fully in his Preface the principles on which this Grammar is constructed, that it is^unnec- essary to say more by way of iutroduction. It only remains to add, that the translation has been made from the fifth edition of the original work (1862), with the author's sanction, and that the proof-sheets have enjoyed the advantage of his final correction and revision. An abridgment for the use of the lower forms is published simultaneously with the present work. W. S. London, March, 1863. a2 Digitized by Microsoft® FROM THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE. The fact that within a few years the present Grammai has found its way into a large number of schools in various countries of Europe seems to be a satisfactory answer to the question whether a thorough knowledge of Greek is attainable by the method I have adopted. Much, therefore, of what I thought it necessary to state on the first appearance of the book does not now re- quire to be repeated ; but I consider it incumbent upon me to make some observations upon the objects and the use of the Grammar, and I beg to recommend these to the careful consideration of teachers. Few sciences have within the last half century been so completely reformed as the science of language. Not only has our insight into the nature and history of human speech been greatly advanced, but — and this is justly regarded as a matter of still greater importance — quite a diiferent method in treating language in general has been discovered, after a new era had been opened up by the philosophical inquiries of William von Humboldt, and the historical investigations of Francis Bopp and Jacob Grimm. No one, unless he desires to exclude schools from the progress thus made, and to confine them to the mechanical repetition of imper- feet and antiquated rules, will probably doubt that the new knowledge, the principles of which have stood the test of nearly half a century, ought to exercise its in- fluence on the teaching of language. If the teaching of a language in our schools is in- Digitized by Microsoft® PREFACE. ■« tended to lead not only to a thorough understanding of the master-works of literature, but at the same time to cultivate and stir up the youthful mind by indepen- dent exertion and by occupation with a subject so im- mensely rich and so harmoniously quickening the most different mental powers as language, such teaching cannot possibly continue to keep aloof from the pro- gress of scientific inquiry, which is, unfortunately, still the case in many places. The teaching of Greek, however, seems to be specially called upon to make a commence- ment. The modern science of language has, indeed, exer- cised its influence on every part of grammar, but none has been more affected by it than the first, commonly called the accidence. In Latin scientific inquiry into the structure of the forms has not yet reached the same completeness as in Greek. The structure of the Latin language is less transparent, and we miss so many aids which we possess for the Greek in the liigh antiquity of its literature and in its dialects. A scientific treatment of the structure of the Latin language in schools is, moreover, a matter of great practical difficulty, on account of the early age at which the elements must necessarily be learnt. We ought not, however, on this account to separate the teaching of Ijatin from all con- tact with scientific inquiry, the influence of which can show itself with advantage, at least, in a more suitable arrangement and distribution of the matter. Granting, therefore, that our boys, as heretofore, must commit to memory a large portion of Latin forms ; granting that the most important object in learning Latin consists, perhaps, more in the acquisition of fixed laws of syntax, which obviously form the principal strength of the Latin language ;— the case of the Greek is different. The Greeks are justly called an artistic people, and the Digitized by Microsoft® Vi PEEFACE. Greek language is the most ancient work of art whicb they have reared upon a very primitive basis. The student, who approaches the Greek after he has already gone through a considerable preparation by the study of Latin, ought to be impressed with the idea that the structure of this language is one of the most marvellous productions of the intellectual powers acting uncon- sciously. Everything lies here clear before us: the sources of our knowledge are more varied, and the necessity of analysing the given forms is rendered so absolute, even on account of the Homeric dialect, that this analysis has, in fact, never been entirely wanting, and after the first appearance of Buttmann, in 1782, made considerable progress. The attempt, therefore, to connect in a still higher degree the practice of the school with the spirit of science, can here point to numerous precedents, and it is, no doubt, mainly owing to this circumstance that it has met vsdth so favourable a reception. My object has been to produce a con- sistent system, a careful selection, and a clear and pre- cise exposition, rather than an entirely new system. In selecting and expounding the results of scientiiic inquiry, I have always kept in view the idea that the book was intended for practical use in schools. The first requisite, therefore, was not to admit anything which is beyond the sphere of the school, to explain only that which is necessary, and to admit only that which is absolutely certain. For a school-book must speak categorically, must exclude all matters of mere opinion, and has no space for discussion and inquiry. It is[ however, perfectly indifferent whether a result has been obtained by special researches into the Greek language, or by the more general inquiries of comparative philology. Digitized by Microsoft® PREFACE. Vli I was further obliged to admit only those things which find their explanation in the Greek language itself, or at most in a comparison with the Latin ; but, even within these limits, I have confined myself to such innovations as really afford an important insight into the structure of the forms, whereas all that belongs to philological learning and many other things have been passed over because they seemed unnecessary. Among such superfluous innovations I include espe- cially all changes of terminology, and the entire altera- tion of whole parts of Grammar which are often still less necessary, but to which formerly too much impor- tance used to be attached. The new technical terms I have introduced have generally been approved of, and the principle stated in my preface to the first edition, though not followed with pedantic consistency, "if possible, to put signifi- cant names in the place of dead numbers," as for e. g., A Declension, O Declension, instead of First and Second Declension, will scarcely be found fault with, for a name with a meaning at once gives a piece of information, and therefore facilitates learning. Doubts have been raised only about the expressions strong and weak, which I have employed to distinguish the two Aorists and Perfects. I am as well aware now as I was at the first that, from the point of view of scientific inquiry, much may be said against the expressions, but I nevertheless feel that I cannot give them up. For the old designation by numbers is unsatisfactory, unless we are prepared for its sake either to sacrifice a more consistent arrangement of the verb, or to mislead the pupil by calling the Aorist which is treated of first the second, and first the one with which he is made ac- quainted afterwards. But a common name to distin- Digitized by Microsoft® Viii PEEFACE. guish the two forms of the Aorist Active Middle and Passive, and of the Perfect Active, is indispensable in a system of Greek Grammar. An innovation had here become necessary, for' both negative and posi- tive reasons. The expressions strong and weah have this advantage — that after being introduced by Grimm into his German Grammar, they have also been adopted by English Grammarians ; and though I use them not quite in the same sense, they are easily intelligible. It will surely not be difficult to make a pupil under- stand that those forms are called strong which spring from the root, as it were, by an internal agency, and weah those which are formed by syllables added ex- ternally — especially as he may easily compare the English take, took, and love, loved. I still know of no designation which, with so few disadvantages, offers so many advantages as tliis, and I shall retain it until a better one is suggested; and, after all, iu necessary innovations it is often more important that men agree, than on what they agree. The fact that the most essential changes I have made in the arrangements of the subjects — as, for example, the strict adherence to the system of Stems iu all the inflexions, and especially the division of the verb according to temporal Stems — have met with the approval of practical teachers, has been to me a source of great gratification, it being a clear proof that the demands of scientific inquiry are by no means so much opposed to a right system of teaching as is still imagined by many. The arrangement of temporal Stems is made less upon scientific than upon didactic grounds, in such a manner that kindred forms are joined together, and due regard is paid to the progress from that which is easy to that which is more difficult. Digitized by Microsoft® PKEFACE. IX The chapter on the formation of words, though some- what enlarged, has for the same reasons still been kept very brief. But, in treating of the verbs, I have directed attention to the formation of verbal nouns : in treating of the verbs of the different classes, I have always directed attention, by a number of characteristic exam- ples, to the application of the different Stems in the formation of words. By this means the learner has an opportunity, during the study of his grammar, of making himself acquainted with a number of words, and I have no doubt that teachers will give their sanc- tion to this arrangement. In regard to Syntax, the positive results of recent linguistic inquiries are as yet less numerous. In this part of the Grammar, therefore, I follow the principle of stating the essential idioms of the Greek language with the utmost possible precision, and in the utmost logical order. Only in some chapters, especially in that on the use of the tenses, my system presents con- siderable differences from the usual one. All minute disquisitions, conjectures, and more or less probable theories — among them especially the ever-repeated theory about the original local meaning of the cases, with which I cannot agree at all — have been rigorously excluded. In this part, also, I have never neglected to compare the phenomena of the Greek language with the corresponding ones of -Latin, and occasionally also of English, where this could be done with brevity and advantage; for as the usage of a language must be mainly comprehended by a feeling of language, I imagine that every appeal to a Latin usage already embodied with our feeling of language, or to an EngKsh usage familiar to us from childhood, advances our knowledge much more than philosophical definitions or Digitized by Microsoft® X PREFACE. technical terms of vague or various meanings. For the same reason I everywhere attach great importance to an accurate translation of a Greek idiom into English or Latin. I need hardly guard myself against the opinion as if I considered such a translation to be a philosophical explanation of a linguistic phenomenon. A real explanation is beyond the problem of a Grammar. I scarcely need repeat here that the present book is not intended, like an Elementary Grammar, to be com- mitted to memory paragraph by paragraph; but, in teaching, a suitable selection, according to the degree of the pupil's advancement, should be made by the teacher. By a difference in type I have myself, at least partially, indicated this. It may be remarked in general that the first business everywhere is that of memory, and only when the actual forms, with the aid of the paradigms, have been committed to memory, analysis may be added. First knowledge, then understanding — this ought to be the leading principle ; but, as I have said in another place, " Memory can neither accurately grasp the great variety of Greek forms nor retain them, unless it be supported by an analysing and combining intelligence, which furnishes, as it were, the hooks and cement to strengthen that which has been learned, and permanently to im- press it upon the mind." If details learned at different times and carefully committed to memory, during a subsequent repetition variously combine with one an- other, and form various groups ; if, then, many things at first sight strange, appear to the pupil in the light of a law pervading the language, such insight is certainly not a mere support of memory, but animates the desire to learn, and incites to exercise the power of thought in Digitized by Microsoft® PKEPACE. Xi a variety of ways. The present book offers to teachers abundant opportunities for such exercises, and acquires its highest efiBcacy under the guidance of thinking teachers who are truly famihar with it, and take a delight in its subjects. That the book has actually found such teachers has been proved to me in various ways, and caused me sincere gratification. G. C. Digitized by Microsoft® Digitized by Microsoft® TABLE OF CONTENTS. INTRODUCTION. The Greek Lanquage and its Diaiectb. FIEST PAET. — ETYMOLOGY. I. Letters and Sounds. Chap. I. — The Greek Characters. Sec. A. Letters 1 — 9 B. Other Characters 10—16 0. Accents 17—22 D. Punctuation 23 Chap. II. — The Sounds. A. The Vowels 24—29 B. The Consonants 30—34 Chap. III. — Combinations and Changes op Sotjnds. A. Vowels in Combination B. Other kinds of Vowel Changes C. Consonants in Comhination with one another D. Other Changes in the middle of a word B. Changes of Sound at the end of a word 35—39 40—43 44—54 55—62 63—69 Chap. IV. — Division of Syllables and their Quantity. A. Division of Syllables 70— 7'3 B. Quantity 74—78 Chap. V.— Accents 79—99 Digitized by Microsoft® KJT CONTENTS. II. Inflexion. A. Inflexion of Nouns and PBONOtnrs. Chap. VI. — Declension op Substantives and Adjec- tives. First Principal, (or Vowel) Declension. Sec. A. The A Declension 112-113 (^Gomnrndy called the First Declension.) 1. Feminines 114—119 2. MascuUnes 120—123 B. The Declension 124^131 (^Commonly called the Second Declension.) Attic Declension 132—133 Second Principal (oe Consonant) Declension . . 135 — 143 ( Commonly called the Third Declensiom,.'\ 1. Consonant Steins : a. Guttural and Labial Stems 144 — 145 6. Dental Stems 146—149 c. Liquid Stems 150 — 153 2. Vowel Stems : a. Soft Vowel Stems 154—158 J. Diphthong Stems 159—161 c. Stems 162 — 163 3. Stems suffering Elision : a. Sigma Stems 164 — 167 h. T-Stems 168 — 169 c. K-Stems 170 171 Irregularities in Declension 174 177 Case-like Terminations 178 179 Chap. VII. — Other Inflexions op the Adjective; A. Gender 180—191 B Comparison 192—200 0. Adverbs of Adjectives 201 204 Chap. VIII. — Inflexion op PEONouifs 205 219 Chap. IX. — The Numerals 220 224 Digitized by Microsoft® CONTENTS. XV B. Inplexiok or Verbs. Sec. General Remarks 225 — 230 List of Pabadiqms. Table. 'Elfii, I am I. Synopsis of Xum, 7 loose (exhibiting the meanings of the Tenses) II. Verbs in Q. A. Vowel Stems : 1. Uncontracted, Xum III. 2. Contracted, rtfida, Trotea, dov\6 p p Eho r t ff 9 Sigma •s T T Tau t T u UpsEion tt (short or long) 4) ^ Phi ph X % Chi ch ^ 1^ Psi ps O '^ Digitized9^^sofm (only long) 4 LETTERS. § 2. § 2. For s there is a double sign in the small charac- ter : evye, ^^re. § 22. In diphthongs the accent, like the breathing (§ 12), is put over the second vowel : ^evyei, tovto. When the circumflex accent and the breathing meet upon the same vowel the accent is placed over the breathing : ovro'?, ^ffo<;, 'Uto?. The acute, in a similar case, stands to the right of the breathing : aye, ep'xpfiai, \.(OV. Obs. — The acute is placed between the two points of a diaeresis (9), dffiios, but the circumflex over them, irpavvat. D. — Punctuation. § 23. For the purpose of dividing sentences and periods the Greeks employ the comma and the full- point. For the sign of interrogation they tise the semicolon : rl etTra? ; what did you say ? For the colon or semicolon they place a point at the upper part of the line : epaTco vfmr tl eTrotija-aTe ; I ask you : what did you do? iairipa rjV Tore riXdev w)fyeXopr]^, hreastplate : Att. ayopd, Ion. ayopri, market: Att. vavs. Ion. vijCs, ship: but Ion. (xftrofi/Spi'ij for Att. Iieartifi^pia, midday. 2. The Doric, on the contrary, prefers a : Att. Stj/ios, Dor. Sap.os, ■people : Att. /iijTijp, mother. Dor. (xdnjp (comp. Latin m4ter) : Dor. 'Addva for 'A^ijra, goddess Athena, even in Attic poets. 3. The Ionic dialect often changes c to ei, and o to ou : Att. |eVor, Ion. ^eij/os, foreign : Att. «/eKa, Ion. eii/cica, on account of: Att. }i6vos. Ion. fioScos, aZonc ; Att. ovop.a, Ion. oSj/o/io, name. Earely o to ot, or a to ai : Att. rjyvoria-c, Ion. rfyvoii^tre, he knew not. § 26. Dialects.— The New-Ionic dialect has moreover the diphthon<» v, which, however, only comes in place of av in the other dialects. Savjia for 6aviia, wonder: etuvrov for tavrov, of himself: av must be pronounced as ou. Digitized by Microsoft® ■§ 33. CONSONANTS. 9 the spurioits diphthongs, a, rj, m, in which the under- Tirritten iota is not heard. (Comp. § 8.) § 28. The Greek language also combines v with i, but •only before Towels : fivta, a fly. § 29. We further distinguish the obscure o-sound (o, w), the medium a-sound (a), and the clear e-sound (e, iy), fl,nd the more obscure v from the clearer t. B. — The Consonants. § 30. The consonants are divided : I. According to the position in the mouth where they are produced, i.e., ■according to their organ (Spyavov, " instrument "), into : — 1. Gutturals (throat-sounds) k, y, x- 2. Dentals (teeth-sounds) t, S, 6, v, X, p, a. 3. Labials (lip-sounds) it, /3, ^, /x. § 31' II. According to their poioer, that is, whether they can be pronounced with or without a vowei into : — § 32. 1. Mutes (mutae) :— (a.) hard (tenues) k, t, tt. (5.) soft (mediae) 7, h, /8. (c.) aspirated (aspiratae) X' ^> i>- Obs. — The aspirated consonants contain each a hard consonant with the rough breathing, x therefore=K (kh); 5=t (th); <^=,r' (ph). § 33. 2. Vocals (semivocales) : — (a.) Liquids (liquidae) A,, p. (b.) Nasals (nasales) 7 (7 before gutturals, § 4), v, fi, (e.) Sibilant (sibilans) o- (9). § 32. Dialects. — In the Ionic dialect the aspirates often lose the breathing : hinojiai for Attic Sixofiai, accept; avns for Attic av6is, again. The New-Ionic sometimes transposes the breathing : kiBwv for Att. ;^tTa)j', tunic ; ivdeirev for Att, ivrevBfv. Digitized by Microsoft® 10 VOWELS IN COMBINATION. § 34. § 34. The double cmsmants belong to both kinds : ^, i/r, f : for f =Ko-, ■\lr='ira, f=S with a soft sibilant (§5). OJs. — Ko- only occurs in compounds with ck : iKo-w^o), I rescue. Chap. III. — Combinations and Changes of Sounds. A. — Vowels in Combination. § 35. In the inner part of a word not aU vowels may § 34. Dialects. — A peculiarity of the Greek language is the want of the breathing v. The v, however, was not altogether wanting ; for 1. The digamma (§ 3, D.) occurred in the Homeric dialect in the beginning of the following words : ayvvfu, break ; SXis, nume- rous; SKiaKOfiai, am caught; ava^, ruler; ava<7tra>, rule; avhava, please ; apaws, tender ; aarv, city ; eap, spring [yer'] ; eSpos, swarm, people ; eUoan, twenty [Dor. fiKari, Lat. viginti] ; e'lKia, yield ; eiXm, press; eK-qTi,wiUingly ; cKvpos, father-in-law ; eKoiv, willing ; cX^ro/ioi, hope; the pronominal Stem e (to, sui) i'oiKa, appear; ciros word; eXnov, spoke ; cpyov, work ; fpya>, close in ; 'dppa, go on ; ipvm, draw ; ■ epea, shall say ; iuBffs, clothing ; dpa, dress (Stem fes, Latin vestis) ; eTTjs, relative; rjhis, agreeaUe ;"lXior, city llios ; Icros, equal; oIkos, house ; olvos, wine (vinum). On the operation of the digamma, see § 63 D., 75 D. 2. The f in the middle occurred in ois, sheep, from ofis, (Latin avis') ; vrj-os, of the ship, from vaFos (Latin navis). Gen. of vav-s. 3. The Dorians and Aeolians retained the digamma at the be- ginning of many words : Aeol. feVoy, year. Dor. KSioj, own. 4. In Homer, at the beginning of many words, e stands for f. U, Mm, self ; ifUoiKeriTe=(bikiJTe ^ametis): aUoiv^aRav, vnwiUing. Some of the forms usually uncontracted are, on the Digitized by Microsoft® § 37. VOWELS IN COMBINATION. H combine. The dissimilar vowels pair with one another best : — 1. The soft generally remain unchanged before the hard vowels : a-o^ia, wisdom : Xua, I loosen : lavw, I slumber: vet, it rains: evvoia, benevolence. 2. Sard vowels before soft ones become diphthongs : ev, eS, good : Trail?, iral is often changed into the thinner sound e : noo-«de oi „ fr/Xdetj fjjXoir, thou art jealous. )j JJ ou J, olvosts olvovs, abounding in wine Ohs. — Of I become ov wlien the et represents the lengthemng of e (§ 42). § 38. b) When the medium a-sound and clearer e-sound meet, the first in order gains the upper hand : — ae become a in aeKtov aKotv, unwilling. "V JJ a „ TijxdrjTe Ti/iaTf, honoretis. aet „ a „ dci'So) SSo), / sing. "V JJ „ Tt/Xrfj79 Ti/ms, honores. ea ,, 17 „ cap ?ip, spring. eai „ J] „ \ieai, \ir], thou art loosened. Tjat ,, V JJ Xuijaj "Kvri, solvaris. Ols. — In the contractions of aei and eoi, sometimes ai takes the place of a, ft that of 77. So from aeucqs, unfit, comes ni'/cijj ; from dei'pca, I lift up, comes dxpa ; from Xvcai comes \iu (with \vrj). Exceptions, §§ 130, 243 (rijiav), 244. § 39. Another mode of treating vowels which meet together is called Synizesis (o-wi^rjcrK;, i. e., sinking). It consists in the first vowel being written but not pro- nounced as a Towel : 0io<; — as one syllable. § 39. Dialects.— %mzesis is frec[uent in Homer, especially after « : nrjKTitdSeto, of Pelides : xp^o'^oi.s, aureis : vea, navem : also TToKias, cities : oydoos, the eighth. * Digitized by Microsoft® §43. OTHER TOWEL CHANGES. 13 B. — Other hinds of Vowel-changes. § 40. Another change of the Towels consists in their being lengthened. Two kinds of lengthening are dis- tingviished, tIz. : — 1. Organic kngthening, i. e., that which is required by inflexion or derivation. By organic lengthening — a generally becomes i; nnda>, I honour, Fut. Tifufirtt). o always „ a fijXom, I am jealous, „ ^rjkixra f ,, )> 1 TToiiui, I make, „ ttoi^o-o). X either „ I rta, I honour, „ tTo-o). or „ ci St. X«r, Pres. XeiVo), / leave. sometimes „ oi „ \ar. Adj. \om6s, remaining, V either „ v \va>, I hose. Put. Xoo-m. or „ ev St. , J flee. § 41. Ohs. — After e, i, and p, a is changed to a instead of ij :, ida, I leave, allow; fut. cd, are given in § 147, and in which a becomes ij in § 270. § 43. The three short hard Towels often interchange in one and the same Stem, when, generally, e is re- garded as the Stem-Towel : rpeirco, I turn ; erpairov, I § 40. Dialects. — The extension of v to ou appears in flK^Xovda, am come, from Stem e\v6 (§ 327, 2). § 41. Dialects. — The Old and New-Ionic dialect does not avoid the combinations eij, irj and prj : iTeij=Attic Ired, pasture : lrjTp6s=Att. larpos, physician : 7rftp^tropai= Att. iveipdaopai, I will try. The Doric , dialect, on the contrary, regularly lengthens 2 inte a : nfisa-a=niji^\6^,flarm. 7] also is at times changed to co : apijyo), I help ; Apayo';, helper. C. — Consonants in combination with one another. § 44. Consonants, in regard to their combiaation, are subject to still greater limitation and change than the vowels. Those which are dissimilar (comp. §§ 32, 33) ■agree best with one another, especially the mutes with the liquids. That discordant consonants may continue together, they are either made more like one another (assimilated) ■or more unlike (dissimilated). The essential laws for the necessary changes of consonants are the following : § 45. 1. Before mute dentals (§§ 30, 31) only conso- nants of other organs which are of the same order (that is, both hard, both soft, or both aspirated, § 32) can stand; consequently, the only allowable combinations of sounds are — kt, ttt, 78, ySS, %3-, , I persuade. KOTT-p-os „ Kopp6s, a striking, from kott-t-o), I strike [summui from sup-mus']. Te-Tpt0-pat „ Terpippai, I have heen rubbed, from rpi^a, I rub. ypa<^-pa „ ypdppa, letter, from ypd „ ypair-irco, 'wvitten ypd^jrco, I shall write,irova.ypd:= Att. Itr-pev: KeKopv8pivos, equipped, from St. Kopv8 (^Kopv(ra-a)=MSiitm!iik&f^eimofm 16 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. § *»- become | and ^;r : hence n-XcK-wm becomes" jrXe'|iB from ttXeko), I weave ; \em-i0tizedby Microsoft® §51. CONSONAIITS IN COMBINATION. 17 fi(iKvvvT-cri,hccorResSfiKm(ri,i i „i >,from St.SiiKwvT Nom. SeiKwC-s, iTncvS-a-a „ o-7rei(r(a,| ^^^^ff^J'^ » ., OT^fS Pres. o-TrsVSca. TrevS-aronat „ ireia-oixai, I shall suffer, „ „ ttcj/S Prea. n-ei,(r;(, New Att. dap pa, I am courageous. § 51. 7. !» remains unchanged before mute dentals; it becomes the nasal 7 before gutturals (§ 4), /t before labials, and is assimilated before liquid consonants : avv-TiBtjiu, I put together, is unchanged. (Tvv-KaKea, I caU together, heoomcs crvyKoKeo. crvv-xpovos, contemporaneous, „ avyxpo^os. tv-veipos, experienced, iu-^jmxos, inspirited, ev-fierpos, metrical, o-vv-pca, I flow together, •ffuv-Xeyo), I collect. fliiTfipos from fv and jrelpa, proof [so in-peritus becomes ini- peritus]. ep.'^Xo^ from iv and ■v/'ux'7> s"**^- efLfierpos from ev and fierpov, measure [so in-modicus be- comes im-modious]. avppea from crvv and pera, I flow [so con-ruo becomes cor-ruo]. ffuXXey© from (rvu and Xeyo), / j'oiAer [so con-ligo becomes col-ligo]. Ohs. 1. — v in the preposition iv remains unchanged before p : cvpvBp^s, rhythmical. 2. — V is combined with p by means of S in av-S-p6s Gen. of avrip, man. So is p, with p by ^ in p^(nip,-P-pia, mid-day, instead of fuatjp^e^pta (jieiros and ^pepa, comp. § 61, c). § 51. Dialects. — In the Epic dialect |3 is often inserted between fi and p, and between p. and X : /it-fi-j3-XoMca, 7 have gone, from Stem /loX, by metathesis (§ 59). p before X or p becomes at the be- ginning of a word : j3Xp^(a, I proceed, n-driiu „ 6i-6rijXi, I put. Tre-(f>vKa „ e--6ri-6i. d) Isolated instances are : afjiir^ym, embrace, for afi^ey(a) ; iKC'xeipia, for ej^e'yeipia, armistice, from exeiv, to hold, and xdp, hand. § 52 and 53. Dialects. — ^The aspiration is omitted in New Ionic . iitripepos, for a day ; a.m-q\ii, I send away ; ovk ovTms= oix ovras^ not so; air oS,from the time when, Att. dpa, tiU, for 6-(l>pa from the relative Stem & (§ 213, 217) exa for eX, I lury, Put. 6a^6s, grave. rpecj) „ Tpc(/). •rpi}(a, I run, „ fl/>e|o/iat I rpv^ „ Bpiirra, I rub to pieces, „ Bpir^a > (§260). ;<^ ,, Tvcjxo, I smoke, ,, 6v\lra> J Obs. — In the Passive First Aorist (§ 296) and in the Infinitive of the Perf. Mid. the aspirate of the Stem remains unchanged, yet the initial tenuis is aspirated, because the Stem-consonant is not felt to be necessarily an original aspirate, as it might have been modified by the influence of the 6 after it (§ 45) : idpi^BifV, Te6parse, „ X^P- § 56. 2. t is assimilated to a preceding X : /mXXox from pdK-iov, more, from paka, much. aWopai „ SX-Copjii, I spring, St. dX. [salip]. aXXos „ ak-1,09, another [alius]. oreXXcB ,, (rrfX-io), / send, St. (TTf\. § 57. 3. Gutturals (r and 6 less frequently) coalesce with a following t to acr (New Att. tt) : ^cra-av from fjn-Mv, less, St. fjK, superl. ^Kia-ra. Opaa-a-a „ QpaK-ta, Thracian, fem. (masc. 6p5|) St. &paK. Taa-a-a „ ray-ia, I arrange, St. ray. iKaa-a-av,, i\ax-i--dai for yeypa(j)-a-dai, to be written, St. ypa, Pres. ypd(j)o>. TcTV^-6e „ Te-Tvcj)-cr6e, be ye struck, „ tvtt, „ TinTa). b) a- between two vowels is very often rejected : Xiye-ai, Xeyi; (§ 38) for Xfyetrat, thou art said, St. Xey, Pr. Xtyo). ibfiKw-o for e6eiKwKvpoos=aKippoos, swift-flowing. Often also hoth forms are usual together : 'Ax'Xeuj and 'AxiKKcis, 'OSutreur and 'Odv(r(Tevs. § 63. Dialects, — ^The Homeric dialect admits the hiatus in many- cases : the most important are : 1. The hiatus is only apparent in words with the digamma : Kara oiKov for Kara foiKov, at home. 2. It is allowed after weak vowels in forms with which elision is not usual : naiSi oiraa-acu, he gave to the son. 3. It is softened by a pause or a csesura after the first short syllable of the third foot : Kadtjo-o, iji^ 8' inmetdeo fivBc^, sit down, and obey my word ; rav o» ?| iyevovro eVi fieyapoitri, of which six were horn to him in the chambers. 4. A long vowel or diphthong before another in the thesis be- comes short, and causes only an improper or weak hiatus : 'ArpuSai re Kol aXXoi €VKvr]p.iBes 'Ax<"-°'h ^^ Atridae and ye other weU-greaved Achaeans -»--_ Comp. § 75^ j) 2. Digitized by Microsoft® § 65. ElilSION — CEASIS. 23 § 64, 1. Elision, or the rejection of the final vowel, of which the apostrophe (§ 15) is the sign, occurs only with short final vowels, but never with v; most fre- quently at the end of dissyllabic prepositions, conjunc- tions, and adverbs : Itt' aiT& , with Mm, for lirl avraj, ovB' eBvvaro, he could not even, aW' ^\6ev, but he came ; less frequently at the end of nouns and verbs : 01 iravr eha/yyeXXovre';, i. e., oi irdma eha'yyeK'KovTe';, who reported the whole, Obs. 1. — The prepositions jrepi round, axpi and /lexP' ^^^> ^^^ the conjunction Sn that, never suffer elision. 2. In compounds also the elision occurs, without however heing indicated by the apostrophe : eTr-epxoiuu from iTn-ep^oiiai, I come up ; but ircpiipxoiiai, I go round, 3. On the change of consonants occurring with elision (e'^' fniepa), see § 52. § 65. 2. Cram (Kpaa^, mixing), is governed, on the § 64. Dialects. — Elision is much more frequent with the poets than in prose ; thus, not only f and •, even in nominal and verbal forms are elided, but also the diphthongs at and oi, in the verbal terminations /iot, = pij iya ne ego, ^St] '^epx^rai = rjbjj i^epxerai hfi is dkeady coming out. Digitized by Microsoft® 24 STNIZBSIS. § 66 whole, by the laws given for contraction (§ 36 — 39). I occurs chiefly after forms of the article, of the relativ( pronoun (especially o quod and a quae), after the pre position irpo, for, before, Lat. pro, and the conjunctior Kai, and. The syllable produced by crasis is neeessarili, long. The sign of crasis is the coronis (§ 16) : rop/aOd bona, from to, ar/a9d, raXKa from to, dWa, the othei things, rovvofia, the name, from to ovofjua, ravTo, the game, for TO avTO. Ohs. 1. — The rough breathing of the article or relative maintains its place in spite of crasis : ai/ijp the man irregular for 6 avrjp, in which case the coronis disappears ; in Bolimriov from to Ijidnov the dress, the spiritus asper has changed r into 6 (§ 52), so also Bdrepov irregular for to irepov tlie other. 2. The new syllable, formed by crasis, has i subscript only when t is the last of the contracted vowels: koI eV arid in becomes kuu, but koI elra and then becomes Kara. On the accent with crasis, § 89. § 66. 3. Synizeds (sinking, comp. § 39) occurs at the meeting of two words, only after a long vowel, espe- cially after the conjunctions eirei, as, rj, or, rj num, fiij, not, and after eyo), I: ewel oi,as not; firj dXkoi, ne alii, eyw^v, I not. It is perceptible only in The poets, who reckon the two syllables as one. § 67. M Greek word ends in any eonsmant except the vocal ones, v, p, and ? (f, -,|r). The only exceptions are : the negative ou/c (before consonants ov) and the prepo- sition eK, out of (before vowels ef), which attach them- selves so closely to the following word that their « can hardly be looked upon as final. When any other consonant, except these three, appears at the end of a word, it is usually rejected : p.Oii honey (meT)io-! jieXiT (Gen. fieXiT-os) 1 ,r&p.a hody „ crcop.aT (Gen. , I Jiold together ; e^'dyeo, I drive out. B. — Quantity/. § 74. With regard to the quantity (length or short- ness) of syllables, the same rules, in general, hold good for the Greek as for the Latin. An important excep- tion, however, consists in one vowel before the other not needing to be short in Greek : Ow^, penance ; '\d6<;, people ; ^eKrfov, better. Nor do the special Latin rules for final syllables hold good in Greek. § 75. A syllable is long by nature when it contains a long vowel or diphthong : ifiet<;, you ; Kpivw, I decide ; aha, I sing. The recognition of quantity in Greek is rendered much easier by the characters : h6fw<;, room, house; S&fui, hmtse ; in other cases by the accent (§§ 83, 84) ; the rest can be learnt only by practice, and from the lexicon. Ohs. — Every contracted syllable must, of course, he long : aicay. J ^ aiKiov, lp6s = Upos, Iwly. § 76. A syllable is long by position, when a vowel is § 74. Dialects. — Diphthongs and long vowels are very seldom shortened before vowels in the same word : Hom. olos '^qualis " "), and /Se^Xijat, with short tj. § 75. Dialects. — 1. The' quantity of the common vowels is very fmcertain generally, but especially in Hom. "tojiev, let us go. Apes Apes, Ares, Ares. 2. A final syllable ending in a long vowel or diphthong in Hom. and the tragic choruses is shortened before a following vowel : o«oi fcrai/, they were at home ('"" '), rjjievri iv, sitting in^'"" '). Comp. § 63, D. 4. But those words which began with digamma (§ 34, D.) leave a preceding vowel long in Hom. : xoXXct re arlX^av koI tl/uicriv (" " " ""), glittering with beauty and garments. Digitized by Microsoft® 28 QUANTITY. §77. followed by two or more consonants, or a double conso- nant, whetner . a) both consonants or the double consonant stand m the same word : x^/'A'"' ^oy {' ")> e'l'?' ^^^ C ")' Ka b) the first concludes the first word, and the rest begin the second : Oeo'i Be, hut God {"' "), iv tovto), meanwhile ( ), or c) both or the double consonant stand at the begin- ning of the second word : to, KTTjfiaTa, the goods ( ), d i^Syv, the living one (" "). Ohs.—When the vowel thus placed is already long hy nature, this must be indicated in the pronunciation : the a in TrpSa-a-o), I act, sounds differently from that of Tatra-m, I arrange, though both words make a spondee in verse ; that in fiaXKov different from that of koKKos, beauty, though both form a trochee. § 77. When a vowel short by nature stands before a mute with \, p, v, /m following, the syllable may be long or short : reKvov, child (' "), tk^Xo?, blind (^ "), rt Spa?, what art thou doing ('')? The syllable, however, is necessarily long in the fol- lowing cases : § 78. a) when the mute stands at the end of the first, the liquid or nasal at the beginning of the second word : e'/c vrjcav, out of tJie ships ( ), and in compounds in which the mute belongs to the first element : iKXeya, I speak out ( ) ; b) when a soft mute (/3, 7, S) is followed by X, /a, or v : ^i^Xos, book (■ "), Ta/y/j,a, task ( " "), e'^iZva, snake ( ). § 77. Dialects.— In Horn, a mute with X, p, v, fz following, almost regularly makes position: reKvov ri Kkaieis, child, why weepest thou ? ( ), vttvos navbafioraip, all-subduing sleep ( " " "). Nay, even X, p, v, fi, at the beginning of words have often the power of lengthening the short final vowel of the pre- ceding word : KoKrjVTc iieyDiKrjVTe,abeaut'^ulandgreat ( """"V fi in the St»an Sei (SeTcrai), fear, and in Sijv, long, has the same effect. Digitized by Microsoft® § 83. ACCENTS. 29 Chap. Y. — Accents. § 79. The general rules for tlie accentuation of words are the following : — 1. Every word must have cme and can never have more than one principal accent, which is called simply the accent : iroKinrpop/iJLocrvv'q, busy occupation ; atrapa- <3-KevaaTo<;, unprepared. On the designation of words according to the accent, see §§ 17, 19, 21. § 80. 2. There are two kinds of accents, the sharp accent or the acute (o^ela), and the lengthened or the circumflex (irepccnrco/jievr]). On the mode of using both, see §§ 17, 21. § 81. 3. The acute may be upon long or short syllables, the circumflex only on such syllables as are long hy nature : as, Xeyeo, I say ; X'^jco, I cease ; Ka\6<;, beautiful ; a\,rjd'^<;, trUiC ; av6pco7ro<;, man ; KSLfievo^, lying ; Keirai, he lies ; aSi/ia, body ; eS, well. § 82. 4. The acute accent can be only on one of the last three syllables, and on the last but two only when the last is short: diroiKo<;, colonist, but not airoiKov (Gen.) ; eXeyov, I said, but not eKeyrjv, I was said. § 83. 5. The circumflex can be only on owe of the last two syllables, and on the last but one only when the iMst is short by nature : ctvkov, fig, but not avKov, (Gen.) ; o-m/jm, body, but not aafjuiTo^ (Gen.) ; irpd^i';, act, but not '7rpa^eipd^, hreast-plafe. Gen. Smpaxos. Comp. § 145. 2. Exceptions to 4 and 5 will be adduced separately in the chapters on infiexions. It is specially to be observed, that Digitized by Microsoft® 30 ACCENTS. S 84. most of the exceptions occur with the final syllables m cu and 01 : ajrotKot, although ot is long, yvmfiai, opinions, rvTrreTai, he is strucJc. Comp. §§ 108, 122 D. 3, 133, 157, 229, 268. § 84. e. A last syllable but one, when long by nature, can have no other accent but the circumflex, if the last is short by nature: (pevye, flee, not ^evye: ^PXov, I reigned, not fip^ov : rjKi^, of the same age, not ^\ff, (Gen. ipuKo<;) : 'Kparlvo'i, not 'Kpartvo<;. It may, however, be without an accent : elTri, speak ; avOpooiro'i, man. Obs. 1. — Apparent exceptions, such as more, so that, ^8e, this, are explained in § 94. 2. So fixed is the rule, apart from these cases, that the quantity of the final syllable or of the last but one may often be inferred from the accent : Wi (X), go ; wpSra [prima Nom. PI.] (&) ; yvvalKas (5), women, Aco. PI. ; yvaims (a), opinions. Ace. PI. § 85. 7. Compound words have the accent on the last part but one of the word, as far as is possible according to § 82, &c. : amOi, go away; a^CKo<;, friend- less ; (j)LK6' 'OSva-eu<;, I am Odys- seus = elfil 'OSuo-eu?, cttt' ^crav, there were seven = eirTo, rjaav. § 89. 4. With arasis (§ 65) the accent of the first word is lost : Tar/add, bona = ra wya6d, Oolfidriov, the dress = TO Ifidriov. Only when paroxytones change the first syllable by crasis into one long by nature, this receives a circumflex: ra ak\a, alia, gives raXKa, to epyov, the work, Totipyov. On the changes of the accent in declension, see §§ 107-109 ; on the accent of verbs, see §§ 229, and 331-333. § 90. The dissyllabic prepositions, with the exception of dfi<})l, dvrl,, dvd. Bid, when placed after the noun or verb to which they belong, throw their accent on to the first syllable : tovtoiv irepi about those (rrepX Totnav) ; in like manner when, used adverbially, they include the substantive verb, as irdpa = irdpean, it is there, near ; evi = evea-Ti, it is therein, is possible. This drawing back of the accent is called anastrophe. Comp. § 446. § 91. Some words of one and of two syllables unite so closely with the preceding word, that they throw their accent on to it. Such words are called enclitics (iyKXtTiical § 90. Dialects, — Prepositions, whose final syllable is lost by elision, have not the accent even when they occupy the position indicated in § 90. Horn. T^a-i trap elvdens xoKkcvov, among them I forged nine years long. Digitized by Microsoft® 32 ENCLITICS. § S2 Xe'^et?, i e. inclining words), and the throwing hack of th accent, is called inclination. § 92. The following are enclitics : 1. The indefinite pronoun rh, tI, some one, something through all forms (§ 214). 2. The three personal pronouns, in the forms /u,ov fiol, fi.e, mei, mihi, me; crov, croi, a-e, tui, tibi, te , 01), ol, e, sui, sibi, se ; crcficoiv, to them two ; and afiai,(v) to them. 3. The Indicative Pres. of el/Mi, I am, and of (j^Tjfii inquam, with the exception of the second Pers. Sing el and y<;. 4. The indefinite adverbs ttou or ttoOl, somewhere. TTij, somehow ; irol, somewhither ; iroOev, from somewhere , irore, sometime ; ttcb?, somehow ; -ttco, yet. 5. The particles 76, qwidem ; re, and ; rot, trulg ; vvv oi vv, now ; Horn. Keu or /ce, perhaps, I suppose ; pa, (apa), then , Horn, dijv, truly ; -Trip, very ; and Se (meaning towards and as a demonstrative appendage). Comp. § 212. § 93. These words throw their accent back on th( preceding word, in the following manner : a) A preceding oxytone leaves its sharp tone un subdued (§ 20), and this tnen serves also for the en clitic : aryaOov ri, something good ; avTo'i ifyrjatv, hi himself says. b) After a perispome the accent of the enclitic ii entirely lost : opo) rti/a?, I see some ; eS iarw, it is well Ti/J,a> a-e, I honour thee. c) After a paroxytom, enclitics of one syllable entirelj lose their accent; but those of two syllables retail their accent on the last syllable: ^tXo? /aov, my friend Xojo^ Tt?, a speech ; but \670t rti/e?, some speeches, Xoyan Tivojv (Gen. PL). § 92. Dialects. — The Ionic additional form of el, e?t is enclitic, si also ias (Ace. PI.) them = Att. o-^as and /xiV, Um, her, § 205 D Digitized by Microsoft® § 97. ENCLITICS. 33 d) Proparoxytofms and properispomes retain theii accent, but receive also from the following enclitic another accent as acute on the last syllable, which remains unsubdued: dvOpwirots rt?, a man; ^e^aiol ela-Lv, they are firm ; a-a/id ye, the body at least ; TratSes Tti'e?, some boys. e) Atona (§ 97) receive the accent of following enclitics as acutes : oil ^ijo-w, he says not ; as re, and Jioiv. § 94. Obs. — Several words of one syllable form one word with enclitics following : thus, asre, so that ; fire, sive ; ovre, neque ; jirjTc, neque ; owsre, capable ; osris, whoever ; rJToi, truly ; KaiToi, and yet ; to this also helongs the he mentioned in § 92, 5 : obe, this one ; o'lKaSe, homewards. These words form partly apparent exceptions to §§ 79 and 84. § 95. /) When sereral enchtics follow one another, each throws its accent upon the preceding : e'i rk fiol f&i'i*»]/i(fer(^ce®everal words of one 34 ATONA. § 8 syllable, which have so little independence, that i regard to accent they combine with the following word They are the following : 1. of the article, the forms o, t], ol, al ; 2. the prepositions, ev (in with the Dat.), eV or ei (into with the Ace), iic or i^ out of ; 3. the conjunctions, el, if, and o)?, how, that, th latter also in its use as preposition to ; 4. the negative ov or ovk (ovx). Ots. — ovxi, a more emphatic ov, is always accented. § 98. Atona receive the accent only in two cases, viz. a) when they are at the end of a sentence, and therefon have no following word on which they can rest : ^^? 5 ov ; Do you say so or not P ; so always ax; when place( after the word with which a comparison is made : 6eo d)?, like a god, Horn. ; b) when followed by an enclitic, which throws bad its accent : ov <^v, the city of Colophon. Most abstract substantives also, i. e. those which denote a condition, relation, act or property, are feminine : 9; iX/Trh, hope ; rj vmtj, victory ; t] BiKaiocrvvr), righteousness , rj TU'^vri]';, quickness. § 104. c) Many names of fruits are neuter : to (tvkov. the Jig ; most diminutives also both of masculine and feminine words : to 'yepovriov dimin. of yipcov, the ola man; to v TOiV of the Dat. Tois rats rois to the Ace. rovs Tas Ta the The following general rules on accentuation apply to all the declensions of substantiTOS. § 107. a) The accent remains unaltered on the syllable, on which it stood in the Nominative, as long as the general laws of accent allow : avOptoiro';, man, avOpayire (Voc), ctvkov, fig, avKa (Nom. PL). Exceptions, §§ 121 and 142, 181, 2. b) But when the original accentuation becomes im- possible by the length of the final syllable or by increase at the end, the accent is shifted only as near to the end of the word, and is changed only as much, as is absolutely necessary : avOpQ)7ro<;, man, dvOpaiTrov (Gen. Sing.), avOpcoTTOK (Dat. PI.) ; crwfj.a, hody, cr(i>iJLaro<; (Gen. Sing.), aco^aTav (Gen. PL); reX'XP';, wall, Te[j(ov'; (Gen. Sing.). § 108. c) The terminations ot and at are not con- sidered long in regard to accent, hence dvdpcowot, ryvMfuii, (jvcofir], opinion). § 109. d) The Genitives and Datives of aU numbers, if the last syllable is long, can never have the acute npon this syllable, bnt qnlv. the circumflex : iroTa/iov '38 THE A DECLENSION. § Ub Gen. Sing, of Trora/io?, river ; rififi Pat. Sing, of n-fir], honour ; ttoS&v Gen. PL of ttoi;?, foot; uurjvolv Gen. Dual of iJLT^v, mcmth. § 110. Originally there was only a single declension, for which reason much has still remained common, which we shall put together below, § 173. But we dis- tinguish Two Principal Declensions according, to the ending of the Stems : 1. the First Principal Declension (vowel declenMon), which comprehends the Stems ending in a and a, and 2. the Second Principal Declension (consonant declen- sion), which comprehends the Stems ending in conso- nants, but also those iu the soft Towels c, v, in diphthongs, and a small number of Stems in o. First Peincipal Declension. ( Vowel-declension^ § 111. The first principal declension is subdivided into two, viz. : A. — TJie A Declension B. — The O Declension. What is common to both is put together below, § 134. A. — The A Declension. (Commonly called the First Declension.) § 112. The A Declension comprehends those words, whose Stems end in a. In certain cases, however, this a becomes tj. Hence the A Declension of the Greeks corresponds both to the A or first, and to the E or fifth Declension of the Latin language. § 113. The A Declension contains only Masculines and Feminines. The two genders are most easily distin-- guished in the Nom. Sing., in which the mascuUnes take ?, the feminines no case-ending. Hence the terminations Digitized by Microsoft® §115. THE A DECLENSION. 39 of the Nom. Sing, are in the feminine a, 17, in tlie masculine a?, 179. § 114. 1. Feminines. Examples. Stems. Xoipa^-land X(^pa [terra] yXao-cra, tongue yXtoaaa Tifirj, honour rip. a Singular. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. ;i(pas X^pf [terrae] XapSrv [terra-m] Xeipa [terra] yXata-o'a yXaia-aris yXaxro'Tj yXao-aa-v yXaa-aa TlpT] Tipijs npjj [re-i] Ttpr)-!/ [re-m] Dual, N. A. r. G.D. Xi>pa Xo>paip yXcotrtra y\a)(ro-aiv Tipd ripaiv Plural. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. XS>pai [terrae] Xatpav Xi>pais Xi>p3.s [terras" Xapat [terrae_ y\a>iT(Tai yXaxTO-au yXma-crais yXoxrads yXacra'at Tipa'i TlpStV npais Tipis Tipal 6(d, (TKid, shadow ^ia, force Examples for Declension. 8o'|a, opinion TiiX-q, gate yrj, earth yvwp,Ti, opinion § 115. In certain cases in the Singular, but never in the Dual and Plural, a becomes tj. Hence the following rules : — 1. In order to form the Nom. Sing, from the Stem or from a given case-form of the Dual or Plural : §§ 115-117. Dialects. — 1. The Doric dialect never changes a into 7] : ripd TipaSj yXatrcra yXotco'ds. 2. The Ionic dialect changes every long a in the Singular into r) : a-otpiT], Trirpr], ^acrtXeirjs, poLpj/. Short a is generally unchanged, as ^ao-iXeia, po'ipdv; hut in ahstract suhstantives in -etS, -oia, a is likewise changed into rj : dXrjdelri, truth, Att. dXri6eia, einrXoiij, good passage, and also in Kvitrcrrj, steam from fat, SkuXXjj. The a. remains in 6fd and some proper names. 3. The Voc. of vvp^^tgmMg/iMmmfVShi Horn. vip4><^- 40 THE A DECLENSION. § 116. a) a remains in the Nom. Sing, after e, i or p, (§ 41) : St. ao^ia, Nom. Sing. crocf>id, wisdom ; Dat. PL Trirpai^, Nom. Sing, irerpa, rock. I) a remains in the Nom. Sing, after o- and after the double consonants if, f, i|r, v, \eawa Xeaivoov (Exceptions, § 181. Comp. § 123). § 119. The Dat. PI. originally ended in ;s Kpirrjs, Judge master § 121. In the Masculines, as well as in the Feminines, when a vowel or p precedes, the a of the Stem remains and is long ; after every other letter it becomes 17 in the Nom. Dat. and Ace. Sing. Those words which in the Nom. Sing, end in ti;-s, names of peoples, and compound words, have a short in the Voc. Sing. : TroXlra, liepad (Nom. Sing. Hepar]-^ Persian), ^eafieTpa (Nom. Sing, yecofiirprj-'; land- measurer). The Voc. Sea-TTora (Nom. Sing. Seo-TroTT?-? lord) draws back the accent, contrary to § 107, a, to the first syllable. All others have rj in the Vocative : KpoviSrj (Nom. Sing. Kpovi87]-<;). § 122. The Declension of the Masculines is distin- guished from that of the Feminines — ■ 1. in the Nom. Sing, by ? being added to the Stem, 2. by the Gen. Sing, ending in o v. Obs. — The termination of the Gen. Sing, of the masculines is pro- perly -0, which with the a of the Stem forms -ao (see the Homeric dialect) ; by weakening a to e (§ 118 D.) and contrac- tion (§ 37) arises ou : woKirao (ttoXit-co) ttoXiVou. §§ 121 and 122.— Dialects.— 1. The Epic dialect in some words omits the s of the Nom. Sing., iii which cases the a remains short : imroTo., horseman, ve(^eX?)yepe'Ta, cloud-gatherer. (Comp. Lat. poeta, scriba.') 2. The Dorians also in the masculines put 5 for 71 and contract 5o into a. (§§ 24 D. ; 37 D. 3.) 3. Homer has three forms in the Gen. Sino-. : a) the original -So : 'Arpeibdo ; b) -ea> with the quantity transposed (where € is lost by synizesis, §§ 37 D., 39 D.) : 'ArpeiBea. The accent remains unchanged, in spite of the a> in the final syllable. The New-Ionic form is the same, c :) -a, by contraction : 'Ep/icia (Nom. Sing. 'Epp,ela-s = Attic 'Ep/i^s), ^o/)f(B (Nom. Sing, ^opeds). Comp. § 37 a. Digitized by Microsoft® § 125. THE DECLENSION. 43 ^op^as (contracted from /3opea-s nortJi wind), contracts the ori- ginal So in tlie Gen. Sing., after Doric fashion, into d: fioppd. The same takes place with some Doric and Eoman proper names, and a few other words : 'SvWas, Sidla^ 6pvi6o6fipas, fowler Gen. Sing. a. § 123. In the Dual and Plural the Declension of the Masculines is the same as that of the Feminines. Exceptions to the accentuation prescribed in § 118 are p^p^onj-r, usurer, irrjcrlai, trade-winds. Gen. PL j(pfj(rTa>v (xpicrSiv in the 0-declension from xpnoros, good) and irrja-iav. B. — The Declension. {Commonly called the Second Declension.) § 124. The O Declension comprehends those words whose Stems end in o, together -vvith the few whose Stems end in w (§ 132). It answers to the o- or Second Declension in Latin. § 125. The O Declension is the complement of the A Declension in regard to gender. It contains Masculines and Neuters, but only few Feminines. The termination of the Masculines and Feminines in the Nom. Sing, is o - ?, that of Neuters o-v [Lat. u-s, itrm']. The Masculines and Feminines are declined alike ; the Neuters are distinguished from them (comp. § 105^^ only by— 1. The Nom. and Voc. Sing, taking the Accusative- ending V : Bmpo-v (gift) [donu-m], 2. The Nom. Ace. and Voc. PI. ending in a : 8Sipa [dona\. Digitized by Microsoft® M THE O DECLENSION. 126. §123. Examples 6 avdpcoirO'S, man 17 6M-S, way TO hmpo-v, gift Stems. avBpaTTC 6bo doypo Singular. Mim. av6pamo-s [dominu-s] 6h6-s 8apo-v [donu-m] Gen. dvOpanov obov dapov Lat. av6pi>7Ta "domino] 6b(o dtopa dono] Ace. av6paiiro-v dominu-m] 6d6-v 8Spo-v donu-m 1 ' Voc. avBpanTe [domine] ode Sapo-v [donu-m ^1 Dual. N.A.V. dvdpuiTru) odo) dap CO G.D. dvQpWTTOiV oSoLV 8pa [donaj CTVKOV, fig yxeVpoj/, measure IpdrioVj Examples for Declension. 6e6s, God TvoTafios, river v6p,os, law TTovos, trouble KLvhvvos, danger jiios, life ravpos, hull Bdvaros, death § 127. Ohs. — The Feminines are partly known by the general rules already given (§§ 101, 103): ^5 4>,,y6s, esculent oak;^ ap.ne\os, vine; rj vtjitos, island; 17 fjmipos, continent, KopivBos. The folio-wing also are feminine : — 1. The names of different kinds of earth and stones: ^djipos, sand; Koivpos, dung; yv-<\ros, chalk; liXLveos, Irick; a-Trotos, ashes ; ■\JArj(l>os, pebble ; ^dcravos, touch-stone. 2. Different words for way: SSos, Ke-Xei^dos, drpanos, path; ipa^LTos, carriage-road. In the same manner ^ rd^ypos, dike ; but 6 crrcvaTTos, narrow way. 3. Words conveying the idea of a cavity : „Xdf , chest of drawers ; ym3os,jaw; /«/3ev, Nom. ypa^ev^, writer; St. and Nom. cfmrrip, saviour; St. p tjt op, Nom. prjTwp, orator; St. \eovT, Nom. Xecov, lion, leo ; St. and Nom. 07001', contest. § 138. b) Feminine are all Stems in S (Nom. -t? ,-«?), most in i (Nom. -t-9)j those in o (Nom. -co or -ca-?), and the names of qualities in ttjt (Nom. -tij-?) : St. eXTrtS, Nom. iKrrk, hope; St. iroXt, Nom. TroXt?, city; St. ire 160, Nom. -TreiO-L, persuasion; St. laoTrjr, Nom. la-orTf]'^, equality. § 139. c) Neuter are the Stems m fiar (Nom. ytta), p6v), diaphragm, mind; 6 TreXe^u? (St. ireXeKv), axe; 6 ^onrpvi (St. ^orpv), lunch of grapes ; 6 aTa^v^ (St. crra^u), ear of com; 6 a-cfy^^ (St. a-r]K), wasp; 6 /jlv'; (St. /ti/?), mouse [jwMs] ; o tp(;^i5s (St. ixSv), fish ; 6 arfp (St. ae/j), air ; to ttO/j (St. 'Kvp),fire; to vSaip (St. vBut), water. Of two genders (common) are several names of animals, as : 6 and 17 aXeKTpvau (St. dXe/crpuoj'), cooA and Aera; d and ^ &, or (TVS (St. ii or o-u), swine [susj; 5 and ^ at| (St. aiy), jroai; 6 and fj /3o{)s (Stem ^ov),ox; and many names of persons : d and f) nais (St. n-atS), 5oy and j'lVZ; 6 and ^ baljuov (St. baifiov), god and goddess ; 6 and ^ jxavrts, prophet and prophetess. § 141. The endings of the consonant declension are the following : Masculines and Feminines. Neuters. Sing. Nom. Oen. Bat. Ace. Voc. s or compensation ty lengthening OS X a OT V no ending or as in the Nom. no ending no ending Dual. N. A. V. a.B. OIV Plur. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. = Nom.. fS as 3 a a § 141. Dialects,— The Horn. dial, has oiiv for oiv in Gen. and Dat. Dual (comp. § 129, D.), mh-oUv, and in Dat. PI. frequently e (TO- 1(1/) for 0-1(1/): 7!0&*ff#((*X*^''*§SS^i(f): aiy-einiy). § 143, CONSONANT DECLENSION. 51 § 142. The accent in the Second Principal Declen- sion deviates from the rales laid down in § 107 in the following point : — Words of one syllable accentuate the Gfen. and I>af. of all numbers on the case-ending (circumflex if the vowel be long, § 109) : ttoS-o?, ttoS-i (but ttoB-o), irohoiv, iroSSiv, TToai. Exceptions. — 1. Participles, as : &v, heing, oyros ; /3as, going, fidvTos — accentuate the Genitive and Dative of all numbers on the last syllable but one. 2. TrSr, omnis, has jravros, iravri, but ttclvtoiv, 7raS)s, light; ij (j>^s, ilister ; ij 85s, torch; to ovs, ear; 6 arjs, moth; are paroxytones in Gen. PI. and Dual : jraiS-av, SiJ-d-av, 6(i-av, Tpii-(op, (jidr-av, (j)ci&-(ov, 698-coc, coT-oiv, (ri-av (Com- pare further §§ 177, 9). 4. The words which have become monosyllables by contraction ; §p = cap, spring (ver), rjpos, rjpi, § 142 6. In regard to the quantity it must be observed that several monosyllables, in spite of the short Stem-vowel, are lengthened: St. no 8, Nom. Sing, nov-s, foot; St. iravr, Nom. Sing. Neut. nav, everything; St. trvp, Nom. Sing. Trip, fire; St. a-v, Nom. Sing. Xel3 Singular. Norn. V. cfliXa^ fdux] (pXt-\JA pleb-s] Oen. (piXaK-os duo-is] (pXe^-6s pleb-is] Bat. XEl3-t pleb-il Ace. v\aK-a duc-e-m] 0Xe/3-a pleb-e-m] Dual. N. A. r. iXaic-es [duc-es] ^Xe^S-eff Gen. (fivXaK-a>v f duc-um] (^Xe/3-a>v Dal. (f>iXa^i.(v) <^X€l^l(l/) Ace. (fiiXUK-as [duc-es] (^Xt'/S-as Hzamples for Declension. '0 jxip/ij)^, ant, St. }i.vpfirfR fj (^dp/iiy|, lyre, St. tpop/ii-yy 17 jxaa-TL^, whip, St. pao-T-iy 6 Aiflioi|f, Aethiopian, St. AldtOTt if fiiii, cough, St. /Stjx § 145. AH these Stems are Masc. or Fern. The Nom. Sing, is formed by affixing ? to the Stem : the s with the final consonant of the Stem forms ^, -ylr, as in the Dat. PI. (§ 48). The Voc. is always the same as the Nom. Obs. — The Stem aXaireK has the vowel irregularly lengthened in the Nom. Sing., aXani]^, fox ; whilst on the contrary the long vowel in the Stems KtjpvK, (J>oi.vIk, is shortened in the Nom. ; KJjpvl, herald; (polm^, palm-tree; where the accent shows that the V aud t are short by nature (comp. § 83, Obs. 1). rpiy h:is Nom. Sing. 6oi|, hair, Dat. PI. (9pi|i(i/) (comp. § 54, «). Digitized by Microsoft® §t47. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 53 § 146. 2. Dental Stems, i. e. Steins ia t, 6, S, v. Exam. Stems. 7) Xa/«ias XafiTTaS lamp t6 (Tafia a-wjiaT body 6 yepoiv yepovT old man 6 Tfyepav Tjyefiov leader Sing. Nom. Gen. Bat. Ace. Voc. \afi7rd-s \afi7rdb-os \afi7ra8-t Xa/i7ra8-a Xa/i7ra-s a-Q}fjt.a cafxaT-os aSiiia (Tafia yipav yipovT-os yepovT-X yepovT-a yepov riyepav fiyep6v-os fjyefiov-i rjyeiiov-a ffyftiav Dual. N.A. V. a.B. XafiTToS-e Xa/ijrdS-otv (TWfmT-€ crajfidr-oiv yepovT-e yepovT-oiv fiyfp6v-e rfyepdv-otv Plural. N. r. Gen. Bat. Ace. Xa/iTraS-ff Xo/i7ra8-(BV Xa/A7ra-a"t(z') Xaju7ra8-as a-w/iaT-a (TafioT-av crafxa-a-i^v) (Tafifir-a yepovT-fS yep6vT-av yepov~(Ti(u) yepovT-as ffyepov-es rjyepov-av ijyepov-as Examples for Declension. rj TTarpl-s, native country, St. narpiS TO ovopa, name, St. ova par ff vv§, night {nox for nocts], St. pvkt [nocf] T) KaKOTTf-s, badness, St. KaKorrjT TO peXi, honey [mel], St. peXir 6 o8ovs, tooth [den-s for dent-s^, St. oSovt [dent] 6 SeXi^i'y, dolphin, St. Se\(\>lv 6 TTotprfv, shepherd, St. noipfv 6'''E\\rjv', Jffellen, St. 'EXXiji/ 6 dyav, contest, St. dyiov Adjectives : vivrf-s, poor, St. TrevrjT uKav, neut. ixov, unwilling, St. okovt dwpdypav, neut. anpaypov, inactive, St. dirpaypov. § 147. In the dental Stems, as in the Stems to be noticed below, the Nom. Sing. Masc. and Fern, may be formed in two ways, viz. : 1. wuh %««D,fii§ikJs^o^«t^^- ^^^°^" *^^' 54 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 1*^- sigma the consonants t, B, 0, when they stand alone, disappear altogether (§ 49) : Xa/47raS-9, Xa/J-'rra.-^, Kopv6-<;, Kopv-^, Mmet; but v and vt have the short vowels of the Stem lengthened by way of compen- sation (§ 42), so that d, tj V, become d, I, v; but e becomes e i, and o, ov: Travr-?, 7ra-?, everi/ ; ei*-?, el-?, owe/ 6BovT-: St. Troi/iei', Nom. Troifitjv, shepherd; St. riyefiov, Nom. Tjyeficov. If the Stem- vowel is long of itself, the Nom. Sing, is like the Stem : o ar/c6v, contest. The T of the Stems in vr in this formation is rejected according to § 67: yepovr, Nom. ^yeprnv (for shows that s is not a mere affix in XfXuKtir, one who lias loosened. Comp. x°P'-s', favour, St. x^P""- 05s. 2. The Stems in 6, 5, as well as those in avr, evr, always form the Nom. Sing, with sigma ; but Stems of substantives in ovT and the Stems in v generally without y. § 147 b. The Neuter has the pure Stem in the Nom. Ace. and Voc. Sing. (§ 136), as far as the laws of sound in regard to final consonants (§ 67) admit it : Xv66v(t), loosened (see § 187), \eXvK6 graceful, Dat. PI. xa/"'f <'■'(•')• See In- flexion, § 187). § 148. Dialects. — The Vocative of the Stem di/a/cT (Nom. Sing. «Va|, ruler) is in Hom. ava (shortened from a k a k t : comp. the neuter yaXa, § 14-7 5) ; some Stems in vt lose the v in the Voc. : "ArXo for "ATXavQr). § 149. Dialects. — Homer forms the Dat. PI. 7roa-a-i(v) instead of 7roS-cri(i'), Att. irop pT}TOp-OS pr)Top-L prjTop-a pJjTOp lirjTrip fmaterj lj.t]Tp-6s [matr-is] prjrp-i [matr-i] p.rjTep-a [matr-e-m] p.^rep 6r)p-6s etjp-i 6r)p-a ehp Dual. N.A.V. O.D. SX-e oK-oiv prjrop-e prjTop-oiu firjT€p-e prjT€p-OiV arjp-oLV Plural. N. F. 'Oen. Dat. Ace. oiX-fs [sal-es] a\-S>v [sal-um] dX-tri(v} aX-as prjTop-es pTJTop'OtV pr]Top-a-i(v) prjTop-as p.TjTep'es matr-es] prjTep-ayp [ma-tr-Tim] p.-qTpa-(TI.(y) p.T}Tep-as dtjp-CT Ojjp-utv 6i]p-cri{v) 6rjp-as Examples for Declension. t6 veKTap, nectar 6 Kparrjp, mixing-jug, St. Kparijp 6 aWfjp, aether, St. aldep 6 p, thief (fur), St. ipap § 151. The only Stem in X which forms the Nom. Sing, with Sigma is dX ; all Maso. and Pern. Stems in p form the Nom. Sing, without sigma (§ 147, 2) ; hence with long Stem-vowels the Nom. Sing, is like the Stem ; short Stem-vowels, however, are lengthened, i. e., e into r;, o into a. The neuter has the pure Stem in the Nom. Sing. : to rJTop, heart. Only the monosyllabic Stem nvp lengthens the v. to ttOq, fire (§ 142, 5). § 152. The Voc. Sing. Las the pure Stem : prjrop. The Stem o-mTijp (Nom. awrrip, saviour) shortens 17 into e, and draws back the accent (comp. § 148) : Voc. awrep. § 153. The Stems irarep, fiTjTep, Ovyarep, § 150. Dialects. — i; SKs, poet., the sea. § 153. Dialects. — The e is often retained in the Gen. and Dat. by poets : p.riTepos ; while it is rejected in other cases : Bvyarpa. Instead of aa-i(i') in the Dat. PI. there may be the f o-o-i(i/) men- tioned, § 141, D. : 6vyaTepeiTa-i(v). Digitized by Microsoft® Sl54. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 51 y a a- rep, Arj/jLrjrep (Noms. iraTrjp, father ; liryrrip, mother; dvyaTrip, daughter; yaaTifjp, belly ; Arj/j.'^T'ripy, reject e in the Gen. and Dat. Sing. (§ 61, c.) The first four throw the accent on the case-ending ; the last draws it back (Trarpo?, Aj^/iijr/aos). The e is accented where it appears : firjTepa, in spite of fiijrrjp, except in the Voc, where the accent is drawn back: iraTep, in spite of Trartip, but Ace. Sing. A-^firjrpa. In the Dat.. PI. the syllable rep becomes by metathesis (§ 59) rpa: fi7jTpd-a-i(y). Obs. — The Stem ao-Tep (Nom. Sing, da-rrjp, star) telongs to these words only in the formation of the Dat. PI. : da-Tpa.(ri(v). For dv^p (St. dpep), see, under the irregular words, § 177. 1. II. Vowel Stems. § 154. 1. Soft-Vowel Stems, i. e. Stems in t, and v. Exam. i; iroKis, city f) trvs, SOW TO aarv (daTo) city Stems. TToXt (TV Sing. Nom TTokl-S crv-s aCTTV Gen. 7roXe-a>ff av-os a(TTe-os or a(TT€-(OS Dat. (TToXe-V) TToXet according to § 157. 6 TTTixv-s, fore-arm ) ? ^""T'-^' ^Z'^ /• 1 fcoth according to § 157 17 (TTd(Ti-s, party , faction I Adjectives, § 185 Digitized by Microsoft® 58 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 155, § 155. The Norn. Sing. Masc. and Fem. is always formed by Sigma. The Neuter Sing, as well as the Vocative Sing, of all genders has the pure Stem. Yet sometimes the Norn, form is used for the Vocative, and this is the case in all monosyllables. In the Ace. Sing. Masc. and Fem. v is affixed to the Stem. On the lengthening of monosyllabic Stems, § 142 b. But this lengthening takes place also in the Nom. and Ace. Sing, of some polysyllabic words. § 156. Barytones in vr, tZ, lO, uS, vd (Nom. 19, 119), form the Ace. Sing, generally by affixing v after rejecting the Stem-consonant: St. epoh (Nom. epi-'i, strife), Ace. epi-v; St. KopvO (Nom. Kopv-';, helmet), Ace. Kopv-v ; ^i. opvld (Nom. opvl-';, bird), Ace. opvl-v. The Oxytones, on the contrary, always have a: e^.7^^-9, hope, Ace. eXTriSa; /cXet'?, key, stands alone; St. KXeiS, Ace. likelv, (seldom KkelB-a,) Ace. PI. /cXet? or KkeiSa's. s, hope Examples. 77 i'pi-s, strife Tj eXwi'-r, Stems. eptS i\wi8 Singular. epl-s eXirl-s €pi8-os eKnld-os epiS-i eXTTi'S-t i'pi-v iXiriS-a § 157. Most Stems in i, as well as adjective and some substantive Stems in v, change theii- final vowel to e in Gen. and Dat. Sing., and in all the cases of the § 156. Dialects. — The Ace. Sing, in a of dental Stems is more frequent in Horn. : y\avKo>7rib-a {yXavKoiins, hright-eyed), epih-a ; KKeis is KKrjts, Ace. K\r]'i8-a. § 157. Dialects. — The Ionic dial, leaves i unchanged : Gren. iroXi-os, Dat. w6\T (from iro'Xi-i), Nom. PI. 7rdXt-ey, Gen. jroXi-mi', Dat. in Herod. 7r6\i-(n(v'), Horn. iroKi-ea-cn(y), Ace. noKt-as (Herod, also jroXtr). Other additional forms of the Hom. dialect are : Gen. Sing. ■rro\r]-os, Dat. Sing. iroXe-V and iroXrj-i, Nom. PL TroXij-fs, Ace. PI. 7r6\Tj-as. The Stems in v have always y in the Gen. Sing. The Dat. Sing, only is contracted : ttijx". — eipi-s, hroad, has the additional form evpea in the Acc. Sing. Digitized by Microsoft® §158. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 59 Dual and PI. Before the ending of the Gen. Sing, this « remains unchanged ; in the Stems, however, in t, and in some substantive Stems in v, e is followed by cos (instead of o?), called the Attie termination, which does not prevent the accent from being on the antepenult : 7ro\e-t09, •7re\€K£-eo'; (Tre\eKV-<;, axe). In the Dat. Sing, ei is contracted into et, in the Nom. PI. 66? and Ace. 6a? into et?, and ea of neuter substantives into rj. Adjectives maintain the uncon- tracted form ea : aarrj, but ykvKea. § 158. The contraction of 6 6 to i? in the Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual is rare. The Gen. PI. of Stems in i follows the accent of the Gen. Sing. : Troke-cov like TroXe-to?. Most substantive Stems in v leave this vowel un- changed; but others like aaTv follow the analogy of Stems in t, and change v into e. ve are sometimes contracted into v in the Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual ; in the Ace. PI. also we find t%^t)?, with lyQv-a'^ {I'^Oi-^;, fisK), and 6(f)pv^, Ace. PI. of ofpv-';, eyehrow. eyx^eXv--;, eel, retains v in the Sing. : Gen. e^^eXu-o? : but changes it in the Dual and PL into e : Nom. PI. €7^^Xei?. The adjective ffi|Oi-?, acquainted with, St. Ihpi,, keeps its I imchanged through all the cases. § 158. Dialects. — The Dat. Ixdv'i is in Horn, coatracted into IxBvl. In the Dat. PI. o-is sometimes doubled : viKv-aai^v) with yEKu-c(7crt(i') {vUv-s, corpse) Digitized by Microsoft® 60 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 3E&. § 159. 2. BipTaJiong Stems, i. e. Stems in ev, av, ov. Exam. 6 /SacriXfiy >; ypavr 6 and ij ^ovs Stems. /Sao-iXeu ypav Pov king old woman ox Sing. Norn. ^aa-iXev-s ypav-s pov-s "bo-s Gen. ^aa-iXe-ojs ypa-os ^o-6s bov- s] Dai. (^acTiXc-c) ^acnXei ypa-t fio-t ibov-ij Ace. patriKe'd ypav-v Pov-v bor-e-mj Voc. ^aa-tXev ypav /SoO Dual. N.A.r. ^aaiXe-e ypa~e Pi-e a.D. Paa-iki-oiv ypa-oiv ^o-oXv Plural. N. V. (/3acrtXe-ey) ^aaO^rjs or ^ao'tXels ypa-ss j3o-fs [bov-es] Oen. ^afrtXe-av ypa-S>v fio-av rbo-um] Bat. /SacrtXeij-fft^v) ypav-(Ti(v) j3oi'-(7t(v) Ace. (Soo-iXe-oj ypav-s /3oI-r Examplee for Declension. 6 yovcv-s, parent 6 iepei-s, priest ' OSvirirev-s, 'Ap^iXXfu-r. § 160. All dipMhong Steins affix ? in the Norn. Sing, and cri,(v) in the Dat. PI. ; those in av and ov affix v in the Ace. Sing, to the Ml Stem. In the Yocat. Sing, the Stem appears pure. Before Towel case-endings, i. e., in all other forms, the V of the Stem was changed into f (§ 34, D.): /Sof-o? [bov-is], and then ■ was entirely lost : /3o-os [i8o-(5i/ = bo-um] (§ 35, D. 2). Ols. — An isolated diphthong Stem is oi. Nom. o'-s, sJieep [ovi-s] : olis, oil, olv; PI. oiey, olaiv, ol(ri(v), oh. Comp. § 34, D. § 159. Dialects. — Horn, has yprivs for ypav-s, Dat. yprjt, Voo. ypijC or yp^i) ; from /3oC-s, Ace. PI. /3d-ar, Dat. p6-ean-i(v). The forms 3£r Nom., pSiv Aec. Sing,, are Doric. § 160. Dialects.— Ionic Sis (ovis) for ols. Gen. oios, Dat. PI. 6t-i-as or rjpas Dual and Plural of Treida are formed as in the declension Dual ^po-e Tipa-oiv § Ifil. Dialects.^The Epic dialect lengthens the e of Stems in f V into ij before vowels : /Sao-iX^-oy, Paa-iXrj-i, Baa-CK^-a, (Sao-iX^-es , Ba-s (St. firjTpa), avunculus. § 163. The Stems in o, all feminine, form the N"om. Sing, without sigma, except the Stem ai8o, Nom. Sing., alSco-i, shame, Ace. aiSS). The Ace. which is like the Nom. is oxytone (contrary to § 87) : TreiOw, not •n-eiOos. The Vocative ends in ot; all other cases are con- tracted. The Ace. of Stems in tu usually remains un- contracted. The Stem ka, 'Earn. ■^ ew-?, dawn, has Gen. Sing, ew, Dat. ea (according to § 132), Ace. eo> (from etoa). Obs. — Several Stems in ov follow the atove declension in some of their forms : dridav, nightingale, Gen. drjSovs, with aijSocos ; eUmv, image, Gen. ehovs (oomp. § 171). tives also in eor and €vs ('OSytrevs), Datives in eV, et, and Accu- satives in ea, 7; : TtiS^. The New-Ionic dial, leaves e frequently uncontracted : j3ao-iXe'-Es. § 163. Dialects. — Horn, contracts TJpa'L into ^pa, Mlvaa into MiVo). The old and poetic form for em-y is ^m-s (St. ^0), declined like albi>-s. Some proper names in a in the Nom. Sing, have in the New-Ionio dial, an Ace. in ovv : tuijToiv, 'low. Digitized by Microsoft® §165. CONSONANT DECLENSCON. 63 III. Elided Stems, i. e. Stems which reject the final consonant in certain forms. § 164. 1. 2 Stems, i. e. Stems which elide sigma. Exam. Stems. TO yevos, Tace yeves M. evyevijs, N. evyeves, of good family evyeves Sing. Nom. Gen. Bat. Ace. Voe. yevos [genus] (yeve-os) yevovs (yevc-i) yevei yevos yevos M. eiyevrjs N. evyeves (evyeve-os) e^yei'ouff (eiiyeve-i) eiiyevei (evyeve-a) evyevrj JST. evyeves evyeves N. evyeves Dual. N.A. V. a.D. (yeve-e") yevrj (yev€-ocv) yeraiv (evyeve-e) evyevrj (evyeve-oiv) evyevo'iv Plural. N.r. Bat. Ace. (yeve-a) yevrj (yeve-mp) yevmv yeve-a-i^v) (yeve-a) yevrj (evyeve^es) evyevels N. (evyevea) evyevrj (evyeve-av) eiyev&v eiyeve-cri(y) (evyeve-as) evyeveXs N. (evyevea) evyevrj Examples for SeclenBion. TO eI8os,form koXKos, heauty jieKos, song axBos, hurden Adjectives : ira(j)rjs, Keut. a-a(f>es, clear axpi^rjs, Neut. OKpi^es, exact evrjBrjs, Neut. evrjdes, simple § 165. The sigma Stems retain their final consonant only when it stands at the end, i. e., in the Nom. Ace. and Voc. Sing. Neuter, and in the Nom. and Yoc. Siag. Masc. and Fern. The Neuter substantives change the Stem-vowel e » § 165. Dialects.— The Epic dial. /re^weraiZ?/, the New-Ionic always, leaves the vowels of the sigma Stems uncontracted : yeveos, yevei. Horn, sometimes has the Gen. Sing, evs (from eos, § 37, D. 1): Sapa-evs (ddpa-os, courage). In the Dat. PI. Homer has three endings : e-ea-a-i(v), ea--vrivd. 05s.— Barytone adjectives have the accent in the Gen. PI. on the last syllable but one, contrary to § 87 : avrapKav (Nom. airdtiais, self-sufficient). So also rptripris, trireme, used as a substantive, Gen. PL rpcripiDv. § 167. Proper names in -kXey/s compounded with xXcoy, glory (St. /cXeer), have a double contraction in the Dat. Sing., and a single one in all the other cases : Nom. (nepiKXe^f) nJpiK^s, Gen. (nepiKX«o9)nepifcXe'o.;r,Dat. (nfptKXcei, UepucXe^i) UepL- (cXel, A cc. (nepilcXeea) nepmXed, Voc. (n^piKXees) Hcpi'^Xf ty. § 166. Dialects.— A vowel before c is often contracted with it in Horn. : o-n-eosor a-m'ios, cave, Gen. aTrdovs, Dat. o-Trij-t (from a-Treei) I)at. PL o-Tr^eo-o-^./) and o-jreVo-^j/) ; ^kXc^s:, glorious, Acc. eiiKXelcil via, (dvepmTrocjyv^s, human) § 167. Dialects^The Epic dial, forms 'Hpa^fj,, 'UripaKXij-o,, HpaKX,,-L, HpaKXr,-a; the New-Ionic, 'UpaKXi,,,, Hpa^Xe-os HpaicXc-1, HpaxXf-a. Digitized by Microsoft® 169. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 65 § 168. 2, T Stems, i. e. Stems which elide r. Examples. Stems. rh Ktpas, horn KCpdT TO Kpias, meat KpeaT Singular. N. A. V. Gen. Dat. Kepas K€pa.T-os (icepaor) Kepas (cepoT-i (Kepdi) Kepa Kpeas (_Kpeaos) Kpeas {Kpeat) Kpea Dual. N. A. V. G.D. KcpoT-e ((ccpac) Kepd KepAr-oiv ((cepaotx) Kep&v Plural. N. A. V. Gen. Dat. KepaT-a (Kepaa) Kepa Kepar-av (^Kepdoiv) KepSiv Kepa-ui^v) (Kpeaa) Kpea {Kpeaav) Kpemv Kpea-a-t(v) § 169. T becomes ? in Nom. Ace. and Voc. Sing., according to § 67. In the other cases some words always reject it: e. g., Kpea'?, xpo-a. Comp, alias, ijiis, § 163. Digitized by Microsoft® 66 CONSONAIJT DECLENSION. § 170. § 170. 3. N Stems, i. e. Stems which elide v. Example. Stem. M. F. fiei^av, greater N. fififov Singular. N. r. Oen. Dat. Ace. Dual. N. A. V. a.D. Plural. N. V. Gen. Dat. Ace. lieiCo-a-i(v) Examples for Declension. /JcXriW, better alaxifv, more hateful aXylav, more painful. § 171. The full and the contracted forms are equally in use. But the open ones {jiett.oa) never occur. Com- paratives of more than two syllables throw back the accent in the Norn. Ace. and Voc. Sing. Neuter upon the last syllable but two : ^iXnov, aia'^iov. Besides the comparatives (Nom. wv, ov), there are only the two proper names, 'AnroXKav (Stem and Nom.) and Iloa-etSftJv (Stem and Nom.), Ace. 'AttoXXw (also ' A.iroKk(ov-a), lioaeihta (also Tiopeap, fotmtain capos Sdimpros ^pcaros -3f P. -as N. -aS -a(r) 17 \ap.7ras, lamp TO Kpias, meat \afi7rdb0s Kpems -as M. -avT ~av yiyas, giant Adj. fuXas, Hack yiyavTos jxiXavos -avs P. -a(y) j) ypavs, old woman ypdos -«p -€Cp I? x^tPi hand Xeipo's -eis M. P. -evT -ev Part, \v9eis, loosed Adj. els, one rj kKcls, hey XvOevTos ivos kKciSos -€V N. -evT -€V Part. XvGiv, loosed Adj. appcv, male \v6evTos appevos -es N. -.(.) Adj. traces, clear o-a(povs -fvs M. -<") (povevs, murderer 0V€01S -);i' M. -cv -1]V 6 \i,p.r]v, harlour o'EXKrjv, Greek \ipevns "EXXij^os -IP -ep -VP 6 aWijp, aether Bijp, game aWepos 6r)p6s Digitized by Microsoft® 68 CONSONANT DECLENSION. §172 Nom. Stem. Gen. -rjs -; PapvTTis, weight 6, ^ Tpirjprjs, trireme fiapvTtjros Tpir/povs -i N. -t -tr Adj. lipL, acquainted with TO jxeXi, honey Xbpios peXiTos -LV -IV 6 he\iv, dolphin 8e'K(j)'LV0s -IS -I -T6 -IV fi Irakis, city j; eknis, hope 17 ;fapis,/auOMr 6, -q opvLs, hird tJ 2aXa/iif, Salamis TToKcios eXiridos XapiTOs opvTdos ^oKafuvos -ov N. -ov -OVT Adj. evhaipov, fortunate Part. Xuoi/, loosing evdalp-ovos XllOVTOS -0? N. -\oy6s VVKTOS § 173. The Second Principal Declension agrees with the First in the following particulars : 1. Masculines haye 9 for the Nom. Sing, (or com- pensation for it) ; feminines are less consistent in this. 2. The Dat. Sing, affixes t (subscribed in the First Principal Declension). 3. Vowel, and in part diphthongal, Stems take v in the Ace. Sing. Ols.—The original ending of the Ace. Sing, was also in the Second Principal Declension everywhere v. This consonant was, how- ever, connected with consonant-Stems by the connecting vowel a : 6SovT-a-v = Lat. dent-e-m. Subsequently v was dropped, and a left, generally as the only sign : o8dvr-a. 4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual have iv (aiv, oiv). 5. The Gen. PL ft) V. 6. The Dat. PI. 0-4(1;) originally everywhere. 7. The Ace. PL 9 everywhere. OJs._The original ending of all Ace. PI. was vs, but v was dropped after vowels of the First Principal Declension, and was compensated for by the lengthened as,ovs. After consonants there was the same process as in the Ace. Sing. : ob6vT-a{vys, Lat. dent-e-s for dent-em-s. 8. Neuters all have a in Nom. Ace. and Voc. PL Digitized by Microsoft® 70 IREEGTJLAEITIES IN DECLENSION. § 174. The principal differences in the endings are : 1. In the Gen. Sing., where the Second Principal Declension always has o ? (u)?). 2. In the Norn. PL, where Masc. and Fern, of the Second Principal Declension always have e?. Irregularities in Declension. § 174. The mixing of two Stems which may have om Nom. is called Heteroclising (eTepoKXoala, different in- flexion) : Nom. aK6To<;, darkness, Gen. aKotov (O-Declen- sion), and ctkotov; (Second Principal Declension) ; Xa/yom, hare, according to the Attic declension, but Ace. Xar/o). An important irregularity of this kind occurs with proper names in t;?: XwKpaTTj'; (St. 'Z(oicpare<;), but Ace. Xa>KpdT7;v (as if from Stem XooKpara of the A- Decleusion) with ScoKparr;. But those in -xXij? (§ 167) follow the Second Principal Declension exclusively. § 175. The formation of some cases from a Stem which cannot be that of the Nom. is called Metaplasm (jieTaTrKacrix6<;, change of formation) : Nom. Sing, to hev- Spov, tree, Dat. PI. BevBp€(Ti(v), as if from St. BevSpe<;; Nom. Sing, rb SaKpvov, tear, Dat. PI. SdKpvcn(v), from St. SaKpv (poet. Nom. BaKpv) ; to 'rrvp,jire, PI. to, irvpd, Dat. Tot? irvpol^ (0-Declension) ; Nom. Sing, ovetpo-^, dream, Gen. ovelparo^, Nom. PI. ovelpara. § 176. A peculiar irregularity appears in several § 174. Dialects. — Several Masc. Stems in a, Nom. ?j s in Herod., have ea for rjv in the Ace. Sing.: Seo-Tronj-y, master, Sea-irorea. 6 oxo-s, carriage, in Hom. has PI. rh o'^ra, '6xe(T(t>i(v), from the St. ox^s- OiSiVoM has poet-fonus from a St. OiSiiroSa, Gen. Sing. Oldi7r6Sao, trag. OiSwrdSa. Hom. Sapm/8a>i/, Stems ^apwriSov and 2apTTTitovT. Mivms, Ace. Sing. Mivaa (§ 163), and Mivav. § 175. Dialects.— Hom. metaplasms are : Dat. PI. ai/8pa7rd8e. Digitized by Microsoft® § 177. IREEGULAEITIES IN DECLENSION. 71 Neuter Stems in apT,as peaToa.TO<;. To these correspond the Stems crKa(p)T and w 8 a (jo) t : Nom. a-Kcop, dirt. Gen. a-icaT6<; ; vhwp, Gen. vBaro^. § 177. Special irregularities in alphabetical order : 1. avi^p, man, (comp. § 153) rejects e of the St. avep, and inserts 8 in its place (§ 51, Obs. 2) : w-S-p-o?, avSpi, dvBpa; Voc. ai^ep; Dual, dvBpe, avSpoh; PI. dvBpe<;, avSp&v, avhpcUniy), dvBpas. 2. "Aprjs (the god Ares) : St. 'Ape?, Gen. "Apeoy; and "Ajoeo?, Acc."Apr}v, together with "Ap?; ; Voc. regul."A/3e?. 3. d/3z/, without Nom. : Gen. rov and t^? apv-o'i, of the lamb, apvi, dpva ; Dat. PL apvaaiiy). 4. TO <^6vv, hnee {genu), Nom. Ace. Voc. All the rest from St. yoz^ar, Gen. yovaTo^. 5. rj 'yvvrj. Woman. All the rest from St. z/ : Gen. kvvo^, Dat. a;w4 Acc. Kvva ; PL Kvve^, KvvMv, /cvai(v), Kvva<;. 9. o A,a-9, s^cme, from Hom. Xaa-9, Gen. Xa-o?, Dat. § 177. Dialects. — The following forms are peculiar to dialects : — 1. dvrjp, poet, 'avep-os, 'avep-i, 'avep-a ; Dat. PI. av8pfrTi,ivith force; (cXicriij-i^i, in the tent; djro pevp^- iv, from the gods ; 'lKw-(j)iv, from Hios. 3; Oons.-deel. : KoTvXrjSov-o-^iv, with the suckers (on the feelers of the polypus) ; air Sxe(r-(l>i(y), from the carriage ; vapa vav-(f)i,(v), alongside the ships; cmo KpdTea--iv,from the head. (§§ 177, D. 22.) Digitized by Microsoft® 74 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. § 179. These suffixes are joined to the Stem of the noun : "KdrivqGev, from Atliens, (with Ion. r)) ; icvKKodev, from the circle, (/ci/zcXo-?). Sometimes o comes in place of the A.-sound : pi^odev (radicitus) from pi^a {radix) ; it also serves as a connecting vowel with consonant-stems : iravr- o-6ev, from all sides. The o is sometimes accented, contrary to § 107, a : Kv/cX-o-Oev, MapaOav-o-dev, from Marathon. The enclitic suffix Se (§ 92, 5) is often also combined with the Ace. form : Meryapa-Se, to Megara ; 'EXei/o-w-o-Se, to Eleusis. o'U-a-he, home, from Stem oIko, is irregular. For 8e we find ere, fe, with the same meaning: dXXoae, elsewhither ; ^KOriva^e, to Athens ; @i]^a^e, to Theles ; 6vpa^e (foras). § 179. Moreover, a few words have an old Locative in I for the Sing., and a-i(v) (without a preceding i) for the Plur., answering the question where: o'Uoi, at home; Tivdol, at Pytho ; 'IctO/jloX, on the Isthmus ; ^A9'^vr](n(v), in Athens ; MXaraiacniy), in Plataea ; dvpdai(v), at the door, (foris) ; &pdcri,(y), at the right time. Chap. YII. — Othek Inflexions of the Adjective. A. — Inflexion according to Genders. Adjectives of the Yowel Declension. § 180. The most numerous class of adjectives is that which in the Masc. and Neut. follows the 0-Declension, and in the Fem. the A-Declension ; which, consequently, has in the Nom. Sing. 09, rj (or a), ov [Lat. us, a, uml. § 180. Dialects.— The lonians have frequently here also r) for Att, a : alaxpn. Digitized by Microsoft® §182. INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 75 Sing. Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Fem. Neut. Norn. ayaBos dya6ri dyaOov (jiiKtos (fiikid (jilklOV Gen. dyadov dyadf)s dyaBov (piKlov iXlov Dat. dyadm dyaOov dyaBfi dyada (jjiXtco (pikia (piKia Ace. dya6r]v dyaBrj dya66v (jbtXtov ipiKidv (piKiov Voc. dyade dyaddv (ptXie t\ld (piXiov Dual. N.A.V. dya6a> dyadd dya6& (piktto (j>iXld (jiiXia a:D. dyaQoiv dyadalv dyaQoiv t\LOlV (fxXlaiv (j)iXioi,v Plur. Norm. dyaBol dyaBai dyaBd (j)CkiOi tplXtat v dyaOSiv (jjiKicav fpCklaiv ^CKlav Dat. dyaOots dya&ais dyadois <(>i\iois fpiXlats ^lKIois Ace. dyaOovs dyaBds dyaBd cjiiKiovs 6'i, aoipij, cro^ov, wise. Exception. : i; stands after o, except when p precedes : oTrXdoy, dirXorj, d7rK6ov, simjile. ddpoos, ddpod, ddpoov, assembled. § 181. Though the declension of these Adjectives conforms to §§ 114, 126, the following points must be observed : 1. a in the Nom. Sing, is always long. 2. In the accent of the Nom. and Gen. PI. the Fem. follows the Masc: ^i/3aio<;, firm, Nom. PL Masc. ^i^aiot, Fem. ^e^aiai, (§ 108 would require ^e^alai, from Nom. Sing, ^e^aia) ; Gen. of all genders, ^e^aimv (not even in the Fem. /3e^aiS)v, as would be required by § 118). § 182. Many adjectives of this class have only two § 181. Dialects. — 81a, Fem. of Slos, heavenly, lias in Horn, a : bla Bidav, the heavenly one among the goddesses. § 182. Dialects. — The poets form a peculiar Fem. from many compound adjectives : d^pdrq (Masc. dp-^poros, immM-tal), avnOerj (Masc. dvTiSeos, godlike). Digitized by Microsoft® 76 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. § 183. endings, the Masc. being used for the Fern. : Masc. and Fern. r)(Tvxo<;, Neut. rjo-vxov, quiet. Compound adjec fives especially are all of only two endings : dre/cvo';, child- less ; KapTro(f>6po<;, fruitful. § 183. Adjectives ending in eo? and oo? in the Norn. Masc, are generally contracted (§ 130) : ■xpv(Teo<;, golden, and atrXoos, simple, are thus contracted : Sing. Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Pern. Neut. Nom. xpvcrovs Xpva-ri Xpva-ovv airkovs &K\rj 6.1Tk0VV Qen. Xpva-ov Xpva-as Xpv xpya-t] Xpvai) drnXa 6.Tr\a (iTrXft) a.D. XpvcroLV Xpvo'o-tv Xpvv \vuafTaiu XvfrdvTau XvoPTtav Xvova-av XvovTav Bat. \v(ra.(rL Xvadcrais Xva-aa-i Xvovtn Xvova-ais Xvova-i Ace. Xvtravras Xva-da-as Xva-avra XvovTas Xvovcras Xvovra Sing. loosed giving Nom. XvBels Xvdela-a XvBiv SiSovs SiSova-a SMv Gen. \v6evros Xvfleto-ijs XvdevTOs dlboPTOS didovtrrjS SlSoVTOS Dat. \vdevTi \vdeia-ri XvBivn SiSdm 8idov(rjj 8i8dvrt Ace. Xvdevra XvOetcrav XvBev Sidovra StSovo-av 8i86v Voc. Xv6eis XvBela-a XvBiv SiSouy dtSovaa 6iB6v Dual. jv. a. V. \v6evTe Xvdeicra XvBcvTe SiSovre Stboia-a SMvTf G.D. XvdevToiv \vd(i?, Neut. o?) have via in the Fern. : XeXvKoi^, \e\,vKvca, XeXvKo?, one who has freed. See §§ 146, 147. Singular. Masc. Fem. Neut. Nbm. XeXuKO)? \e\vKvla XeXvKos Gen. \e\vK6Tos \ikvKvias XeXvKoros Dat. \c\vk6tl XeXvKvla XcXvKOTl Ace. XeXvKdra XeXyKvlav XeXvKos Voc. XeXv/cwff XeXvKvIa XcXvKos Dual. N. A. V. \iK.VKQT€ XekvKvia XeXvKOTc Q.D. XeKvKOTOlV XeXvKvlaiv XeXvKOToiv Plural. Nom. XikvKOTes XeXvKvlai XcXvKora Qen. XeXuKorwz/ XeXvKVLtov XfXvKOTOiV Dot. XeXvKOCTt XeXvKviais XeXuKotrt Aco. ^iKvKoras XeXvKvias XeXvKora Ohs. — The strange difference of the Fem. from the Stem of the Masc. and Neut. is explained by the f which was originally before the o. Prom For-ia came first focr-ia (§ 60), then by a peculiar contraction (h becoming v) vtr-ia, finally (o- being dropped, § 61, 6) u-i'a and via. § 189. The most important adjectives of two endings with Stems according to the Second Principal Declen- sion are : 1. Stems in ? (Inflexion given under §§164, 165), as : a-a<\>r]s (raa\fis, safe Svo-fiev^s, hostile. 2. Stems in v (Inflexion given under §§ 146, 147), as : wmav ^enov, ripe Gen. wenov-os. eiSaifimv ti'Sat/iow, happy „ eiSai/iOK-oj. a-^tppav a-S>ij)pov, reasonable „ o-ax^pov-oi. § 189. Dialects. — Herod, 'dpcrqv for aptnjv. Digitized by Microsoft® § 191. INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 81 Other Examples for DeclenBion. y.vr)jui,v, mindful of cViXV/""''. forgetful of TroKvirpdyjMav, much occupied 3. Isolated forms, as : tS/Jts i'dpi, acquainted with Gen. l'8pi-os (Inflexion according to § 157 D.) appr)V (apa-rjv) appev, male Gen. appev-os Compounds of substantives, suoli as dwdTmp, Neut. ajvarop, St. .jrarep (Nom. iraTrjp) fatherless; bva-prjTmp, iifiTr]p, un- motherly ; (piKojroXis, -i, Gen. -ib-os, loving the city ; ev€Kms (Gen. eveKnih-os), hopeful. § 190. 4. Besides these there is a large number of adjectives which have only one ending, because either their meaning or form excludes a Neuter: apira^, rapackms, St. a p it aTidvetpa, e. g. idia, men nourishing. § 191. Dialects. — In Horn, both Stems, n-oXu and ttoXXo, in Masc. and Neut., are ahnost completely declined ; the Fem. is regularly ttoXX^. Sing. ^. TToXvs TTQvKvs or ttoXXos N. irokv irov\v ttoKKov Q. jroXXoC or jtoXeos D, TToJlX^ A.. TToKvV ITOVKVV TToXXdv I^. TToXv TTOvKv TToKKoV Plur. N. TTokees (ttoXe ly) TroXXot ttoXXo G, TToXXiai' or TTokiav D. 7roXeto-(Ti(i') 7roX£(r6TaTos,ri,ov yXvKvs, sweet yXvKv yXuKVTepor yXvKvTaTos p.eXas, hlaeh fieXav fieXdi/repos fieXdvTaTos XapUts, graceful xapievT x°P'f'o''"fpos x"P'fo''"aTor (from xapieiT-Tfpos-, according to §§ 46 and 49). a-n^v, clear es a-a^ecTTepos (Ta(f>€crTaTos HaKap, happy fiaKap p-andprepoi paKapraros Vfvris, poor nevrjT nevea-Tepos iievetrraTos (for TrevrjT-Tfpos, raros, according to § 46, rj being shortened). Digitized by Microsoft® § 197. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 83 § 193. The following points are to be observed : 1. The Stems in o leave o unchanged only when the preceding syllable is long (§ 74, &c.), but lengthen it to CO when that is short : irovrjpo-Tepo';, worse ; wikoo- rarov, most bitter ; a-o^d>-Tepo<;, wiser ; a^ico-rdrT), most worthy. Every syllable with a vowel followed by two consonants or a double consonant is here considered long (§§ 76, 77). § 194. 2. The o is always rejected after at in the adjective yepai6s, senex, sometimes in iraKaiSs, cmtiquus, and crxoXaios, at leisure : yepalrepos, irdKairaTos. § 195. 3. The o or o is changed to at in fiecros, medius; uros, like ; eiSStos, clear ; npmos, early ; S-^ios, late : linrairaTos, Trpcoiairepov. rjavxas, peaceful, has fjirvxai-Tepos, and fiTepos ; cj)iKos, dear, besides (j)i\a>Tepos -raros, also (piXrepos -raros, and (j)pov, Nom. o'oxjipav, reasonable"), Ahaiixoviarepos (St. evSaifiov, Nom. evbalp,a>v, for- tunate). TTLorepos -raros, fvoui'irlwVffat, and ireirairepos -raros, from rvirrav, ripe, are exceptional. 6) to the Stems of anparos, immixed ; ippaiievos, strong ; atrfievos, willing : oKparea-repos, eppaiievecrrepos. More seldom to others. c) to some Stems in o o contracted : cvvovirrepos for evvoiarepos from eiivovs, well-disposed. § 197. 5. ta-Tspos, ta-raras, occur with \dXos, talkative; irraxos, heggarly ; oijfocl>dyos, epicure ; povo(j)dyos, eating alone, and some adjectives of one ending, as kXctti)-s, thievish : XoKi- (TTepos, TTraiXioraros, KKcrrriarepos. Others of one gender in rj-s follow the rule of those in o : vfipurro- Tfpos from v/S/Dio-njs, haughty. § 193. Dialects. — The quantity of the 0-sound in poets is rather doubtful : Horn. oiCvpSraros, the most wretched. Horn, has Wivrara, from Wis, straight; ^aavraros, from ^acivos, glittering ; dxapla-repos (for dxapir-repos, according to § 46), from &Xai.<.s, graceless. ^.^.^.^^^ ^^ Microsoft® 84 COMPAEISON OF AJtJECTIVES. § 198. The compounds of x<»P'S' grace, favour, form their Comparative and Superlative as if they ended in xap'To-s ; imxapi^TutTepos, § 198. The second and rarer termination of the Com- parative is lov (Nom. Masc. and Fern, icov, Neut lov); of the Superlative, la-ro (Nom. tcrTO?, larrj, kttov). The Stem-vowel is rejected before t. The accent is placed as far as possible from the end in the Comp. and Superl. Inflexion of the Comp., § 170. So is formed from : Positive. Stem. Comparative. Superlative. rj&vs, agreeable fihv i]&iav, -ov rjBia-Tos -rj -ov Tavisj swift Tax'^ Oda'a-ayv 'OV tclxicttos -ri ~ov (from raxiaiv, according to §§ 54, 57) neyas, large fieya jxii^mv -ov fieyuTTos. (from fieyicov, according to § 58) Ohs. — The length of a in Baa-a-ov (comp. fiaXXov, § 202), and the diphthong of jxei^av, is explained from the t passing into the preceding syllable, as in ajieivcov (comp. § 55). Further with suppression of p : c'xflpd -s, hostile ixBiav -ov Superl. ex6i.(rTos. ala-xpo -s, shameful al(Txi'OV -ov ,, a'tcrxioTos. oiKrpo -s, pitiable „ o'iktiutos. ix6p-6s and oUrp-os also have the forms in repo-s and toto-s. § 199. This comparison occurs also in connection § 198. Dialects. — The endings icov, kttos, are more frequent in the poets : Horn. tpiXimv ((^iXos, dear) ; ykvKiav (yXvKvs, sweet) ; &Ki(rTos {wRvs, swift) ; ^ddia-ros (PaBvs, deep) ; ^pd(raa>v = fipaxlav (lipaxvs, short), Sup. poet. Ppdxia-Tos, Hom. Superl. ^dpSurns (PpaSiis, slow, § 59, D.) ; naa-a-wv = jraxiav (jvaxvs, thick) ; fiacro-mw = p-dKimv (poKpos, long), Sup. pfiKurros (Dor. paKurros) ; Kvhlav (KvSpos, famous); pe^av, New-Ion. for pei^av. § 199. Dialecta.— 1. Hom. Comp. dpsiav. Positive Kparvs, Superl. KapntTTos ; Comp. Xatrepos ; New-Ion. Kpia-a-cov = KpsLinTav ; poet. fiikrepos, ^eXraros, (peprepos, (^EpraTor, or (fiepitrTos, more excellent, most excellent. 2. Hom. KaKwnpos ; xepi/s, x^pf't"", x^P^^or^pos, xftpoVfpor ; New- Ion, eaaav = fja-a-av. (Comp. Kpea-amv, p^^av, § 198, Ohs.) 4. Hom. vTr-oki^tov. Digitized by Microsoft® § 199. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 85 with other peculiarities in the following adjectives, where the changes of sound of §§ 55-58 are often applied : 1. For the idea of good : Positive. Comparative. Superlative. ayad6s [St. a/i€vj dfielvcoVj afieivov [St. apes] [apeiav, Horn.] apiaros, J), ov [St. jSeXto] ^eKriaiv, PeXriov ^cKtuttos, r], ov [St. KpaTv'\ Kpei(Tcra>v (^KpeiTTcov) Kpdn&ros, rj, ov N. Kpclo'a'ov (/cpetTroy) [St. X 0) u] 'Kattcov or \aatv Xaaros, 7], ov N. X&'iov or "K&ov Ohs. — afifivav and Spia-Tos rather express excellence, capacity ; Kpeia-a-iov, Kpanaros, strength,, preponderance, (Lat. superior) ; rjiTatav is opposed to Kpu(T(ra>v. 2. For the idea of lad: Positive. Comparative. Superlative. KaK6s KaKlCOV N, KCLKIOV KUKltTTOS [St. x^p] x^^P""' (deterior) N. x^'P"" x^'P'o'''''^ [St. Tjnv] rja-aav (inferior) N. rjaa-ov N. PI. rJKia-Ta, least of all. 3. yuKphs, small, besides fiiKporfpos liiKporaros jiflav, smaller N. pelov 4-. oXiyos, little oXiyia-Tos [St. cXa^u] ika(r ?. The o of the Stem is entirely dropped : ^/Xoy, adv. (piXax;. The Stems of the Second Principal Declension have the same form as in the Genitive : Ta'^vi, swift, Ta')(eai^i;, clear, <;, contr. cra^cD? ; aoa^ptav, reasonable, (raxjjpovco';. Contraction occurs only where the Genitive also has it. The accent of the adverb is always the same as that of the Genitive Plural of the corresponding adjective : ■\jrv'xp6<;, cold, ■\jnij(pS), above ; Kara, helow ; ea-a, inside ; E^o), outside, have no s in Comp. and Superl. : avaTcpa, KaTmrepa, likewise antoTepai, fwrther (from cmS) ; iyyvripa (or iyyvTspov), eyyvrdTio (or eyyvraTo), from iyyis, nea/r, and some others. Chap. VIII. — Inflexion of Peonouns. § 205. The Personal Pronouns are : Singular. Nom. Gm. Dat. Ace. Eyi) va>, we (o-^Si) cr^m, ye (o-(jiSii.v) (T(j>mv (o-^toe), they Plural. Nom. Oen. Dat. Ace. ripe7s, we rjp&v 7} LV fipas vpels, you vpav vpXv vpas crtpels, they N, a-cf^ea Gen. \ipio, \epiiO, § 205. Dialects. — The following are special additional forms of the Ion. Dial. (Those in brackets are merely New-Ion.) Sing. Nom. iymv ruvri [tu] epfv, pcv fo'™) ""f" j*°> '^ ipe-Sev (§ 178 D.)[(rero, (re'-5ej/ ] eh, e-Bev Dat. ToijTetv eoilComp. §34, Ace. « J D. 4. Plur. Nom. (^pees) appes (ypkes) vppes Gen. ripiav, ^pelu>v vpemv, vpeicov a-(peav, o-^e/mv Dat. appi(v) vppi(y) a-^Ky) Ace. ijpeas, appe vpkas, ilppe iT(j)ds, cri An isolated Ionic form for the Accusative Sing, of the third person is piv, trag. vlv; both enclitic; in a like sense cr^e occurs in the poets, viv seldom stands for the Plural. Digitized by Microsoft® 88 PEESONAL AND POSSESSIVE PEONOUNS. § 206. § 206. The Stems of the Sing, are: ifie, for the first person; ere, for the second; e, for the third. The Nominative, however, is formed differently from them : i'yca, €Tepos, their. Obs. — The ending repos is that of the comparative (§ 192). § 208. Dialects. — Hom. additional forms of the Possessives : reos [tuus], ios [suus], Afjios (properly Dor.), i/j-os, (t(J>6s. From the Dual Stems ua>, crm : vatrepos, nos-ter, a-(f)a>tT€pos, belonging to you two, ap-os (also a.p,6s) often means my, Ss sometimes means own, without any reference to a particular person. Digitized by Microsoft® § 21t. EBFLEXIVE AND OTHEK PEONOUNS. 89 § 209, auTo-?, avTT], avro, self, is declined like a common adjective, except that the Neuter in the Nom. Ace. Voc. Sing, has no v (comp. the article to). o auTO? (auTO?), 17 'avTrj (avrrj), to ainb (tovto or TavTov), the same, Lat. idem. § 210. The Stems of the Personal Pronouns, combined with avTot;, produce the Beflexive Pronouns. Singular. Gen. M. N. F. Dat. M. N. P. Ace. M. F. JST. 1st person ipuvrov -7)5 efuxvra -fj €fiavr6v -rjv myself 2d person creavrov -rjs a-eavra -g (reavrSv -rjv thyself or aavTov -rjs cravra -^ aravTov -fjv 3d person eavrov -rjs eavra -fj eavT6v -fju -6 himself, her- or avTov -rjs avra -3 airdv -rjv -6 self, itself In tliG plural, toth Stems are declined together : PlnraL Gen. M. F. N. Dat. M. N. F. Aco. M. F. 1st person r}^i5iv avr&v ^[juv aiiTols -ais rifxas avrovs -as ourselves 2d person vjxStv avriiyv ' vfiiv avTois -ais vjias avrovs -as yourselves 3d person a-cfyav avrav u^io'iv avrots -ais acjias avrovs -as themselves Neut. (T(j>ea avrd Yet the 3d person plural has also the compound form : iavrav iavToXs -ais iavTovs -as -a or avrSiV avrols -ais avrovs -as -a. § 211. aWo-9, oXXtj, aXKo, another (alius), is de- clined like avTO';. The Stem aXXo combined with itself produces the Meciprocal Pronoun aW-TjXo (for aXX-aWo), oc- curring only in the Dual and Plural. § 209. Dialects. — New-Ion. ojutos, avrrj, rairo ; Horn, airos = o avros. § 210. Dialects.— The Epic dial, declines both Stems together even in the sing. : t/xe avrov = ifiavrov, oi avra = iavra, &o. Now-Ion. ifieavrov, a-cayurov, iavrov, stand for the forms with av. Digitized by Microsoft® 90 DBMONSTKATIVE PEONOIWS. §212 Dual. a.D. Ace, Masc. dXXijXoti' aKKrjku) Pern. Neut. aKkr)\aw SKKijKoai dXXijXa dXX^Xo) Plural. Oen. Dat. Ace. oKkriKatv dXX^Xotff oKKrjKovs a\Ki)ktav aKKrjKaiv dXKrjKais oKKrjKois dXKrjKas oXXt/Xq § 212. The nouns are : o8e, TJb^, two most ToSe, that important Demonstrative Pro- OVTOS, aVTI], TOVTO, tMs. oSe consists of the article 6 and the demonstrative enclitic Si, and is therefore declined entirely like the article with Se affixed. ovro<; corresponds to the article with regard to the rough breathing and the t at the beginning; it also has the diphthong au in the last syllable but one where the article has a or 17 (A-sound), and ov where the article has o, co, or ov (0-sound). Singular. Plural. (° V TO ol at TO hSe ^St To'Se oiSt aiSe TaSe 1 oilTOS aVTT] TOVTO oStoi a$Tai TavTO Itov TTjS TOV TtOV aen. < ToCSc TrjsSe TovSe T&vde [rovTOV ravTTjs TOVTOV TOVTmV (tco ■^ri T0> rois Tats TOIS Dat. <™8f rgSe ™Se ToisSe ToisSf TOtsBc {tovtco ravTTi TOVTa TOVTOli TavTais TOVTOtS (tSv Tt]V TO TOVS Tas TO. Ace. ■s T6v8e TTjvbe ToBe TovsSe TasBe raSe [tovtov TavTTJV TOVTO TOVTOVS TavTas TavTa § 212. Dialects.— In Horn, the article itself is a demonstrative pronoun, with these special forma : Nom. ; Gen. to 10 ; Gen. Dat. Dual To'tiv; Nom. PI. Toi, Tai; Gen. PI. Pem. Taav; Dat. PL ToX(Tl(v), Tfl(Tl(v), or TJIS. Prom oSe we have Dat. PL roTo-fieo-i or Toltrhea-tri^v), and Keli/os, poet, for imlvos. Digitized by Microsoft® §214, RELAT. AND INTEEEOG. PROSOUNS. 91 Dual. |t6) ra Ta (tolv raiv tolv N. A. V.;, and he said, and § 8' or, hut he said, OS is used as a Demonstrative (comp. the Dialects). § 214. The Interrogative Pronoun has the same Stem as the Indefinite Pronoun, from which it is distin- § 213. Dialects. — Horn. o = os, oov = ov, erjs^^s, and signifies he. Ion. ofo = oC, and the forms of the Article which begin with t are used instead of those of the Belative : tov = oS, cujus ; ra = a, cui ; Tols = oTs, quibus. § 214. Dialects. — Horn., partly also New-Ion. forms are : Gen. T€o, rev ; Dat. Tea, to ; Gen. PL reau ; Dat. PL reoi.(n(v) ; Neut. PL waa. ' ' The Digitized by Microsoft® 92 INTEEEOG. AND INDEF. PEONOUNS. §215, guished only by the accent. The Interrogative Pronouii has the accent always on the Stem syllable ; the Inde- finite is enclitic : hence rt'?, who ? ti?, enclitic, some one. Interrogative. Indefinite. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Singular. Tis n TlVOS tIvi rtva Tt Singular. tIs tI TIVOS Tivi Tiva t\ Nom. Ace. Oen. Dat. Dual. Tive TIVOIV Dual. TIV€ TlVolv Nom. Oen. Dat. Ace. Plural. Tives Tiva Tivav Ticriiv) Tivas Tiva Plural. Tives Tiva (arra) TivSiv Ticri^v) Tivds Tiva. (arra) Ols. — 1. Tov, TO, which as indefinites are enclitic, are often used for TIVOS, Tivi, and for tivos, tiv'i. Ohs. 2. The Eelative and Indefinite combine to form Sstis, rjns, o Ti, who. Both Stems are declined together : ovtivos, rjsnvos, Snvi, olvTivoiv (§ 93, 6.). A space is left between o and n in o Ti, which, to distinguish it from the conjunction Sti, that. The shorter forms of tis are also used with os; but the Stem o is then not declined : Gen. otov ; Dat. ora, more rarely Gen. PL oTav, Dat. 8Toia-i(v). uttu is an additional form for ariva, not to be confounded with arra for nvd. § 215. Another Indefinite Pronoun is Belva, of three genders, qmdam, sometimes undecliaed, sometimes de- clined as foUows : Sing. 6, ^, ro Se'tva, Sflvos, Se'ivi, Se'iva. PI. 01, ai Selves, he'ivav, he'ivas. The following are special forms of the compound Eelative in Hom. and also in New-Ion. : Sing. Srw.lSr. Stti; orfv, Srrfo, orTfu; orca; St-ito, 'S. otti PI. N. So-o-a; STeoij- orcW ; Snras, N. 5o-(ra (for iTia, according to § 57). The Stem of the Eelative thus often remains unchanged. Digitized by Microsoft® § 217. COEKELATIVE PBONOTJNS. 93 § 216. The following are called Correlative Pronmms: Interrogative. Indefinite. Demonstrative. Relative. n'f, wl?? Tis, some one ode, odros, this OS, Ssns, who TTOTfpos, uter ? which of two ? TTOTcpos, one of two (alteruter) erepos, the one of two (alter) imdrepos, which of two iroa-os, how great ? how much f {quantus, quot) TTorros, of some size or number Toaos, Td(rosde, rotrovTos, so great, so much (tantus, tot) opa as tcuk. To the simple ckuvos (tJiat, § 212) correspond among the Adverbs of place exei, there ; eKsWev, from there ; hela-e, thither. The De- monstrative ms occurs in Attic prose only in koI as, even thus, and ovS' as, not even thus. It is also ■written hs in these com- binations. § 218. The conjunctions 61;, brjnoTe, and ovu (meaning ever, Lat. cunque), and the enclitic jrep, may be joined to any relative pro- noun or adverb to give prominence : Sa-ns 817 irorc, whosoever, OTras oiv, (utcunque), Scrjrep, ju,st as. Sometimes ^ is affixed to the interrog. n in the sense oiwhy f and to the corresponding indirect interrogative o n : Wij, oriri, why ? § 219. There are also negative pronouns and adverbs to be noticed : ovTis, firjTts, no one; oiSerepos, firiSerepos, neither, neuter; ovSaixov, p.?)8a/ioC, nowhere; ov&ap.as, ji.r)bap.as, in no way. Digitized by Microsoft® §220. THE NUMEBALS. Chap. IX. — The Numeeals. § 220. The Cardinal, 0rdinal,aQ.d.Adverhial'SvLva.6Tsi[s, with their Talue and signs, are : — 1 a clf, fii'a, ev, one 6 irpaTosy the first awa^, once 2 ^, 8vo SevTcpos 8/f 3 7 T-peis, Tpi'a JTCo-crapes, Tfo-j Tp'lTOS rpis 4 8' jo-apo, or TETTa-? IpES, Ten-apa ) Terapros TerpaKcs 5 e TTfVTC TTefjLTtTOS TrCI/TOKlS 6 sT fl e/croff i^aKis 7 r eTTTO cfiSofios (TTTCLKIS 8 V OKTCO oydoos OKTOXK 9 e//j/ea evaros (evvaTos") ivaKLS (JvvaKis) 10 I SCKO SeKaros heKaKis 11 La cVdEKa ivSeKUTOs evdeKaKts 12 i^ SmSeKO 8a>8eKaTos 6o)6eKaK4s 13 ly rpisKaiScKa TpisKaibeKaTos 14 tS' (T£ -a-63-; ^ ffi b.3- _ 3 _ _ _ S,o § W 05 § til r § °tf.S S SSSrg-Sr 3- a * 3 3 o IV 3 o £ 3 b b b b to S i iri. o 55 ,!!lllt SSS-i-Srl 9ippiai9q:^93[i| !» o => ■a- 3--3- . b a. K 3 Q u u ~o 2 b b b b b is" § i 8 3 § s ?! " S J I i "' f-a e: S: o SSSrS ■ ►B >?> K 3 a o a a 5 b b b b b a ra -g -g, &<.-■ ■§ §11 tu S (3 J P p p p-^p p a . o 5> B a 3 o HI »3 »3 V V V a< atf a^ p-p-p p p p (<'<'<(<'< '^ a J -9 -S. &' CQ OmAPh : Ph =£> rS §>-o"fc S b f ■P '5 3 ■/< t? s,< b b „ '5 '5 - 11.^ Ph |i( t>- Digitized by Microsoft® 104 PAKADIGMS OF VERBS. — VEKBS IN O. Table II A.— VOWEL STBMl AcTn Tenses. 1 »• fg g Indicative. Subjunctive. !zi (S Present. Imperfect. Present. S. 1 \va> eXvov \vto 2 \veis eXves XvTjS 3 \vei ehj((u) Xvji D. 2 XvCTOV eKverov XvrjTov 3 XuEroK iXveTTjv XvrjTov P. 1 Xvo/iev iXvoiiev Xvafifp '2 Xuerc eKvere XvrjTC 3 Xuoua-t(;') ekvov Xu<0(ri(j') Future. S. 1 2 3 D. 2 3 P. 1 2 3 Xftrti) Xi;<7etff Xvcret Xvo-eroy Xuo-ETOV \vcrofi€V Xva-ere \vcrova-i 1 Aorist S. 1 eXvaa Xvao) (Weak). 2 e\v(ras XuOTJS 3 eXvo-e(i') XvOT] D. 2 ikvcraTOV XvariTov 3 iXva-drriv XuOTJTOW P. 1 tkCa-ajxev Xwoj/iei' 2 iKitraTC Xva-qre 3 eXva-av Xv(rQj(rL Perfect. Pluperfect. 1 Perfect S. 1 \e\vKa iXekvKeiv XeXukio (Weak). 2 XeXuKaff ekekvicus XeXvKrjs 3 XeXDKe(i') i\eXvK€i XeXvKrj D. 2 \e\vKaTov e\e\vKetTov XeXvKrjTov 3 XiKvKaTov eXeXuKeiTT/v XfXvKTJTOV P. 1 XeXvKaixev iXeXvKet^ev XfXvKWfjiev 2 XcXvKOT-f iXcXvKeiTC XeXuKJjre 8 XeXilKao-t(i') iXeXvKecrav or iXeXvKeicrav XeXvKaai 2 Aorist Wanting (Strong). 2 Perfect and Wanting Pluperf. (Strong) , / sacrifice ; Bcpaneva, I serve ; 8ovXcm, I ■' ^ Digilized by mrosofm' Dzamples Giravadrj Table III. PARADIGMS OF VEBBS. — ^VEEBS IN II. 1.— UNCONTEACTED. Voice. .105 Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. \voifu Xv«i» Xvap \iois XOe Xvov(ra XiJoi Xvera Xvov \voiTou XvCTOV Xvolrriv XufT(l>I» Oen. XvovTos \voiji.cv Xvov(Tr}s \voiTe Xverc Xvovros \ioiev XvovTtav or Xveraxrav St. Xvoi'r Xvo-otfii Xvtreiv Xv XvevBa XvetrSov \via8av XveaBe XveaBcDV or XvecrBaxrav XieirBai XvSfievos Xvo^evr] Xv6fici/ov Xv(Toijxr]V etc., as in the Pres. Xvoijojv Xvaecrdai XeXvfKvos e'irjv XeXvo'o XeXv(T6a> XcXv(t6ov XeXitrdav XeXv(r6e XeXva-dtov or XcXiirBaxTav XeXiKrdai Xv(rofji£vr] Xvao^evov XeXv^evos XeXvfievr] XeXvfjLevov X(Xv(roifiriu etc., as in the Pres. Xvoi/ujij- XfXvaeirSai igitized by Micros )ft® XeXvcofievos XeXvcTOfiej/rj XeXvo-QfievQV 108 PAEADIGMS OF VEEBS. — VEKBS IN O. Table III, A.— VOWEL STEJ Middle a Tenses peculiar Tenses. ;z; 1 Indicative. Subjunctive. 1 Aorist (Weak). S. 1 2 Xvtra D, P. 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 ekvaaTO eXvadfieBov eKvaaaOov eXvada-Sriv eKvcrdfieda iXvaacrSe ikOa-avTO XvoT^rat Xvtrco/te^oi/ XviK6a XvtTTJO'de XlKTaVTOl 2 Aorist (Strong). Wanting Tenses peculiar 1 Aorist (Weak). S. 1 2 iKvdrjV Xvdat Xvd^s D. P. 3 2 3 1 2 3 iXvOrj iXv0t]o-av XvdJj XvdiJTOV XvS^ov Xvd&fiev Xvdrjre Xv6S>a-i(y') 1 Future (Weak). S. D. P. 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 Xv6rjcroiJ.ai XvOricrr] or Xvdrjo-el. XvOrjcrerai \v6r)cr6fi.e6ov Xvdrjcrecrdov XvOrjcrca-dov Xv6rj Xva-ai/icdov Xia-aurBov XvtratrBov Xva-aitrBrjV XvadaBiOV Xva-at/ieda Xvcraia-Be XviraaOe XvcraivTO XvcdaOav or XvadtrdoifTav the Passive Voice. XvBeiqv Xvfffivai XvBfis Xvdeirjs XvdrjTi XvGeia-a XvQev XvBeiTj Xv6riTa> Oen. XvBevros XvBeirjTov or XvBeiTov XvSeioTis XvBfuqrrjv or XvQcIttjv XiBrjTOV XvSevTos Xv6elriiifP or Xudel/icv XvS^Tav St. XvOevT XvdetrjTC or XvdclTC XiSr/re XvSeirjcrav or XvdeUv XvSrjTaa'av or XvBevrav XvdTja-oifujv Xvdria-ou) \v6rj D.l a 2 TifideTov Tifiarov Ttoieerov iroielTov SovXoeTov 8ouX.o 3 n/idcTov ri/naroi/ TTOleCTOV iroielrov SovXoeTov SotiXo i P.l Ti{mofiev Tijia^ev Troieofiev TTOiovixev dovXoofiey BovXo fi 2 nixaere Tifiare TToUere ■n-oiciTe 5ovK6eT€ BovXo' 3 TLfld-OV^ TlflOi- ITOICOV- TTOIOV- SovKoov- 8ouXo cr((K) a-i(v) D.2 TijiaeTov Tt^drov TToUfTOV noieiTov bovXocTov SouXo 3 TLfiaeTcav Tifidrav TTOlCCTmV TTOleiTCOV bovkoeratv h ovXo i P. 2 Tifidere TifidTe TTOteere jrotelre bovKoere SouXo Tijiaovrav rifidv- TTOieovrav TTOtovv- hovKoov- hovXo 3 rav Ta>v TfflV TijiaiTUi- rifidToi- TTOlefTW- TTOteira}- hovXohm- SouXo (rav a-av a-av (Tav (rav d a 1— 1 rtfidecv Tifiau TTOteeLV TTOlelv bovXouv SovXo q3 ■s ■43 n/idav Tijiav TTOiiav TTOLav havXoiov hovXa niMovcra Tifiaxra ■iroUovcra TTOiova-a bovXoovirabovXa TLjidov Ttfiav noUov TTOLOVV bovXoov bovXo S.l krljiaov ert/ift)!/ iiToieov inoiovv ihovXoov IhoiX 2 ertfiaes irlfxas eTToUes inoicis idovXoEs fdovX 3 D.l €TLfia€(y') irlfid €nolee(v) enoiei iSovXoe(v')t8oiX o 53 2 iriftderov irindTOv iwoUfTOV cVoieiT-oy idovXoe- edovX TOV s 3 eTiiiaeTrjv eTifidrTjv eTTOteerrjv eTTOieLTTJV iSovXof- idovX P.l eTindojxev irifiajiev inoiiofiev ijioiovjicv TTjV eSovXdo- iBovX' 2 /leu ert/iaere eTifiaTe eVoiecre enoif'iTe eSouXofTE eSouX 3 irifiaov eTtfKOV cVot'eoi/ eTTolovv edovXoov e8ovX The other Tenses are conjugated like the same Tenses in ToXfida, 1 dare o-iyda>, I am silent ^oda, 1 call out Digitized by Microsoft® eda, 7?ef (§236 da-Keo), I pra/stisi Kou-jUa, I adorn oontinued. PABADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN O. 113 II.— CONTEACTED. Indicative Mood. Middle and Passive. TlllldoV Tl/lS noiiov TTOtoC 8ov\6ov 8ov\ov Tip.ae(r6ay t 1)1.6. (7 6 a iroieea-Bo) TTOieia-Ba BovKoiaBa ^ov\ova^Ba^ nfiaea-dov Tifiaa-Sov TTOieca-Bov TTOieto-Bov dovXoecrBov dovXova-Bov Tiimia-Bmv TiiiacrBmv noieea-Bav noieiaBav hovKoeo'Baiv 8ov\ov(tB iiToiiov iiro Lov iBovXoov idovXov in/ideTO irifidTO i-jTOieero iTTOtelTO ibovXoero idovXovTo infiadjie- iTijiafi^- inoieofuBot iirotovfie- idovXoofie' iBovXovfie- Bov Bov Bov Bov Bov infidctrBov irijia- iiToiiea-Bov iirotel- iSovXoe- iSovXov- a-Bov a-Bov (tBov a-Bov infiaca-Briv irifid- iiroieiirBrjV CTTOiei- ibovXoc- iSovXov- adrjv a-BrjV crBrfv a-Brfv inu.a6u.eBa iTifi.afi.e- inoKOjieBa iTTOtovfie- iBovXoo- iBovXov- Ba Ba jxeBa fieBa infidecrBe irifidaBe iiroiiea-Be inoieXa-Be ibovXoecrBc iSovXovaBe irifidovTO irifiavTO iiroieovTo iiroiovvTO iSovXoovTO iSovXovvTO A Synopsis of these Tenses is given in tlie following Table : — Conjugation. dpiBfiea, J count SrfXdai, I make clear av6a>, 1 crown (rjfiwa Jpunish XJiva-oU), I gild. Digitized by Microsoft® 114 PAEADIGMS OF VEEBS. — VEBBS IN SI. Table IV.- A.— VOWEL STEMS {Uncontractec Tenses. Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. Active Voice. Future TTOlTJaOi SouXtDO"© Tijirjcroiiu irotrja-onit 1 Aorist (Weak). eTijirjara inotrja-a eSouXtocra nfiria-a) Ttoi.T]cra Sovkaxra Tifirja-aifu TTOiTfcraifu SovXaxTaifU 1 Perfect (Weak). neiroiijKa SeSovXcaKa TerifiTjKO) 8e8ouX(Ta>v iToLrjtrov SovXaa-ov TifOjirai, noi^ l^oth of class 1 ; rarely -|oi)), see § 250. Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal Stems, as Digitized by Microsoft® Table V. PAEADIGMS OF VEEBS. — VERBS IN li. I.— GUTTURAL STEMS. Toaa-a, I arrange (olass i). Verbal Stems: ttXck, vyoifu rd^aifu (jjvye rd^ov irXi^ai cfivyfiv rd^ai TvXe^as (jyvyav Td§as TCTd^Otflt. TTETrXex^ reraxe jreTrXexevai 7reevyas reraxays Middle and Passive. irXcKoifoiv Taa-a-oi/irjv ttX/kou rdtrtrov TrXtKfa-dai TdtTaetrQai TrXeKOfievos Taatrofievos Ta^oLfirjv nXi^ecrBai rd^ea-dai liXe^Ofievos Ta^dfievos jrXc'gat rd^ai TrXe^aaOai rd^ao-dai irXe^djiivos ra^dfievos TreirKcyfiivos e'irjv Terayficvos c'irjv irsirXe^o rera^o jreirXexBcu TfrdxBai 'jTSTrXeynevos Terayiievos TeTa^oi/iTiv neirXe^eaSai neirXe^oiievos rrXaKeirjv TOxBcijiv irXaKTiBi TdxdrjTi irXaKTivai raxBrjvai irXaKcis TaxSeis 7r\aKri KCKOfua-fiAvos S 1 Aorist Passive (Weak). ETreia-driv koiu 1 Future Passive (Weak). nncrBrja-ofmi Koijua-dfja-oiiai Verbal Adjectives : 1. yjfsvaros, Treiordr, Koiwnds. Examples for cnreVSm, libo, Fut. trmicrm, Perf. eaireLKa, Perf. Mid. ecnreter/xai, Aor. Pass. For verbs of a Dental Stem with tbe Present ending in -o-o-ca see § 250, Ohs. r) ma-n-s, the faith ; ^ (nrovh-fj, the libation ; 6 KKvS-av, Gen. MSmv-os, Digitized by Microsoft® as. Table VI. PAEADIGMS OF VERBS. — VEEBS IN O. n.— DENTAL STEMS. Kofii^a), lea/rry (class 1, &.). Verbal Stems: ijrfvS, nid, KOfud. 119 Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. Active. KOflL^aV KO/xioifii KOfUflv KOfiiav KOfii(raiiJit irfia-ov K6iiurov 7rei(rai Kofiitrat ireio-as Kojiitras TTeTroUoifU KEKOfUKOLfll rreiroidc KfKO/XOCe KeKouLKevat KeKOUtK&S Middle and Passive. ireiOoLfiriv neidov KOfUol/jcriv ircia-ecrBai KOfueia-Bai ■^eva-6fixvos TreLo-ofievos Kofuoviievos 7ret(ratiJ.r)v Konuraiiiriv KSiwrai ireia-aa-Bm KOfiiaatrOdL ■\JA€Voi . \ Middle r- (^*™^§)- ^^™"'|l. (Weak). iknroiirjv €Ka\v^dfirju Xiiratfiat Perfect. Perfect. TreTTe/i/AOt XeXet/i^at KeKaXu/i/iiat Pluperfect. iKeXelniiriv XoJtci/ifiei'of S KCKaXvjttjiAeyoff S Future Perfect. XeXeii(/-Ofiai /cexaXui/'o/int 1 Aorist Passive (Weak). Xeicjidai 1 Futu Passive (Weak). nefitfiBrja-oiiai Ka\v(j)dria-oiJ.ai Verbal Adjectives : 1. irejiirTos, XeiTrrof, Kokuin-os. | Esamples foi Tpiwa, I turn (class 1) ; d\eL(pa, I anoint (class 2) ; Tp'i^a, I rub (§ 249). Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal Stems, as o nojiir-o-s, turning, manner; to oKeicfi-ap, the ointment ; 6 Ta-o-s, the tomb. Digitized by Microsoft® TaHe VII. PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 121 III.— LABIAL STEMS. KaXvTTTO), I cover (class 3). Verbal Stems: 7re/x7r, Xitt, *caXu/3. Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. Active. TrefXTTOtut XeiiroLfii XetTre KaXvTTre XeLTTClP KaXlfTTTCLV ItefXTTcav XetTTcoi' KakvTrTcav Xeiyj/oijiL KaXyyjroLfjLi Xt770t/i£ KaXvylraifiL XtVc KoKvyf/o irefiylrciv Xei-^eLv KaXv^etv XiTrelv KaXv-^ai Xeiyjrtav KaXv^frav XlTTOiV KcCkvy^ras XeXotTTot/it 7re7rofi(f)€ XeXotTre TrcTTO^cficvai XeXoLwevai XeXoLTras Middle and Passive. Tre flTTOlflTJV XeiTTOLf^riu KaXvirTOLfirjV Xeiirov KaXvirrov TTefiTrea-dat Xelirea-OaL KaKvTTTea&ai 7refi7rofj.€i/o$ XeiTTo^evos KaXvTTTOfieuog 7refjL\j/-oilx7}V XeLyjroLfjuriv KaXvyj/^oLfirjv Xnroiyj}V KaXvylraifirju XtTTOV KdXv\j/-a Xei\^e(r6ai Trefxiijraa-dai XtTTeoSat KaXvyjrao-Oat Treix-yjrofievos X€l^jr6fl€vos KaXv\lr6fj.evos 7r€ [xyj/'dfievos XiTTOfievog KaXvylz-dfieuos TreTrefXfievos eirju XcXetfifxevos €Lr)V KeKaXvfXfievos e'crjv XeXetT^o KeKaXui/z-o XcXct^^ae KeKaXv(f>6ai TTCTrefifj^vos XeXeififxevos K€KaKvfxpAvos XeX€iyjroifJ.T]V KeKaXvyj/^olfiTjv XeXel-^eo-dat K€KaXvyj/-€(Tdai XeXef^ofxepos KeKoXvyjrofievos XcKpdelrjv KaXvtpBclijv 7r€H(j)dr)Ti XeL(j)Br)Ti KaXvcf>6T}Ti XetcjydijvaL KaXvc})6iivai TrefXipdcLS XeLcfyQeis KaXvcfiOeis TTefUpSrja-OLfirjv Xet(})dj](ToliXT}p KaXvcl)Brj(roLfj.7]V Xeipm Perfect. Pluperfect. Perfect. dedappai edebdppjjv Sfdappcvos S> rfyyeXfiai TjyyiKiojv r]yyekp,ivos S eairapjiai €cnrapiiriu cinrapiievos S> pfp-iaa-jjiai epep.ia(Tii,r)V (ifp,uwii.evos (1) C 2 Strong. e^Sprju dap<5 Aorist 1 1 Weak. fiyyekB-qv dyyeX^<5 Passive | 2 Strong. eawap-qv cnrapa I 1 Weak. eflidvBrjv piavda (■ 2 Strong. 8apr}(Toixai Future 1 1 Weak. dyyeK6j]iTopjii Passive j 2 Strong. aTrapri(rofiai ( 1 Weak. p,tavdr](rop^L Verbal Adjectives : 1. t apros, dyycXrof, oi raprd?, liiavros Table VIII. PARADIGMS OF VEEBS. 123 IV.— LIQUID STEMS (X, fi, p, p). 4, cZ); fiialva, I soil (clsi&B 4:^ d). Verbal Stems : Bep, dyye\, o-Trcp, fiiav^ Optative. Imperative. Infinitive, Participle, oepoi^L dyyeXKoLfxt, (nreipoLfiL fj.taivoip.1 Bepe Syye}i/ fiiavayv delpaifjLi dyyelkatfii -HCV 8i~8a)-fi€v i-orS-jiiei/ 2 Tl-6rj-Tf 8i-8a)~T€ t-OT^-re 3 TL-6S)-(n(v) 8i-8ai-(ri(v') i-aTc5-(7t(v) S. 1 Ti-Bei-q-v 8L~8oiq-v t-(rTaLTj-v 2 Ti-Belq-s St-SoiVs i-OTaiTj-s D. 3 1 n-6f'vq 8i-hoLrf i-armri 2 Ti-de'irj-TOV or bi-boirj-Tov Or i-crrairi-Tov or g TlB^'iTOV 8i8oItov loToiTov 1 3 Ti-Beirj-TTjv or 8i-8oir]-n]v or t-orairj-rrjv or Ti6eiTt)v 8i8oiTriv l(rraiT7jv o P. 1 Ti-Belrf-iifV or 8i~8oir)~fxev or l~aTaiTj~ii€V or TiBufiev 8i,8oifxev lo-Tolfiev 2 Ti-deirj-TC or 8i-8oirj-TC or l~trraiT)-Te or nOeire StSotre lOTaiT-e 3 n-dEirj-a-av or 8i.-8oirj-aav or i-a-Tairj-a-av or nBeUv 8i8oUv lo'TaLev S. 2 Ti-e^i 8i-8ov l-OTTj i 3 Ti-6e-Ta> 8i~86-Ta) l-(rra-rai i D. 2 Tl-de-TOV 8l~8o~tov l-ara-Tov 53 3 Ti-6e-Tav 8l-86-tq>v t~aTa~T(t)V Pi P. 2 Ti-de-Tf 6i-6o-Te i-trra~T€ fl 3 Ti-6e-VTaiv or 8t-86-vTa>v or i-aTd-VTa>v or rc-de-roiiTav 8i-86-Ta>a-av i-ard-Taa'av Infin. n-6c-uai 8i-86-vai i-OTa-vai Part. Ti-Bei-s, n-Bel-cra, 81-80V-S, Si-Sov-a-a, t-OTa-y, i-oTa-aa, Tl6iV G. Tl6eVT-0S 81861/ G. 8i,-86vT-os ioTav Gr, l-crravT-oi Digitized I y Microsoft® Table IX. PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN fH. 125 ^mST CLASS. This First Class consists of Verbs which afifix their tenninations directly to the Stem. Present. Middle and Passive. Tt-^€-/xa6 Sl-8o-imi L-a-T -fjLac TL-de-a-ai 8i-do-(TaL t-oTa-a-at. Ti-Oe-Tai dl-do-rai t-o-ra-rat Ti'0e-fie6ov St-do-fieBov l-ard-iiedov Ti-Se-a-Bov Bl-8o-aBov L-oTa-aOou Ti-de-a-Bov Bi-do~aBov i~(rTa-(rSov Ti-di-fieda di-do-fuBa i-ard-fieBa ri-6e-a-6e di-do-{rBe L-(7Ta~(r6e Ti-Bc-vrai di-8o-VTai i--(TBov l-a-rrj-a-Bov n-Oa-jieBa di-Sa-neBa {-(TTca-^ieBa Ti-6fj-(rBe Si-SSi-tTBe l-OTTTJ-ade TL-BS>-VTai di-8co-VTai l~ 8i-86-(rBa l-a-Ta-a-Oa ri-Be-a-Bov 8i-8o-a-Bov t-(TTa-(r6ov Ti-Be-aBwv 8i-86-cr6ti>v l~a-Td-(r3(0P n-Bc-a-Be 8L-8o-a-Be t-a-Ta-trde Ti-Be-a-Boiv or 8t-86-aBa3v or l-a-Ta-adtov or n-Be-a-Baa-av 8i-86-o-Bw(rav l-a-rd-o-doia-av ri-Be-a-Bai 8i~8o~o-Bai. t-a-ra-aOat Ti-Be-fievo-s, Tj, o-v 8i-86-nevo-c, rj, o-v i-HTa-fievo-Sj 7, O'V ......_..,...... ....J Digitized by Microsoft® 126 PARADIGMS OF VEBBB. VJfiKiJH iJN fCl. Jaoio U.- VEEBS IN /«, tI-Btj-iu, I put 8t-8a-iu, I give i-(TTri-[U, I place Pure Stems 6e So a-Ta Present Stems n-Oe Bl-Bo i-a-TT] S. 1 i-TL-Brj-v i-Si-&a>-u t-a-nj-v 2 i-n-Brj-s €-8i'-8m-s L-o-nj-s „. . 3 i-TL-6r) i-Si-Sco t-O-TTJ m 1). 1 ^ 2 i-rl-Be-Tov i-bi-Bo-TOV i-a-ra-Tov en S 1—1 3 i-Ti-6i-rqv i-St-So-TrjU i-a-Ta-Triv P. 1 i-n-Be-jifV i-Bi-So-jiev t-O'Ta-iJ^v 2 i-TL-Be-TC c-Bl-Bo-re t-ora-re 3 i-ri-Bc-crau i-Si-Bo-a-av i-trra-a-av ; Second or Strong Aorist. Active. S. 1 Ie-Btj-v €-8m-v e-] e-a-TTj > D. 1 ■& 2 'd-6e-TOV e-So-TOV e-arri-Tov "?. 3 i-Be-TTjV i-B6-TrjV e-o'TTj-njv ^ P. 1 e-de~fi€V €-Bo-^€V €-aT7l~fJ.€V 2 c-Be-TC €-Bo-T€ e-OTTj-re 3 e~Be'(Tav €-8o-(Tav %-(m]-(Ta.v Subj. B5> 8S, (TTO} Brj-s Ba-s arri-s etc. as in the Opt. 1 6eirj-v 1 8oir)-v OTaiTj-V etc. as in the S. 2 Bis B6-S arrj-Bi g 3 Be-Tco 6o-TtTav a-TTj-Taxrav Infin. Bei-vaL - Sou-vat mfi-vai Part. Bci-s, Bel-a-a, Be-u Bov-Sf Bov-aa, (TTS-Sf (Tra-ffa, Gr. 6ivT-os Bo-v Gr. B6vT-os a-Tav Gr. (rravT-os Tlie following Tenses are forma. Active. Future. BrjfTO) BaxTO) a-Trja-oi First or Weak Aorist. eBtjKa efitoKa eo-TT/o-a Perfect. TeBetKa SeScDAca earrjKa Pluperfect. ereBeUeiv iB^BcDKeLV iarriKeiv or ela-TfjKeiv Verbals. Digitized by IVIicrosotrs) cmtimted. PABADIGMS OF VERBS. — VEEBS IN /ii. FIRST CLASS. 127 This First Class consists of Verbs whioli affix their terminations directly to the Stem, t e-TC-Bc-firjV i-bt~h6-jxriv l-a-rS-firiv e-ri-de-a-o e-6t-So-(ro i-o-ra-a-o e-Ti-Be-TO i-bi-bo-TO L-l/ 8eU-VV-T€ beiK-vv-VTCov or heiK-vv-Tdxrav BfiK-vij-cro 8eiK-vv-tT6ai 8eU-m- 2. Dual. \v-e-TOV Xv-€-(r6ov 3. „ Xu-e-rfflv Xv-i-v Xv-o-fxevo-s \v~QV is the connecting vowel lengthened, the ending fu being dropped. In the 2 Sing, eis is for ea-t. In the 3 Sing, ei for en : Xu-ei-y for Xv-e-a-i, \v-ei for Xu-e-tj [comp. solv-i-t]. The ov of the 3 Plur. has arisen out of o by- compensative lengthening (§42): Xi-ov-n from Xv-o-vm for the original and Doric Xu-o-vri [comp. solv-u-nt]. — In the 3 Sing. Imperf. e(v) stands for original e-r— comp. solveba-t — as t at the end could not maintain its ground (§ 67). 3. In the 2 Sing. Ind. Pres. Mid. rj or ei arose from e(, I become accustomed; iXiaaco, 1 roll; eXKO) or eXKvco, I draw ; eiro/j,ai, I follow ; ipr^d^ofiaL, I work ; ep-irai or epirv^co, I creep ; kcmdw, I entertain hospitably ; €xo>, I have. Comp. below the Aorists : eXjjb'tjv (§ 318), eVKov (alpew, I take, § 327, l), elaa, 1 placed (§ 269, D., and § 275). Obs. — These verbs originally began with a consonant, and there- fore had the Syllabic Augment: hpya^-o-p,ai (§ 34, D.) i-Fepya^-o-pr)v ; arcx-"' (§ 327, 6) i-a-ex-o-v. Then the consonant was dropped : i-epya^-o-prjv, i-ex-o-v, finally te was regularly contracted to ei (§ 36) : fipya^-6-p.riv, elx-o-v. § 237. iopra^a, I celebrate, has the Augment in the second vowel : impra^ov for fjopTa^ov (comp. § 37, D. 2). Verbs which originally began with a digamma (§ 34, D.), consequently with Si consonant, have the Syllabic Augment in spite of their initial vowel : avhava, I please; e-dvbavov, ovpeto, Iraake water; aBeoi, 1 push; aveopai, I buy (§ 275). Both Augments, Syllabic and Temporal, are combined in opaco, I see, capaov {iapav) ; av-oiy-a, I open, av-eay-o-v. § 238. Verbs compounded with a preposition have tJie § 237. Dialects, — Hom. forms eavoxoti from olpoxofto, I pour out twine; ifjvSavou (Herod. idvSamv) and rjv&avov from ivhavie, 1 f^ease. Comp. § 34, D. 1 and 4 Digitized by Microsoft® IM I. THE PKESENT-STEM. §239; Augment immediately after the preposition : ek-^ep-w, I earry in, ek-e-tftep-o-v ; irpo';-wy-a), I lead to, 7rpo<;-fjy-o-v ; i/c, out of, becomes e'f before the Augment : i^-fjy-o-v, I led out. The true forms of iv, in, and (tvv, with, altered by assimilation (§ 51) in the Present, appear again be- fore e : (Tv\-'ker/-a), I collect, crvv-e-\ey-o-v ; ifi-^dW-a, I invade, iv-i-^aXX-o-v. The final vowel of a preposition is elided : d7r-e-ep-a> ; only irepl and ■rrpo never lose their final vowel ; but Trpo is often contracted with e : irpov-^aivov from irpo-e-^aiv-o-v, I marched on. § 239. Exceptions. — Some verbs, which are not merely com- pounded with prepositions, but derived from already compound nouns (Deoomposita), have the Augment at the heginning: havnoofiat (from ivavrlos, against"), rjvavTiovjafv (from oofujv), I was against; poet, jjvapov from ivaLpm, 1 slay; 5ra/5/5i;, I assemble, from €KK\rja-ia, assembly, i^cKKrjfria^ov ; vjroTTTevm, I suspect, from viroirTos, suspicious, vTranrrfvov ; KaTTjyopim, 1 accuse, Kar-qyopovv (from eov). vapavop-ia, I act contrary to law (from irapd-vopos, contrary to law), has irre- gularly Traprpiopovv {fov). § 240. Many prepositions have in some compounds so far lost their distinctive meanings, that the verbs are treated as simple : KaOeibtD, I sleep, fKaSevSov yet Ka&rivdov also ; KadL^a, I sit, fm6i^ov. Comp. the verbs Irjpi (a(f>ir;p.i., § 313), ei/mpj, (dp- (jiUvinjpi, § 319, 5), rjpai (^KaBrjpai, § 315, 2). Some verbs also have a double Augment : dve^opm, I endure, rjveixoprjv ;. dvopdoa, I raise up, rjvapSovv (ooy) ; ivox>^^a>, I encumher, rivi>-)(Kovv (eov) ; irapoivka, I act as a drunlca/rd, iivapavovv So also hiaiTaai, I live (from Siaira, mode of life), ibir'jrav (aov) ; BiaKoveto, Z serve, edtrjKovovv, (eov). § 241. Sis, lad, ill, in composition is preceded by the Augment when the second word begins with a consonant or long vowel : SvsTVxe'-' I am imfortunate, ibvsrixovv (foi/); SurmjreiB, I make a sour face, iSvswTrovv (eoy) ; but short vowels receive the Temporal Augment after Sis : Svsdpearia, I displease, Susij- pecTovv (eoi'). Compounds with cv generally have no Augment: eirixow (eov),. I wasfmiunate ; but short vowels occasionally receive the Tcm- Digitized by Microsoft® § 243. CONTEAOTED VEEBS. 135 poral Augment after eS : evrjpyeTovv (eov), togetter with eicp- yiTovv, from eiepyeTca, I do good, § 242. All other compounds have the Augment at the begin- ning : j]6vjwvv, from a.dvp,cu>, I am without cov/rage. C. — Contracted Verbs. § 243. Verbs whose Present-Stem ends in a, e, or o, regularly contract these Towels in all forms of the Present-Stem with the connecting vowel, and hence § 243. Dialects. — The Ion. dial, very often does not contract ; hut the three kinds of contracted verbs are treated differently. A. Hom. inflects the a-Stems in three ways : 1. The syllables regularly contracted by the Attic writers remain qpere and unchanged : doiSid-ei, he sings, vaicra-ovcri, they dwell, and the Fem. Part. vm^Taaxra for vauraova-a, with a remarkable change of OV to 0). 2. Contraction takes place : apera = dperd-u, he thrives, from dperaa ; Trpos-r]iba = jrpos-r]v8a-e, from Trpos-avSda, I address. Sometimes ae becomes rj (not d) : irpos-avbtjTrjv (3 Dual Imperf.), opr/ai — also with regular accent — (from opd-eat) = Att. Spa (2 Sing. Pres. Ind, Mid.). 3. Extension instead of contraction takes place when a vowel of the same kind is inserted before the long one which results from contraction : 6pda>, I see, contracted opS>, extended opoa. a) This inserted vowel is usually short. Hence oadai is thus inflected. Act. Pr .Ind. opa-ta Att, . dpS J lorn . opoa opd-ets 9J opas opdas 6pd-fi 5J Spa opda opd-ovffi 3J 6p5>(7i 6p6a>iTL Subj. opd-a J» 6pS> opoa opd-jis 3) opas opdas, &C. Opt. opd-oipi 3J 6p%u opocopi Inf. opd'eiv J) opdv dpdav Part. opd-wv J> 6pS>v opoav opd-ova-a JJ opSxra opoaa-a Gen. Opd-OVTOS ?J opwvros opoavTos Mid. 2. Sing. , Ind. £pd,-ri JJ 6pS opda 3. PL opd-ovrai JJ opmvrai opoavrai Opt. 3. PI. Opd-OIVTO )> SpmiTo opomvTO Inf. opd-curdai )) opdtrdat opdaaQai 3. PL Impf. etopd-ovTO 5) kapavTO opoavTO Digitized by Microsoft® 136 I. THE PEESENT-STEM. § 243. are called Cmtracted Verbs. The laws of contraction given in §§ 36-38 are observed. Paradigms of ibe three verbs Ti,//,da), iroiew, SovXoco are given on pp. 110-113. Ois. — ^As the fi in the Infinitive civ is not original, aeiv, oeiv do not become av, oiv, but av, ovv (§37, ObsS). Dialects. i) sometimes l(Ta from T]&aa, I am youthful, so also from Spaw, I do hpa-ova-i Att. bpaa-t Hom. Spmoxri and from p.vdop.ai, I remember /ivd-eadai Att. fivacrdaiTiojn. /ivdaa-Bai. After long vowels the one following is sometimes shortened : — liva-ojievos Att. jivap-evos Horn. p.va>6p,evos fj^d-ovTes „ Tj^avTes „ rj^aovTEs The metre chiefly determines which of the vowels should be lou,,' or short. Such forms, for instance, as dpfrda (" ), ^^oavres ( "), are inadmissible. In Herod, the Stems in a often pass over into the conjugation of the Stems in c : opea (but opas, opa), opeopev, opeovcn, Spiovres. Instead of co we also find ea: 6peiovT€s. Hom. also has ijvTeov = Att. Tjvrav (from avrd-o), I meet), ;(pE(u/xEi/os= Att. f^piijuvos, making use of. B. Stems in e fluctuate between the open and contracted forms, fo is often monosyllabic by synizesis (§ 39): iSprjveov, I com- plained; often also in Ionic contracted to ev : Hom. veviiai = Att. viopai, I return home, eov rarely becomes ev: veiKEva-t = veLKova-i, they quarrel, ee becomes r; irregularly in Hom.: ofiaprrjTrjv {ojxapTia, I meet with), dweCkijTrjv (dn-eiXem, I threaten), dopTrrjrrjv (dopTTea, I sup), Inf. (fiopripevai = Att. cpopelv, to carry. An utterly anomalous Infinitive is (fiop!]vai.. The second c in the 2 Sing. Mid. is sometimes dropped : jxoBeai for fivBieaL (Att. /iuflj, p.vBf'i, thou sayest), TriaXe'o = Att. cVibXoC, thou hadst intercourse ; sometimes e e are contracted to c t : jivBeiai. The . first way is usual in Herod. Hom. also prolongs e to e.i without contraction : veiKeia = Att. veiKco, eVeXcict-o = Att. ireKelTO (reXm, / complete). G. Stems in o are mostly contracted : yovvovpim, I supplicate. Some have an extension like those in a : dp6atm(v) = Att, apova-i.(v), they plough ; Srj'iocoev = Att. BrjioUv they would destroy ; vnvcaoirras = Att. virvovvras, the sleepers. In Herod, o sometimes changes to e, and with o is contracted to E u : ebKalevv ^ Att. edLKaiovv, deemed right. Digitized by Microsoft® §2-15. PKESENT AND VEEBAL-8TEMS. 137 i 244. Ols. — 1. Monosyllabic Stems in e admit only the con- traction ej. All syllables which, contracted, would produce another sound remain uncontracted. Stem TrXe (Pres. ttX/o), I sail, Inf. TrXeiv) w\eeis jrXfis but irXeu TrXe'ei TrXei „ TrXeovai eWXees cTrXet? ,, eirKeov. Se'ffl, / hind, forms an exception, having to Sovv (St'ov), Sovfiai, &c., to distinguish them from forms of dea, 1 am in want of, Set, it is necessary, to beov, duty. ■2. Some Stems in a have a preference for r), which they admit in the place of d: fa-<». Hive, f^s, fj, ^re, f^v ; Trcivd-m, lam hungry, TTdvrjv ; SLijfd-cD, I thirst, Siiff^j/ ; so also Kvd-a>, I scratch ; a-fia-a), I stroke ; yffd-a>, I scrape, and xpa-oitai, I make V£e of. 3. piyo-a, I freeze, has o> and a for ov and ot: Inf. piy&v, Opt ptymjv. 4. Xouo), I wash, lav-o, has a peculiar contraction ; that is, the connecting vowel after o u disappears : c-Xou for e-\ov-e, XoC-ftai for \ov-o-fiai, &c. In like manner ot-o-jiai is often contracted to ol-fiai, I think, and the Impf. to-o-jirji/ to w-firfv. D. — Distinction of the Present-Stem from the Verbal- Stem. § 245. We call that part of a verb the Verbal -Stem from the combination of which with the terminations of persons, tenses, moods, infinitives and participles, consistently with the laws of euphony, all the forms of the verb may be explained: Xv, Pres. Xi^co, Perf. XeXvKa, Put. Xva-m; rofia, Pres. Tifido), Perf. rerl/j/rjKa, Put. TlfJbrj(T(0. Ohs. — From the Verbal-Stem also nouns are formed by means of the nominal sufiSxes : 'Ki-tn-s, loosing ; Xv-rijp, looser ; Xv-rpo-v, redemption fee; Ti-iirj-a-t-s, valuation ; rifirj-^-s:, censor. When the Verbal-Stem cannot be traced further back, it is called a Root: Xv, and a verb formed from it, a Boot- Verb : Xvco. But when the Verbal-Stem is § 244. Dialects. — 2. For xp^'"'" Herod, has xpS-foi- 4. Hom. 3 Sing. Imperf. Xde (for XoFf, § 35, 06s.) = XoCe, TKove. Digitized by Microsoft® 138 I. THE PKBSENT-STEM. § 24S itself a Nominal-Stem formed by means of a nominal suffix, it is said to be derived: Ti,/j,a is at once the Nominal-Stem of rtyu.??, Tumour, formed by the nominal suffix fid from the root ri, and the Terb formed firom it is a derivative one : n/j-dco. Ohs. — Boots are almost all of one syllable ; derived Stems are of two or more syllables. § 246. The Verbal-Stem is not always Kke the Present-Stem, but the Present-Stem is frequently an extension of the Verbal-Stem: Pres. 'Keitr-co, I leave, Present-Stem Xenr, Verbal-Stem Xiir (Aorist eknrov). Such additions are called enlargements of the Present ; the Verbal-Stem divested of them is the pure Verbal- Stem. Ols. — Where tbe Verbal-Stem differs from the Present-Stem, nouns are usually formed from the former, not from the latter v Verbal-Stem ^uy, Present-Stem (jievy, substantive (jivy-ri (fug-a), adj. vy-6.(h)-s, fugitive. § 247. The relation of the Present-Stem to the Verbal-Stem produces four Classes of verbs with some subdivisions. 1. FiEST Class (unenlarged). The Present-Stem is like the Verbal-Stem. This comprises first of all the pure verbs, i. e., verbs whose Stem ends in a vowel (with the exception of a small number in ew, § 248), and many others besides TijjLa-o), ^ov\o-(o, TraiSev-a), T educate ; \v-a, I loose ; tZ-g} I honcmr ; dpx-a>, I 'rule ; dy-oa, I lead ; Xey-a>, I say. § 248. 2. Second Class (lengthened class). The Stem vowel is lengthened in the Present-Stem. This comprises several verbs whose Stem ends in a mute, and which in the Present have a diphthong or a long vowel, as : § 248. Dialects. — To these belongs the Horn, o-euw, I htnvy, from the Stem av. Digitized by Microsoft® § 249. PEESENT AND VEEBAL-STEMS. IBS' (pevy-cD, I flee Pure Stem , I guard, instead of (j>v\aKia>, Pure Stem (jivXaK (c^uXaKij, o guard) TcuTda, I arrange, „ rayia, „ ray (^Tay6s, arranger) TapdcrtTco, T confuse, „ rapa)^i(o, „ rapa)^ (rapayrj, confusion) Other Examples, jlXltrcr(x), I dig Kr]pvcra-a)(^K), I ^oclavm fr(l>dTTQ>(y), I slay Ols. — The character of the Presents ap/ioTTa, I fit, naa-a-a, I scatter, 7rXa(rcrci), / shape, (^pdcra-a, I seethe, tpeaa'a, I row, n-TiVo-o), I stamp, ^\'i.TTa>, I abstract honey, — is a Dental; wea-ara, I hoil, has Stem n-en- irregularly. § 251. b) h, and more rarely 7, with t, form t, (§ 58) : e^ofiai, I sit, instead of eBiofiai, Pure Stem e S (eS-o?, seat, Lat. sedes) ; Kpd^eo, I cry, instead of Kparjia, JPure Stem Kpa'^. other Examples. (ppaCa>(8), I say o^w^S), I smell (rxtia(8), I split Obs. — Present-Stems in f which express a sound have theVerhal- Stem in y : orerafo), I sigh ; olpa(w, I wail; olpay-rj, a wailing; moreover, ffrafca, / trickle; a-Ti^a, I prick, Lat. inrstig-o, § 250. Dialects.— The Stems of the Presents Ipaaa-a, I whip; \la-a-opai, I beseech; Kopva-a-a, I arm; Herod, dc^ao-o-ca, I touch, end in Dentals (Xtr, Kopvd); Hom. ivia-a-a, I blame, has irregularly the Stem e'vtn-. § 251. Dialects. — In all dialects Presents in -f6eipa), I corrupt „ cjidepita „ „ (^i 6 e p (<^6op-a, corruption) aivai, I show „ (paviu) „ „ (j>av (^d-(j>av-rjs, invisihle) Other Examples. Iiatvofiai, I rage atrflpa, I sow eyelpa, I awaken aipa, I raise dyelpa, J collect vipaivco, I weave Ohs. — If the Stem syllahle has i or v for its vowel, this is- lengthened by the retreating i : npiva, I sever, judge, from KpXv-ita ; avpo), I drag, from avp-tco, A single Stem in X also follows this formation, viz. o^eX, Pres. ocfKika, I owe, for oc^fXico, to distinguish it from d^eXXo), J increase, with the same Stem. The I unites immediately with the final vowels of the Stems Kav and KKav, which then sacrifice their v (f) : Ka-ia, I hum, icKa-ia, I weep. Additional fonns in Attic are Koa, icKda (§ 35, Ohs.). N. B. — The other less usual classes of verbs are given below. § 253. Dialects. — Horn, joins t immediately with Vowel Stems : ha-la>, Jhurn, Stem 6a ; fia-Loiiai, I seek. Stem /xa ; va-la>, I dwell. Stem va ; and he uses ocfieXKa in the sense of the Att. ocf/fiKa ; but, on the other hand he has AXm, I press, from the Stem eX, for which one might expect eXXm (Class 4, c). Digitized by Microsoft® 142 II. THE STRONG OE SECOND AOEIST-STEM. § 254. n. — The Strong ok Second Aoeist-Stem. § 254. The Strong or Second Aorist Active and Middle is formed from the Strong Aorist-Stem, which is like the Pure Verbal-Stem, except the few cases .named in § 257. Pres. Stem Xeiiv-a, I leave XtTT TvirT-io, I strike rvir j3a\X-(B, J throw Active. Aorist I €-Xm-o-v, I left I e-Tvir-o-v, I struckl e-/3aX-o-i/, I threw Ind. I e-XtTT-c-r | e-nnr-e-s \ e-^aX-e-r etc., like the Imperfects eXftn-oi>, eTVirrov, t^aKkov Subj. n^^ jXijr-Q) I Tvir-O} I ^aX-o) iiT-rj-s I TVTr-Tj-s I ^aX-7/-ff etc., like tlie Pres. Subjunctive XtiVto, runTa, jSaXXm f^ , |(Xi7r-ot-yL« I TVTT-oi-iu I /3dX-oi-;xi ^ ■ |\XlV-OI-f I TVTl-Ol-S I |3dX-0l-S etc., like the Pres. Optative XeiTroifu, rviTToifu, /SdXXoifxi T I fXiTT-f I Txm-e I 0dX-e ^ 'j\Xt7r-C-Tft) I TV7r-€-TQ> \ jSoX-e-TO) etc., like the Pres. Imper. Xcmg, TiWe, ^dXXe Iniin. Xiir-eiv j3dk-€LV Part. Xtff-cbi/, XiTr-ovcaj Xm-ov, Oen. Xm- OVTOS TVTT-av, Tvir-ova-a, rvTT-Qv, Gen. tutt^ ^aX~a>Vf ^aX-oV' (TO, /SoX-dv, Oen. ^aX-6vTos Middle. Indie l/^'"^"''"""^"?'' I e-TVTr-6-fj,Tiv I i-^dk-o-jUjv ' |\e-Xi7r-ov I l-Tvir-ov \ c-^aX-ov etc., like the Imperf. jXeiTrofirjv, iruTrToiirjv, e^dXXoiirjv rim-at-pxtL I ^aX-a>-fiai .... ■ "JT-j I ^aX-u etc., like the Pres. Subj. XetVojjugi, TvirrajLm, ^aXXafiai Opt. I A'^'^-o'-f"?" I ■nm-oi-fi.ijv I pdX-oi-ixrjV ' l\Xi7r-ot-o I Tvn-oi-o \ j8aX-oi-o. etc., like the Pres. Opt. Xemoifiriv, rwKTolfir)v, ^aXXoiixriv ^ ''\Xi7r-€-crda> I )3aX-oO 1 ^aX-e~(rdai etc., like the Pres. Imper. XeiVou, run-Tou, fiaXXov TV1T~0V I Tvw-i-a-da> Infin. I Xm-i-g-dm TVTT-e-a-aai ^aX~e~(r6aL Part. I Xt7r-o'-/^eyo-y, ?;, o-v | Tinr-d-;iej'o-y, ?;, o-j" | fiaX-o-jievo-s, rj, o-v Digitized by Microsoft® ^ 257. II. THE STRONG OR SECOND AORIST-STEM. 143 § 255. 1. The Inflexion of the Strong Aorist-Stem differs from that of the Present-Stem (Imperfect and Present tenses) only in the accent of the following forms : the Infin. Act. is perispome (Xmelv), the Infin. Mid. paroxytone (\nrea-6ai), the Part. Act. accents the O-sound (Xi/ircov, Xiirovaa), the 2. Sing. Imper. Mid. is ■perispome (Xiirov). 2. The Aorist Middle has not, like the Present Middle, the meaning also of the Passive: thus e^dXofj/riv means only I threw for myself, but not, / was thrown. On the Augment of the Indicative, §§ 234-242. § 256. The Strong Aorist can be formed only from such verbs as have a Present-Stem different from the Pure Verbal-Stem, therefore not from the verbs of the First ^unenlarged) Class (§ 247). Also it is not usually formed from many verbs of other classes, and scarcely occurs &i all from any but Root- Verbs (§ 245). Obs. — On the Aorists of the verhs 6v-o> and <^i-a (class 1), see §§ 316, 16, 17. § 257. In a few verbs the Strong Aorist Stem is distinguished from the Pure Verbal Stem ; viz. instead of <= of the latter, the Strong Aor. sometimes has a, by which rpeir-a, I turn, though belonging to the first class, has a Strong Aor. ; E-rpaTr- ■o-v (Impf. e-rpeir-o-v), i-rpan-o-jiriv. An isolated formation is Pres. Tpay-a, I gnaw, Aor. e-rpSy-o-v. ay-io, 1 drive, likewise belonging to the first class, by doubling the Verbal-Stem forms the Aorist-Stem ay-ay, whence Ind. : fjy-uy-o-v, Subj. ay-ay-a. Inf. ay-ay-civ. § 255. Dialects. — 1. All the peculiarities enumerated § 233, D. extend likewise to the Strong Aorist : 2 Sing. Subj. ^a\r]a-6a, 3. Sing. ^akri, I sJiall hose \l/a--€LS, &c. lilse the Pres. 'Kito (l>avea>, S>, I shall show (j)av€-€is, els, &c. like the Present ttoiS Opt. Infin. Part. Xiar-oi-fu \vv Fern. \v(r~ova-a Neut. \va--ov Gen. 'kiic-ovTos (fiave-oirjv, oir]v (^av€-eiv, eiv ape-ov, ovv (j>ave-0VT0s, ovvTOS Middle. Indie. Xva-o-imi, I shall loose for myself like the Present Xiofuii (pavi-o-jxai, oC/xat, I shall appear like the Present Troiovfiai Opt. Infin. Part. \v(T-ol-fl,r]V \vav€-e-a-6ai, €L(r6ai -a>, I write, Fut. jpa^jr-o) ; aB-co, I sing, Fut. acr-w ; cTTrevS-co, liho, Fut. crTretix-a) for c77revB-(7co (§ 50). About Opeijrco, Stem rpe^, &v-\{rQ}, Stem rv(j}, and others, see § 54. 2. Verbs of the second or extended class (§ 248) retain the extended Stem also in the Future : Xeiir-o), A,6ii|r-a) ; th« six verbs in eta mentioned in § 248 show their strengthened form in the Fut., though it is not seen in the Present : ttXeo), "TrXevao/iat ; in like manner jckaieo brings out its Pure Stem kXuv in KXavcrw, and Kaioa in Kavaco (§ 253). About x^"'' ^^^ § '^^^^ 3. Of verbs of the third or T class, and of those of the fourth or I class (§ 249, &c.), the Pure Stem must be found in order to form the Future : Timrco (class 4), Pure Stemi TV IT, Fut. Tvi^a>; (pvXdcrcra), Pure Stem ipvXaK, (^Tcprr-o-fuu, I rejoice); Stem i8-e-(rdm, also Fut. jre-^iS-^-o-ojuat. Isolated Aorists are: c-Ke'-K(€)X-e-TO, he called, from KeXojuat ; ni-f^v-o-v, I hilled (Stem cj}ev); re-Tfji-o-v (^I hit, Stemre/i); Tf-ray-av (^seizing. Stem ray, Lat. tango), rjv-irr-air-o-v (J scolded, Pres. cvItttoi) along with ev-eviTT-o-v, and rjpvK-aK-o-v (J kept hack, Pres. epvKO)) have the reduplication in the middle of the word. — The reduplication in this case everywhere belongs to the Tense-Stem, and, as in the Perfect- Stem (§ 273), is preserved in all the moods, in the Infin., and the Participle. The Indio. may add the Augment or omit it before the reduplication. (§ 234, D.) § 259. Dialects. — About the contraction, see § 248, D. L Digitized by Microsoft® 146 III. THE FDTUEE-STEM. § 2ClL Fut. (pvXd^a; cjipd^a), Pure Stem cf)pa8, Fut. , I proclaim; irpdaaa, I do; a-xl'K'^, I split ; Soicd^o), I judge ; oifXl^o}, I arm ; and let the Presents be found to the Futures opu^co, a-cpd^w, ^laaofiai,, Xo'ytaofji.ai. Verbs with a dental character ending in the Present in -aao) or -tto) naturally (§ 250, 05s.) make the Future in -aa : irXdaai (Pres. irXdaaa), I shape), dpfioaeo (Pres^ dpfWTTO}, I fit) ; and, on the other hand, those with the character 7, which have the Present in -fo (§ 251, Obs.} make their Future in -feu : aTevd^a (Pres. aTevd^co, I sigh), arl^a (Pres. crTi^a, I prick). § 261. Vowel-Stems have their vowels long before o- ;. a becomes d if preceded by e, i, or p (§ 41), in all other cases it becomes 1?. Every other short vowel is changed into the corresponding long one : Id-a, I leave, eacr-co ; Id-ofiat, I heal, idcr-oixai ; Bpd-o), I do, hpcux-co ; but TipA-w, Tipi.ria-ai ; ^od-w, I cry out, ^orja-ojjiai, ; iyyvd-o), J hand over, iyyvija-co ; -iroik-to, 7roirja-w, BovXocOy Bov\d>(T-a). The Stem XP"' iXP°''^> -^^*'^^ ^'^ oracle; xpaop'ai, I use) exceptionally has tj in the Future : xPV°''^> XPV^'^f''"''' > whereas dKpoaofj,ai, J listen, has uKpodcrofiai. Eespecting the Future with a short vowel, see § 301. § 262. The contracted Future forms the Futui-e-Stem § 261. Dialects. — The Ion. dial, has ?; even after t, i, pi ireiprja-oiiai, I shall endeavour. The Ep. dial, sometimes doubles the ; ar/yiWa), ar/yeXSi. According to this rule, let the Future be formed of aave-a> has arisen from (§ 61, b), in which e is the connecting vowel. § 263. Several Stems in e (Pres. em), aS (Pres. a^w), and tS (Pres. i^co), throw out the a- in the Futiu-e. Those in e and aB then contract the vowels e and a with the connecting vowel: reXi-co, I covvplefe, Tekea-a, reXia, reXw ; 1 Plur. TeXeofj,ev, Te\ov/j,ev (as in the Present) ; ^ijSd^Q}, I bring, /3i^da-6}, /3i^dw, ^i^ay; 1 Plur. ^i^dofiep, ^i^&fiev. To these also belongs eKdat, iXco, 2 Sing. 6\a?, 3 Sing. iXa, from the irregular Present eXavvco, I drive; comp. § 321, 2. Stems in tS after dropping the o- insert e, which is contracted with the connecting vowel : ko/ii^co, I carry, Fut. Act. KoijA,(j-a, KOfii-e-(c, KofiiS), 1 Plur. KOfiieo/Mev, Ko/Miov/J^v, Fut. Mid. Ko/Miovfiai. This form of the Future is called the Attic. § 264. Some verbs take an e after the ■7rXev(rov/j.ai, along with nrXeva-o/iai, ; Stem. \v Pure Stem <^av 1. 0- Form. 2. Supplementary Form. Stem of Weak Aorist Xva-a ^Tjva Active. Middle. Active. Middle. Indicative. e-Xvtra, e-Xva-d-fiTiv, I e-(l)ijvay e-(PT]vd-fxr]v I loosed loosed for myself I showed e-\v (-(jjTjva-s e-^rjvo) €-Xv(Te(v) i-Xvaa-TO i-Xvad-fxe-Qov ?-^i7*e(K-)^_ £-(j>r}va~TO €~(f)r]vd-fi€~6ov i-\va-a-TOU i-XvTa-adov €-(prjva-Tov e-¥a etc., li ke the Pres. Act . and Mid, Optative. Xva-ai-jiL Xva-at-s or Xvjivai or (j)7}VaL~T0 Xia-eii(v) Xva-al-fj,e6oT> ^r]vaL~ixe9ov Xva-ai-Tov Xva-ai-a-Qov (jirivai-TOV (j)r]vaL-a6ov Xvcral-njv XvoraL-a-Brjv (f)r)vai-n]v cftrjvai-a-dqv Xia-ai-iiev Xva-m-)ie6a iprivai-fiev (j)rivd-Tiit cPrjvd-aOd} Xvo'a-Tov Xia-a-r]va-a-Bov Xv(rd~TO>v Xva-d-o-Bmv (prjvd-Toyv (j)r)vd-ada)V Xva-a-re Xi(ra-a-6e fprjva-re (pTjva-aBe Xv(ra~vTcov or Xvcrd-a-dcov or iprjvd-vTcav or T}va-(j6at Part. Xva-d-s, aira, av Xvcrd-fi€vo-s, <^r)vd-s, aaa, av (Pr]vd-fX€VO-s, Gen. Xv],' o-v. Digitized by Microsoft® 150 IV. THE WEAK OR FIEST AOEIST-STEM. §268. § 268. The characteristic vowel in the inflexion of the Weak Aorist is a, which in the 3 Sing. Ind. Act. becomes e, but everywhere else remains unchanged before the personal and modal signs. In the Subj. a is lengthened to a and r], whereby the endings become the same as those of the Present. In the Optat. Act. the foims with ei in the 2 and 3 Sing, and 3 Plur. are more common than those with at : Xvueta?, Xva-eie(v), Xva-etav. In the 2 Sing. Imperat. Act. v is added by which the a is rendered so obscure as to become o : \v, I draw water, has in Hom. the Put. dij>i^a>, but the Aor. atpva-aa. Irregular Hom. forms without o- are : eX^va for exeva-a, from Pres. xf<», I pour ; ektjo, 1 Plur. Subj. Krjopey or Kfio/xEv, Imperat. k^ov or kciov. Inf. Krjai. or Ks'iai, from Pres. Kaia, I lurn; Stem Kav (Att. eKava-a); eVo-euo, Pres. irevai, I drive Digitized by Microsoft® §270. IV. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM. 1.51 of the Puture only by the addition of the a : Xver, Xva-a ; 7/3ai|r, vXa^a. Respecting the change ■of vowels and consonants before er, eomp. §§ 260, 261. The irregular %ew (§ 265) has the Aorist e%6a for 6%evcra. ■Comp. the irregiilarity in elva, IspoJse; T]veyica, I lore, § 327, 12 and 13. § 270. The Stems in X, fi, v, p, forming their Future without o- reject this consonant also in the Weak Aorist, which gives rise to the supplementary form, for the TOwel of the Stem is lengthened by compensation for *he loss of the a: 5 after i and p becomes d : Pres. irepaiva (class 4, d), I penetrate. Stem irepav, Fut. ncpava, Aor. i-^repdva (§ 41). otherwise 17: Pres. (Iiaiva (class 4, d). Stem ^av. Put. ^avSi, Aor. e~(l}r]va, '< becomes ei : Pres. dyyeWa (class 4, c), I announce. Stem dyye\. Put. dyyeKw, Aor. ijyyeCKa. „ „ Pres. vip,a> (class 1), / distribute. Put. j/f^m, Aor. e-veifia. X „ X: Pres. KpiVco (class 4, d), J /arf^'e, Stem Kpiv, Put. KpCvm, Aor. e-Kpiva. w „ w : Pres. dp.Cva (class 4, d), J defend, Stem dp,vv. Put. u/iui/ra, Aor. rjpvva. 06s. — The Stems dp (aipm, J Zi/'i) aud A\ (oXXofiat, J Zeap) have in the Indicat. ?; because of the Augment : ^pa, j^Xa/iT/v, but in the other forms a : Spas, oKijuvos. a instead of jj occurs in ■ away ; the Infinitives dKevaa-Bai or dKeaaSai, to avoid ; hariaa-Bai, from bariopai, I distribute. ela-a, I placed, is a defective poet. Aorist, the Horn. Inf. is ia-trai. Part, e'uj-as and ea-a-as (dvicras), 3 Sing. Mid. Ucra-aTo. On the -doubling of the o- see § 261, D. \6ea-a-a (Xof-e-owo) = eXoucra (Xoum, I wash), with e inserted. (Comp. § 35, Ofo.) § 270. Dialects. — 1. Homer makes the Aor. of several Stems in .X, p., !>, p with er: eXa-a from etXo), I press; the defective dmepira, I tore away. 2. In the Aeol. dial, o- is assimilated to preceding X, p.,v,p; an example of it in Horn, is a^fXXa for aic^eX-o-a = Att. acjxiXa, Pres. .o0eXX(B, I increase. 3. The Augment of the Hom. Aor. ^etpa, Pres. eipai, J/om, is quite irregular. Comp. § 275, D. 2. Digitized by Microsoft® 152 IV. THS WEAK OE FIKST AOEIST-STEM. §271, some few verbs : Kepbalvm, I gain ; opyaivto, I muse anger ; a-rjfiaiva, I indicate — ia-r]jxava along with ia-fiii-rjva. On tha other hand rj instead of a, in spite of the p, occurs in Terpalvta I bore, eTGTprjva. § 271. The Weak Aorist is the usual form in aU verbs which, according to § 256, cannot form the Strong Aorist, that is, in all deriTative verbs and in verbs of the first class ; but radical verbs of other classes, espe- cially those with Stems in X, fi, v, p, also have the Weak Aorist. The Weak Aorist Middle like the Strong one ha% only a Middle sense and is never Passive (§ 477, &c.). V. — The Peefect-Stbm. § 272. From the Perfect-Stem are formed the Perfect and Pluperfect Active and Middle, and the third Future (Futurum exactum) which occurs only in the Middle. § 273. The essential characteristic of the Perfect- Stem is the reduplieatim, (comp. •jre-TrTiy-a with Lat.. pe-pig-i), which generally takes the first place, but in verbs compounded with prepositions is put, like the Augment, after the preposition (§ 2.38): Xi-Xv-Ka, but' iK-Xe-\vK-a. The redu'plication belongs to the Perfect-Stem, and is therefore, unlike the Augment, preserved in all the moods, infinitives, and participles (comp. 258 D). In verbs beginning with a consonant it consists in the initial consonant with e being placed before the Stem :. Stem Xv, Perf-Stem XeXv, 1 Sing. Perf. Ind. Act. Xi-Xv-Ka. § 273. Dialects. — The reduplication cannot, like the Augment, be- omitted in the Epic dial. ; diy-fmi. forms an exception (3 Plur. Se'x-aT-at), though we also find Se-dey-pai, I expect, or receive. Part.. fie-Sey-n/i/of, from Pres. 8e'x-o-/iai (comp. § 316, 34). Some verba> beginning with a vowel do not lengthen it in the Perfect in the New-Ionic dialect. Digitized by Microsoft® 273. V. THE PEKFECT-STEM. 153 I. Active. Present Xv-a Stem Xv Perfect Stem XeXv Perfect : 1. Weak form Pure Stem Tjii-c(v) n(-(pfiv-a-Tov ^e-(prjv-a~fiev 'iT€-(j}riv-a-T€ Subj. Xf-Xv-K-a> wf- Xe-Xi-K-jj-s ne-T]V-e etc., like the Imp. Pres. § 232 Infin. Xe-Xv-K-€vai ire-^rjv-evai Part. M. Xf-Xv-K-as F. Xe-Xv-K-vla N. Xe-Xv-K-ds Gen. Xe-Xv-K-oT-os (Inflexion, § 147, 2) 7re-(l>jjv-a>s ire-^T]v-via 7re-(j>rjv-6s ne-cfiTjv-oT-os Pluperfect. Indie. i-Xe-Xv-K-ei-v, I had loosed i-Xe-Xv-K-fi-s €-Xc-Xv-K-ei e-Xe~Xv-K-et~TOV i-Xe-Xv-K-fi-TTjV e-Xe-Xv-K-ci-fie e-Xe-Xv-K-ei-re e-Xe-Xv-K-f-a-av or cXeXuKfitra?- €-7r€-(j)fiv-ei-v, 1 had appeared e-we-(l>riv-ei-s i-7ce-<^rjv-ei €-7re-(p7jV-€t-TQV e-7re~(pT]V-ei-Triv €-7re-(pr]v-et-fiev i-Tre-riv-(i-T€ €~7re-, I sacrifice, ri-dv-Ka ; Stem ^av, 7ri-(f>r]v-a. 2. When a verb begins with two consonants, only the first appears in the reduplication, and even this only when it is a mute followed by \, fj,, v, or p : Stem jpa^, r/pd^co, I write, rye-ypacfi-a ; Stem irXay, irKrja-ao), 1 strike, -Tre-TrXryy-a ; Stem irvv, irvia), I breathe, ttc- •TTvev-Ka. 3. In every other case a Stem beginning with two consonants takes only e for its reduplication: Stem jcrev, Kreivw, I hill, e-KTov-a; Stem ^ijre, ^rjra>, I seek, i-^'qTrj-Ka. 4. Stems beginning with p likewise have only e, after which the p is doubled: Stem pt^, pLirTO), I throw, ep-piip-a, (comp. §§ 62, 234). Exceptions. — ^Verbs beginning with yv, y\, and sometimes those beginning with |8X, have a simple e for their reduplication. Stem yi/o), i'-yva-Ka, I have come to know; Stem ^Xaa-Te (pXaara, I germinate'), e-^a, I plough ; dX-aXi;-/iai, from a\d- o-fiai, I wander; ap-rip-a, lam joined. Stem ap; oS-mS-a, I smell, of a, comp. od-or ; on-am-a, I have seen, from the Stem o tt ; and with a V inserted : iiiv-rifiv-na, from the Pres. rip,v-a, I droop the head. — Herod, has dp-alprj-Ka from aipew, I take. 2. Instead of e'l-a>da Horn, also has e-w6a, which is the only form used by Herod. From the Stem iXir (originally FcXtt) c-oX7r-a, 1 hope; from Stem ipy (Jepy) e-opy-a, I have done. From the Stem dp (Lat. sero), Pres. e'ipa, 3 Sing. Pluperf. Mid. eepro, Part. Perf. Digitized by Microsoft® 156 V. THE PEKFECT-STEM. § 27G. the Temporal Augment (§ 235) : Stem opdo, op65>, 1 raise up, (op6co-Ka. The verbs mentioned in § 236 have el here also : eHXiyfiM, Pres. eKia-aai, I roll. 1. Some Stems beginning witli a, f, or o exceptionally take wtat is called the Attic reduplication instead of the mere lengthening of the vowel. This reduplication consists in the initial vowel with its following consonant being repeated, and the vowel of the second syllable being lengthened: Stem dXicp (dXft'^m, class 2. 1 anointy, dX-^\t0-a ; Stem ok o, a/covo), I hear, aK-rjico~a (for d/cijKofaj § 35.06s.), but Mid. rJKova-fj.ai; Btem 6 pv ^(^opvo'a'di, class 4, / dig) op-oypvx-o- ; Stem ayep {dyeipM, class 4, d, I col- lect) ay-Tjye p-Ka; Stem tXa (Pres. iXavvat, I drive, § 321. 2) eX-^Xa-Ko, Mid. ik-TjXa-pai ; Stem eXpy^i Pres- ^^yx"') -^ ^sfi^te (class 1), Perf. Mid. eX-^Xty/iai (comp. § 286, Ohs.) ; iyp- Tjyop-a, I am awake, from the Stem iyep, Pres. iyflpm, I awaken (class 4, d), is irregular. 2. The Stems dXo) (a\la-Kopai, § 324. 17, I am made prisoner), ay {ayvvpi, § 319. 13, I break), clu (not used in. the Pres., § 317. 7), and oive (Jsviopai, I iuy) are hkewise irregular; but originally they had an initial consonant (§ 34. D) : t-dXa-Ka, e-dy-a, e-oiK-a, i-dyvrj-pac ', the Stem di/oty (di/otyoj, /open) has av-eay-a. To these may be added k'l-aid-a, I am accmtomed, from' the Stem 4$, originaUy ftO (comp. §§ 236, 237). 1. The Perfect Active. § 276. The terminations of the principal tenses are appended to the Perfect-Stem in the Indicative by- means of the connecting vowel a. The first person has no personal ending at all ; in the third a is changed into 6. The Subjunctive, Optative, and the Imperative (which rarely occurs) have the vowels of the Present ; the Infinitive ends in -evai (always paroxytone), and the Participle in -fB9, -via, -6?, Gen. -oto'; (Stem ot, § 188). Mid. eepiievos (oomp. § 270, T>. 3). The following two are defective Perfects in Hom. dv-rivo6-e(^v), it gushes forth, iv-rjvo6-e(y), if is upon. Both also occur as Pluperfects. § 276. Dialects. — In the Hom. dial, the Part. Perf. Act. sometimes has w instead of o : tiBvyjuitos = Att. TedvrjKoTos (from BvrjtrKa, i die) ; KeKkqyams for KeKXijyoTfs, calling, from Pres. xXafm. Digitized by Microsoft® §278. THE PEEFEOT ACTIVE. 157 Ohs. — The Subjimctive and Optative are not unfrequently formed periphrastically by the Participle with the corresponding forms of elfii, I am. § 277. The Perfect Active is formed in two different ways : 1. The Strong Perfect (Second Perfect) is formed, like the Strong Aorist, directly from the Stem : Stem Trpdy, Pres. (Class 4, a) Trpda-crco, I do, Perf. ire-Trpdy-a. The Strong Perfect, Hke the Strong Aorist, occurs almost exclusively in the case of radical verbs (§ 24.5), and is generally the older and rarer form. § 278. The following changes of vowels are to be observed in its formation : a after p becomes d: Stem k pay, Pres. Kpa^a>, /' scream, Perf. Ki-Kpay-a a otherwise becomes i; : Stem n-Xay, Pres. irXrjo-cra, I strike, Perf ve-jrKrjy-a Stem ipav, Pres. ipaiva, I show, Perf. Trt-^ijv-a Comp. ■f becomes o: Stem orpe^, Pres. o-Tpc^m, J §4:Oto§43. turn, Perf. e-o-Tpofjy-a t „ ot : Stem \i7r, Pres. XciVd), Jfeaae, Perf Xe-XoOT-a V „ €vi Stem ^uy, Pres. 0euy is quite isolated: Stem pay, Perf. ep-payy-c, I am torn, Pres. p^jyvv-fii (§ 319, 24), and § 277-280. Dialects. — The Hom. dial, is partial to the Strong Per- fect ; the aspiration does not occur in it : Stem kott ((edn-ra)), KeKcarais. The Part. Tre-^uf-dr-er, from Stem (pvy (^ewyu) is quite an isolated Horn. form. Hom. forms the Weak Perfect only from Vowel-Stems, and even here he has sometimes strong secondary forms : Stem 0v, 3 Plur. Perf. Act. ■ire(j)vd(Tt = Att. ireipvKda-i,, from (j>ia>, I hegef ; Stem KOTc (Korea, I am angry). Part. Perf. (cocorijar, § 317, D. In the Fem. Part. Perf. shortenings of vowels often occur : Stem dp, Masc. Part. Perf. dp-rjp-ws, Joined, Fern, dp-dp-vla; Stem da\ (SdXXaj, 1 hloom), Masc. Part. Perf Te-drjX-ais, Fem. Te-OaX-vZa. The Perf. Te-Tpr/x-a, I am restless, Pres. TapaiT(ra>, I disturh, Stem rlajpa^, is irregular. Digitized by Microsoft® 158 v. THE PBKFECT-STEM:. § 279. so also tliat of e into to: Stem id, Perf. e"-co6-a, I am accustomed (§ 275). With the Attic reduplication, and. in some other cases also, there is no lengthening of the vowel : Stem o/jy%, op-mpvx-O', Vves. hpvaaw, I dig ; rye- rypaxjj-a, from 'ypd(f)Q), I write. § 279. Some Stems ending in the consonants k, y, it, /8' change these into the corresponding aspirates, generally without any lengthening of the Towels : Stem KTjpvK, Pres. Kripva-a-a, I proclaim, Perf. Kc-Krjpvx-a „ ay, „ aya, I lead, „ ^a (ayfjox-a) „ KOTT, „ K&nTa, I hew, „ Ke-Kocj)-a „ ^Xa/3, „ /SXaTTTiB, I hurt, „ ^e-^acp-a In spite of the aspiration the vowels are changed ins Ke-Kkoj>-a, Stem K'Ke'jr, Pres. KKeirro}, I steal; ire-iTOfiji-a, Stem -TrefjuTT, Pres. Tre/iTTco, I send; Te-Tpo(j)-a, Stem rpeiT, TpeTTO), I turn, which is in form the same as the Perf. of the Stem rpe^ (Pres. rpe^a, I nourish); et-Xo%-a (comp.§ 274), Stem Xe^, Pres. 'Ke'^co, I gather. Ohs. 1. — Pew verbs liave both forms with and without the aspi- rate : the Stem npay (Pres. 7rpda-(ra>, I do) has both ire-irpdy-a (intransitive, / have fared) and ire-npax-a (transitive, I have done); Stem avoiy, Pres. avolya, I open, Perf. av-iay-a (intrans. I stand open) and av-iax-a (transit. I have opened). 2. The aspirated form of the Perfect, contrary to § 277, occurs. also in a number of derivative verbs : StemdXXay, dXXdo-cro), / change, from aXXos, Perf. r/'Wax-a. § 280. 2. The Weak Perfect (Fiest Perfect) is formed from the Stem by the insertion of k : Stem \v,. Xe-\v-K-a. The Weak Perfect is the more recent form, and with all Vowel-Stems it is the only one in use, while it is the more common with Stems ending in t, 8, 0, and those in \ fi, v, p. Ohs. — The only complete Strong Perfect of a Vowel-Stem in Attic prose is dxijKoa (§ 275, 1) ; but comp. § 317, § 281. In regard to the vowel the Weak Perfect foUowa the cr Future (§§ 260^,261^ :^t^m^ a, Bpd.a,, Si-Bpa-m ^ § 283. THE PLUPEEPECT ACTIVE. 159^ Stem Ttfia, Tifjurjcreo, rerifirjKa; Stem -rrXv, irXevaeo, ire* ifXevKa; Stem ttiO (nTeiOa), I persuade), ireiafo, "TriireiKa. yeco, I pour, Perf. Keyptca, is an exception (§ 265). For other exceptions see § 301. Stems in t, S, 6, throw out these consonants before a without any other change : Stem KOfiiS, KOfii^as, I carry, KeKOIXlKU. § 282. The monosyllabic Stems in \, v, p, having t in the Stem syllable, change this e in the Weak Perf. into a: Stem o-rcX, cTTiKXco, I send, Perf. e-o-ToX-Ko; Stem 6ep, (jidelpa, I destroy,. Perf. ?-(j)dap-Ka. Several in v throw out the v : Stem KpXv^ Kpiva, I judge, Perf. Ke-Kpi-KO ; Stem kXXv, kXIvco, I incline, Perf. Ke'-xXi-Ka; Stem nXvv, liKvvay, IwasTi, Perf. vi-nXv-Ka; Stent rev, Tfiva, I stretch, Perf. Te-rd-Ka. Wherever v is not thrown out before k, it becomes according to § 51 a nasal y : Stem ipav, cf)alvco, I show, Perf. ni-fpay-Ka. Other Stems of this kind and some in p. admit of metathesis (§ 59): Stem ^aX, jSaXXm, I throw, Perf. fie-^Xri-K-a ; Stem Kap, Kdpva, I grow tired, Perf. 6apKa, e^Oapfiai; Stem /3aX, /Se/SXij/ca, ^i^rj/j-ai. The verbs Tpecpeo, I nourish, Tpeirai, 1 turn, and aTpiaa--iji.ai from the Stem (pat/); OTrivha, I offer a libation, Fut. (nreicro, has etnTeurjiai. 2. Before a- every guttural becomes k, and this with o- becomes ^ : iri-irke^ai „ labial „ n „ „ „ „ i^: ye-ypa^ai „ dental is thrown out Tre-Treicrai 3. Before t every guttural becomes k : W-jrXfKi-ai ; Stem Xey, Xe-Xex-rat „ labial ,, tt : ye-ypan-Tai „ dent, (except v) „ (7 : jrc-7r«(r-Tai (Stem (^ay, 5re'-<^ai'-Tat) 4. The o- of a-9 after consonants (§ 61) is dropped, and then every guttural becomes x • ni-TrKex-Bov for Tre-TrXe/e-o-^ov ,, labial „ <^ : ye-ypa(p-6c for ye-ypa(p-(rde „ dent, (except v) „ cr : 7r€-7re7a-dai for 7re-irei6-ir6ai. V, A., and /> remain imchanged before the ^ which has arisen from a-6: Stem d)aj', ireifxivdai ; Stem § 287. The ending j/rat of the 3 Plur. is irreconcile- able with Consonantal-Stems. Sometimes the Ionic § 287. Dialects. — In the Ion. dial, the forms arm and arc for the 3 Plur. are common : Horn, has ^e-^XTi-arai, OaXXm, I throw), neTro- •njaro (jroTaopai, I flatter), teSaiarac (data), I divide), epxarai, tepXaro (eipya, I shut in, § 319, 15) ; in New-Ion. irapeaKevdSaTo (jrapao-Kcudfa, I prepare), KeKoa-fjiiaTai. (K.oap.ia>, I adorn). Three Horn, forms insert 8 : cppd-S-arai (paiva, I besprinkle), diaix^-6-aTo (axm-iuu, I am grieved), i\riXd-8-aTo (Stem c'Xa, e\avv(o, I drive); tpripeSarai from ipeiSa, I support, is irregular. Digitized by Microsoft® M 162 V. THE PEEFECT-STEM. §288. UTM takes its place (§ 226, D), before which 7, k, /3, and IT are aspirated : '^e-'^pai^-wrai, TerTay^arai, (Stem ra^, Toaaa, I arrange), Te-Tpi^arai, (Stem rpt^, rpi^a), I ruh). But the common practice is to use the periphrasis by means of the Participle with el-cri(v) : yeypaf/./iivoi elaLv. Comp. Lat. scripti sunt and § 276, Ohs The following paradigms supply examples of the above-mentioned changes. Perfect Middle and Passive. Guttural Stems. Dental Stems. Labial Stems. ne-Trkey-jiat. Tre-TrXfK-rat 7rc-jrXe;(-5e 7re-7rKey~^£U0t ela-i 7re-7reio-/xaj ne-TTSLO-ai 7!-€-7r€l, I touch. Others fluctuate : icXeim or /cXjim, I close; Kpova, I push. § 289. The Subjunctive and Optative are generally formed by periphrasis with the Participle and the corresponding forms of elliL (Comp. Lat. solutus sim, essem.) These moods are but rarely evolved out of Vowel-Stems themselves : KTaofuu, I acquire, Ke-Krri-pai, Subj. Kf-KTa-pju, Kc-Krfj, Ke-KTrj-rai, Opt. Ke-KTpeda (New-Ion. pepveiipxBa) ; Opt. p^fiv^fuiv ; 3 Sing. XfXiTo, 3 Plur. X(\vvto, instead of XeKv-i-ro, XfKv-i-vro, 5 28 Digitized by Microsoft® ' '' §291 THE FUTCKE PEEFECT, 163 § 290. 4. The Pluperfect Middle and Pasdve differs in every verb from the corresponding Perfect only by the addition of the Augment and the personal endings which are those of the historical tenses. Ee- specting the 3 Plur. in vto and ara, and their places being supplied by periphrasis, see § 287, which is here applicable also. § 291. 5. The Future Perfect or Futurum Fxaetum adds (j>aveir]-v 1 appeared €'av^-s . (j)aueiri-s *-X3 i~dvr) 4""'S > (jiaveirj i-<^dvri~TOV a (ftavrj-Tov n (jyaveiTj-TOV 01* (^ai/ei7 ^ €~(l>avr)-rr)v ^ <^avj}~TOV o cl>aveLr]-Trjv or aveir)-Te or (pavelre €~(j)dvr)-aav (^avS>-cri(y) dvr)-6t Inf. avri-vai Part. (paveis, (fiavdcra, (j)a; o (jyavTi'Tco Gen. ^avi-vT-os '+3 (pdvrj-Tov cS (j^avq-Toyv s r— 1 (f>dvq~T€ (j>av7)-Tave-VT(ov 2.- -Strong or Second Future Passive. lud. (jyavq-crofiat s Opt. Inf. dvc-v ; rpaipe-v = erpd(j)rja-ai from rpe^a. The Ionic dial, leaves the e in the Subj. uncontracted fiXye-a (fii'o-yo), 1 mix). Homer often lengthens the e in the Subj, sometimes to ft : 8a/iei-a,v5) ; in the Optative the e com- bined with the modal sign tiy becomes etij : j>ave-ir]-v. The Infinitive always has the circumflex on the penul- tima, and the Participle in the Nom. Siiag. Masc. the acute on the last. § 294. The Strong Passive Stem, just like the Strong Aorist Active and Middle (§ 256), is formed very rarely from derivative Stems, but it occurs in verbs of all classes, even the first (§ 247), e being added to the Pure Verbal-Stem : Pros. pd-nT-co (class 3, 1 sew), Pure Stem pa^, Strong Passive Stem pa^e, Aor. Pass, ippdiprj-v ; a- (class 1), Strong Pass. Stem ypdcjje, Aor. Pass, eypd^-v. The Strong Passive Aor. occurs only in such verbs as have no Strong Active Aorist. The only exception is rpe-n-co, I turn, Aor. Act. e-rpaw-o-v, Pass. i-Tpdirrf-v. Obs. — By way of exception ^XXdyiji' is formed from tlie derivative Stem aWay, Pres. oKKda'aa, I change, § 295. As in the Strong Aorist Active (§ 257) the e is sometimes changed into d: Kkeir-r-w, I steal, i-Kkd-mj-v; cneWco, I send, i-crrdXi^v; rpecfi-o), I nourish, i-rpdcjyri-v; irkeK-co, I twist, i-7rXeKr]-v and i-TrXdKrj-v ; irXrja-aco, I and sometimes to ij : avri-ij = (j)av^. In the Dual and Plur. the modal vowel is shortened where this lengthening of the e occurs : Saiiel-ere (for Sa/xcT/Tf, Att. Sa/i^Tc). In the Infinitive we find the Hom. fuvat or /jtev : /iiyriiieuai, Safajfiev, § 295. Dialects. — Homer here also employs metathesis (§ 59) as in the Strong Aor. Act. and Mid. (§ 257, D.) : Pres. ripv-a, I de- light, Aor. Pass. i-Ta.(mt)-v, Subj. rpaire-a, 1 Plur. Tpairetonev (gatt' deamus). Inf. Tpanrj-nevai. Digitized by Microsoft® 166 Vri. THE -WEAK PASSIVE STEM. § 29C striJce', has i-vXij'Y'jrv, TrKrjy^-tTOfjMi, but ia compositioi e^-e-TTkop/rj-Vi eK-irXary^-^'o/iat ; the Ptire Stem of verbi of the second class here reappears : cr??7r-(» (Stem o-utt I corrupt), e-(7d-jrt)-v ; tij/c-o) (Stem xa k, I melt), i-rdKrj-v pea (Stem: pi), I flow), e-ppwj-v, pvi]-a-o/j,ai. VII. — The Weak Passive Stem. § 296.. From the Weak Passive Stem are formed the Weak or Ftrdt Aorist and the Weak or First Futur Passive, Pres-. Xvm, Stem \v. Weak Passive Stem \v6e. l.^—Weah or First Aorist Passive. Ind: i-\i6r]-v I was loosed e-Xvdrj-s Sub. \v6Si \v6rj-S Opt. Xydeirj-v etc., like- the Strong or Second Aorist Passive. Imp. Xu^j;-Ti "Kvdrj-Ta Inf. \v6rj-vai, etc.,, like the Strong or Second Aorist Passive. Part, \v6ei-s, \v6£laiva>, I appear") into a, (badvdnv. ^ ^^ ^ Digitized by Microsoft® $299. VII. THE WEAK PASSIVE STEM. 167 § 298. The Weak Passive Stem is formed from the Verbal-Stem hy appending the syllable ^e. Before this syllable the vowels of Vowel-Stems are lengthened as ia the Future, the Weak Aorist Active, and the Per- fect: Tifjba, eTCfMJdTjV, "Tret pa, eTreipdOrjv, J tried. As to the exceptions see § 301. As in the Perfect Middle, o- is inserted before 6, especially after short vowels, but often also after long ones : e-TeKk-cr-dtiv from reKeo), I complete; i-KeXev-a-Onjv, from KeXevco, I order; and this is the case in the verbs mentioned in § 288, and especially in yeXda), I laugh, iyeXdadriv; Spaa, I do, iSpdadTjv; iravw, I cause to cease, eTravadrjv, but also iiravdrjv. The Aor. Passive of a-aitfo, I save, on the other hand, is formed from the shorter Stem am without the o- : icr(io6rjv. As in the Weak Perfect Active and the Perfect Middle, the e before X, v, p is sometimes changed into a: Stem rev (relvo}, I stretch), i-TdOrj-v (comp. § 282). The changes of the consonants before d are explained by the laws of sound (§ 45): Stem Trpdy, irpdaa-w, I do, i-Trpd'^-6rj-v ; Stem 'yfrevB, ifrevSco, J deceive, €-^evcr-0r]-v; Stem Trefiv, irepm-cc, I send, e-7rifj,(p-6r]-v. — Eespecting idpi(p6r]v (Pres. Tjoe^w), i6d. I slacken Fut. ^aXao-o), Aor. Pass. exoKda-Brjv. oiS/o/uu, I dread. Fut. albetrofiai. Aor. Pass. ^8e, Aor. Act. ^pKea-a. <^', I plough. Fut. dp6, Aor. Act. rjpoaa, Aor. Pass. ripSBrjv. apiof. I draw. Fut. dpvaa. Aor. Act. ijpv, I offer, Put. (9c'o-(o, Aot. Mt.Wva-a, ^ Perf. Act. TtBvm, Aor. Pass. iTv6t]v, Perf. Mid. riBviiai. Xva, I loose. Put. Xva-co, Aor. Act. ekva-a, Perf. Act. XeXvKo, Aor. Pass. ekvBrjv, Verb. Adj. \vt6s, Perf. Mid. Xikvuai. 3. TAe wwe? IS short in the Future and Weak Aorist Active and Middle, but lorig in the Perfect, Aorist Passive, and Verbal Adjective of KaXico, I call, KoXiaa, KeK\7)Ka, eicKrj6r)v, kXtjto'? ; alvea>, I praise, has alvkaw, ijveKa, rjveOriv, alveToi;, but Perf. Mid. rjvr^ixM. 4. iroOea, I long for ; irovem, I toil ; and hva, I sink, fluctuate between the short and long vowels : •woOeaoixaii and iroOrjcroi ; •jroveaw, iTrovija-d/j.rjv ; Boa-co, Aor. Pass. Chap. XL — Second Peincipal Conjugation or Yerbs in fii. Peeliminaey Obseevations. § 302. The Second Principal Conjugation differs from the First only in the inflexion of the Present and Strong Aorist-Stems, and in the case of a few verbs also in the Perfect and Pluperfect Active. The special terminations of this conjugation are : 1. The 1 Sing. Pres. Ind. Act. retains the ancient /xt: (prj-iii, I say (§ 226). 2. „ 3 „ ,, „ „ ,, „ ,, <'■'(»') (for ri) : r,a-t(v) (§ 226). 3. „ 3 Plur. „ „ „ inserts the vowel a before the § 302. Dialects. — The Horn, dialect often has the ending ada in the 2 Sing. Ind. Act. : rlBi^-arda, tliou puttest ; e-^i;-o-5a,— and jievai or fiev instead of vai in the Inf. : (pd-fievm, t^a-fiiv ; and a short v instead of the (rav of the 3 Plur. of the Preterite : €-cj)a-v. The Horn, dialect sometimes lengthens the Stem-vowel in the Subj. and shortens the Modal- vowel as in the Aor. Pass. (§ 298): 'zoiifu=:'ta>iJ,ev (eamus). Digitized by Microsoft® § 304. SECOND PEINCIPAL CONJUGATION. 171 .termination a-i. (for vrt) (§ 226, comp. Dial.), and this a is lengthened by compensation (i-ddai(y), 4. In the Optative it] (tf, i), the Modal-sign attaches itself directly to the Stem : (jia-trj-v ; comp. § 293. 5. The 2 Sing. Imperat, has the ending 6i : (j>d-6i, 1 „ pqo 6. The Infinit. has the ending vm : tpd-vm > 7. The 3 Plur. of the Preterite has a-av : e-^''-o-a>/ (3 Plnr. Imperf.) All terminations of these two tenses are appended to the Stem without a connecting vowel: ^a-jxev (comp. Ttfia-o-jMev), ^a-Tco (comp. Tifia-e-TO)) ; in the Participle also vT attaches itself directly to the Stem : ^ a-v t, of which the Nom. is formed by the addition of a : d-fiev, e-(pT]-v, Dual, e-^d-rov [e-Orj-v, J placed]; Plur. e-Oe-ftev; SeUvv-fii, I shmv, Plur. SeiKvv- /Mev. Ohs. — Those forms which always have the vowel long are specially noticed below. § 304. AU verbs in fit are divided into 2 classes : 1. Those which in the Present join their terminations directly to the Stem : ^-fii; 2. Those which form the Present-Stem by adding vv to the Pure Stem : hei/c-vv-fjn,, I show, Pure Stem, S e s «, Present-Stem, BeiKvv, Digitized by Microsoft® 172 FIEST CLASS OF VEEBS IN /it. 130 I. — FiEST Class of Veebs in fu. §§ 305 and 306. The Paradigms of this Class of Vert are inserted on p. 124, fol. § 307. Some few forms of the Verbs in fu are forme §§ 305, 306. Dialects, — The following are Ionic secondary form those enclosed in brackets helng the New-Ionic. Active. 2. Sing. Pres. Ind. TL-Brj-a-da bi-hoi-aBa also hi-hoi-s 3. „ ,, ,, Tl-6fi Si-SoI [t-OTo] 3. Plur. ,, ,, Ti-6€'L(n(v') 8i-Sov(ri{v) \^i-(rTc-a(rt(v)\ also (^7rpo)6€ov(ri(v) 2. Sing. Pres. Imperat. Si-Sa-ei (meyi-ara Inf. Pres. Ti.-6t}p.e-vai hi-Zo-jxev dt-dovvai Imperf. 1 Sing. y-n-Be-a'] [e-Si-Sov-v] 3 „ [e-Ti-de-e] Middle. S. PI. Pres. Ind. [ri-Bi-arai Si-So-arai. -,, „ Imperf. „ Pres, Part. n-6fj-jicvos Active. ■2. Aor. Ind. 3 PI. „ Subj. 1 Sing, deia [Bio] 3. >j 2 „ Beirjs or Brjrjs Sms « )> 3 „ Belli Smin(v) or „ „ 2 D. ['-<7Ta] i-crre-aTcu] [i-ore-aro] earav etTTaaav OTTjTJS 3J )J „ Inf. „ Ind. „ Subj. „ Imper arficTov (§ 302 D.; oTctajLiep or (TTeiOfiet/ 1 PI. Becofiev or Smoiiev Belofiey "* » Sa)(0(rt(i') ^ Bifievai, Bffiev Sofnevai. dofiev oTrjjifva. Middle, iBeo, i'Bfv (§ 37, D. 1) [Herod. TrposB^Kavroj [Beafiai] Belo/iai Beo, Bev, Digitized by Microsoft® §308. FIEST CLASS OP VEKBS IN fll. 173 after the First Principal Conjugation, as e. g., the 2 Sing. Imperf. eVi^et?, the 3 Sing, hldei, as if from the Stem Tt,6e. In the Imperf. the forms iSiSovv, iSiSov;, iSiSov are the only ones in use from the Stem BtSo; they are formed in the same manner as those of contracted verbs (§ 243). Other similar forms will be noticed in treating of the separate verbs. In the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. contraction is sometimes employed : Ti6ei Mid. iBefirjv edrjKa Opt. eeiT^v Subj. BSijiai edrjKas Imp. 6es &c. e6i)Ke(y) Inf. deivai i'dfTOV Part, dels eBiTTfV edepev (seldom edrjKaiiev) i'Oere ( )» idrjKare^ edea-av ( It edrjKav). § 311. 2. The rough breathing instead of the o- of th Stem o-Ta is also used in the Perf. (§ 60 b) : e-crTi}-Ki for ae-a-Trj-Ka. On the shorter forms : earajjuev, &c., se § 317, 4. kaTrj^oa, I shall stand, is a, Third Future Active The Perfects oi 0e and e are rideiKa, el/ca; the sam vowel also remains in the Perf. Mid. Tedec/u,ai,, elfjiai. Th Stems So and err a leave their vowel sho-rt in the Per § 310. Dialects. — From the Stem So Horn, has sometimes Pu SL-Sa-cra instead of Ba>. Digitized by Microsoft® §312. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN jJii. 175 Mid. and Aor. Pass., and ^e in 'the Aor. Pass. : Be-Bo-fiai, iSoOfjv, ecTTddrjv, iTeBrjv, redriaofiai. On the meaning of the different forms of u7tij/ii, see § 329, 1. § 312. To the First Class of the Verbs in /i t there also belong : A) Verbs whose Stem ends in a (comp. La-Trjfu) : 1. ^-/At (comp. Lat. d-io), I say, only in the Impf. ^v, 8 Sing. 7i (comp. § 213, Ohs.). 2. o-vlrV7]-iJLi (Stem o 1/ a, § 308), Ihenefit, Mid. ovivafiai (§ 309), I have advantage, Strong Aor. Mid. mvij/Mjv, &vria.9c ; comp. i^aanca, § 324, 8. 6. ')(pri (Stem %/3a, XP^) "^^ must, Subj. xpfl. Opt. XpeiT], Inf. ^pfjvat. Part. 'xpeoDv (only Neut. from Xpaov, according to § 37 D.). Impf. ixpv^ or XPV^' Fut. 'XPW^''i — a.'jTO'xpVt ^t suffices, also 3 Plur. airo- Xpa)a-i(v), &c., as above airoxpaw. 7. Ki-^ij-fiL (Stem %/5a, § 308), Ilend, Inf. Kixpd- vai, Fut. XPV<^^> -^0^^- e%/3i7iei and ^i^iet (al7i/j,i, I send away). Comp. § 240. Aor. rf-K-a, riK(K, '^Ke(v), elrov, e'irrjv, elfiev, etre, elcrav. Subj. &, Opt. etT?!/, Imperat. e?, Inf. eti/at, Part. et? (Stem ivr). On this Aor. comp. § 310. Put. ^a-cD, Perf. el-K-a. Mid. Pres. '{re- jmu, I hasten, strive, Subj. la/iai, Ifj, &c.. Opt. teZ/ii;!/ (additional form, lOL/Mrjv), Imperat. tWo, or Ebi;, Imperf. t-e/irjv. Aor. ei/iT?!', elo-o, elro, Subj. &fiai,, Opt. 6i/ii;j; (additional form, o"fj/rjv). Ohs. — The et of the Ind. et-jaiji', is caused by the Augment (§ 236), that of the Opt. by the Mood-sign (§ 302, 4). § 313. Dialects.—!. Horn. 2 and 3 Sing. Pres. his, lei ; 3 Plur. ieiiTi(v) ; 1 Sing. Impf. leiv, leis, lei ; 3 Plur. iev, 3 Sing. Subj. "rj(n(y') ; Inf. Ufievai ; Aor. Act. eijKa ; 3 Plur. ea-av ; Subj. eia ; Aor. Mid. 3 Plur. ej/ro. 2. Put. ^o-ca and (dv)€a-ai [Herod. fiefieTijiivos as a Part. Perf. of lj.eTiT]iu=iie6iTjni, § 52, D., as if from fiCTia with irregular reduplica- tion]. Moreover : 3. Stem a(f)e, Pres. aijjut, J iZoto, 2 Dual ajjToi/, 3 Sing. Impf. 017 and aei, Inf. dijvai and dij/ievai. Part. Aor. Nom. Plur. aevres, Mid. 4. Stem 8 1 e, (eV) BUa-av, they frightened, hUvrai, they flee. Opt. Stotro. 5. Stem bi^e, Si^Tjfiai, additional form, Sifm, Iseeh, 2 Sing. hi(riai. Inf. 8i^Tja-6ai, Put. Si^rjiroiiai. 6. Pres. Kixifu (comp. § 322, 18) J obtain, Subj. Kix^ia, Opt.. Kixfi^v, Inf. Ki^rivai, Part, kix^'ls. Mid. Kip^^/iEvoj. Impf. 2 Sing. ^'«'X^i5,^f,fiTi/»T3lb«® 178 FIEST CLASS OF VEKBS IN fll. § 314 Fut. rfcroimt,, Perf. el-iiai, Plup. eC-fi'qv. Aon Pass. e'lOi^v, Subj. eOm. Fut. idi^aofiai. Yerb. Adj. ero?, erio?. 2. SI-St]-/!,!, (Stem Se), I bind, a rare additional font of S^-Q, (§ 244, 1). § 314. C) Verbs wbose Stem ends in t : 1. el-jii (Stem I, Lat. t-re), I go. Pres. Ind, ct-^i l'-/»cv Subj. i-ta t-js etc. ei t-Toy T-Tf Opt. i-oii)v l'-o(j etc. er-(7i(>') i-Tov i-acri(v) Imperat. t-Bi i-rco etc. 3 Plur. l~6pra)v or i-raa-av Inf. l-i-vM Part. i-a)>', t-oSo-a, i-di' (Gen. i^wr-os, comp. Lat Impf. jyeiv or ,^a ^eifiev or ,17/xew _^'eiy „ ijeicrBa ^eiTov, tjtov, ffecre „ tjts Ijei ,, ^eiv rjeiTijv, h'tiji' rjeirav Verbal Adj. tro?, tVeo? (additional form iTrjTeov, it ii necessary to go). Obs. — The Present, especially in the Indicative, has a Futun meaning ; the Imperfect has the endings of a Pluperfect, ^ ii produced by the Augment preceding c (. 2. Kel-fiai (Stem xei), I Me, has the inflexion of i Perfect. 2 Sing. xel-aM, 3 Plur. Keivrat, Subj. 3 Sing KerjTai, Opt. KeoiTo, Imperat. kqIcto, Inf. KelaOai, Part Keifievo^ ; the compound TrapaKeifMao, Inf. irapaiceicrOai (Comp. fifj^ai, § 315, 2). § 314. Dialects.— 1. Stem I, 2 Sing. Pres. Ind. tltrBa, Subj. '!.riepTe=(l>€peTe, Iring [Lat./crfe]. Digitized by Microsoft® 180 FIKST CLASS OF VERBS IN fXl. § 31( lirjv for ia-~irjv, as the Inf. ctvai for id-vai ; &v for iav (Horn from itT-av. In the Impf. the Dual has most fully preserve the (T. 05s. 2. — dfi.1 is enclitic in the Pres. Ind. except the 2 Sing, i (comp. § 92, 3) ; tori is paroiytone when it denotes existenc or means the same as c|foTi "it is possible," as well as at th heginning of a sentence and after the particles oi, jiij, €i, mj Kal: ear I 6eos, there is a God; ovk ean, it is not joossibli When merely external causes prevent it from heing encliti (§ 93, c), ea-Ti(v) is oxytone : (piKos icrrlv f'/xoC, he is myfriena Ohs. 3. — In the compounds of elfii the accent remains on tli Stem-syllable ; e.g. in the Imperf. Trapijv, in the Suhj. and Opt ottS, ajrelev, in the Inf. and Part, direivai, irapoyv, in the 3 Sing Fut. napeo'Tai. 2. rjfiat (Stem 17?), J sit, has, like xeifiai, the in flexion of a Perfect. Pres. ^/iat rjfiedov ?j0dv{0, I anticipate, Inf. 8. e-irpid-ij,r]v (Stem Trpia), Thought, Imperat. irpiw. Stems in e. 9. e-a^Tf-v (Stem cr/3e), Pres. a^ivvvfii, I quench, § 319, 7, Inf. <7/3^i/at. 10. eraickrj-v (Stem cr/eXe), Pres. o-«eXX&), I dry. Inf. o-zcXiji/at. 11. Imperat cr;i^e-?, from 6ea>iiev. 12. ;}X(ax, Subj., liXcia. Opt. 3 Sing. dXoij;, Inf. dXto^Ecat. Digitized by Microsoft® 182 FIEST CLASS OF VERBS IN /Ml. § 31f 14. e->yvai-v (Stem yvco), Pres. yi-yvai-a-Ka), J come t Mow (§ 324, 14), Opt. ryvol-nv, Imperat. 7i'w6't, Id ryvavai. Part. 71/0V9. Stems in t. 15. Imperat. -Tri-di, (Stem iri), Pres. ttIvco, I drink 1 Sing. Aor. Ind. emov (§ 321, 4). Sterna in v. 16. e'-Su-i' (Stem Bv), Pres. 8i5ft), / diVe, Imperat. S£)^« Inf. Bvvac, Part. 809. As to its meaning see § 329, 4. 17. e-^v-v (Stem vvai. Dialects- — 14. Subj. -jv&kh. Inf. yvaiievai. 15. Imperat. n-iV. 16. 3 Pliir. cSu-i-, Subj. Stfo), Sr^j, 3 Sing. Opt. Sst] (from Su-i'i)] Inf. Sviiev. 17. 3 Plur. c<^t;i/. Besides these the following are peculiar to the Ep. Dial. : — 18. Part, anovpas, Pres. diravpawj I take away. 19. Stem jSXi;, Pres. /SaXXm, I throw, 3 Dual, ^h^Xtjttjv (me together), Fut. ^vp^Xfjo-ojiai, Mid. e/SXT/ro (■was At*, § 255, D. 2]) Subj. /3X^-€-Tai, 2 Sing. Opt. ;8Xcio, Inf. ^ijcrBai, Part. /SXij/ievo (All!). 20. Stem out a, Pres. oiram, I wound, 3 Sing. oStS, Inf. oirofit vat, Part. Mid. ovrajievos (wounded'). Verb. Adj. oCrarof. 21. Stem Trra, Pres. n-Tijo-a-m, J sioop, 2 Dual, c-jjt^-ttjj', Part Perf. 5rfnT7)o)r. 22. Stem ttXo, Pres. jreXafm, I approach, Aor. Mid. irX^ro. 23. Stem /Spa, Pres. jSt-^pti-o-Kw, i ea« (§ 324, 13), Aor. tfipav. 24. Stem n-Xa), Pres. ttXcoco, / sa»7, 2 Sing. Aor. en-Xmr, Part. TrXm-s 25. Stem kti, Pres. Kn'fw, I found. Part. Aor. Mid. iv-Kri-jj-evo (well-founded). 26. Stem qbfli, Pres. (pdivm, I waste away, Subj. Aor. Mid. 05ie Toi, Opt. (pdlii-qv, (J)61to, Inf. (j)dl(Tdai, Part. <^6lfiiVos. 27. Stem kXv, Pres. kXuib, I Jiear, Imperat. Aor. kXC^i or KexXB^i jcXCre or (ce/tXi/TE. 28. Stem Xu, Pres. Xiim, i Zoose, Aor. Mid. Xvp-riv, Xuto or XCro. 29. Stem nvv, Pres. Trvim, I ireathe, Aor. Mid. ap.vvvTO (he n covered ireath). 30. Stem s, ea"reS(ra]. 5. Sfi'Sea, Sei'dtju.fi', Imperat. SeiSiOi, 1 Sing. Perf. also Sei'SoiKo, Aor. tfideio-a (comp. § 77, D.). 6. 1 Plur. U-ficv [Her. and sometimes also in Att. writers o'Ba/iev, 3 Plur. oiSao-i] Subj. eiSem or ISea, Plur. eiSofifv, fiSfrf, Inf. i8;teK{ai), Fem. Part. JSuIa, Plup. [^Sra] ^fi'S^y, J'SfeCv) or ^ci'Sj; [2 Plur. sSeWe], 3 Plur. 'Uav, Fut. elSriaw. Digitized by Microsoft® §318. SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN fit. 185 Ohs. — Besides ola-Qa we rarely have oZSas, more frequently xi&eis, fl&Tjs, together with ySeitrda, and nSe/iei', JSere instead of pci/ifi/, fjSeiTe, 7. Stem Ik, only in the Perf. eotKa I resemble, appear, 1 Plur. poet, eoiyfiev, 3 Plur. quite irregularly el'^a- a-i(v) (comp. icraa-i). Inf. elKevai (poet, with ioiKevai), Part. eiKm^ (with eoiKms), elKvXa, cIko^, Plup. imaetv. 8. Stem Kpay, Pres. Kpd^w, I cry, Perf. KeKpar/a, Im- perat. Ki-Kpa^-di,. n. — Second Class of Verbs in /i^i. § 318. 1. The Second Class of the Verbs in /i t belongs to this conjugation only in regard to the inflexion of Dialects. — 7. Impf. eote [Her. oiko, oikms], Dual t'iinTov, 3 Dual Plup. itnTTiv, 3 Sing. Plup. Mid. ij'iKTo or ci'KTo. Besides : 9. Stem fia, 2 Dual Perf. /uftaTov, strive, jifjiajiev, fiifmre, /leimda-i, Imperat. ji,eiw.Ta>, Part, /j-efiaais, v'ta, 6s, Gen. aros, 3 Plur. Plup. fieiiatrav, 10. Stem rXa, Perf. TcrKriKa, I am patient, 1 Plur. TerKafiev, Opt. TfrXairjv, Imperat. TtrkSBi, Inf. TeTXa/iEy(at), Part. rcTkrias, rjvla. Gen. TerXiydroy. 11. Stem dvay, Perf. avayya, I command, 1 Plur. avayfieu, Imperat. avaxOi, 3 Sing. ai/caxSa, 2 Plur. S.va-)(6e, Plup. ^i/iiyea. 12. Stem iyep, Perf. eyp-riyop-a, I am awake, 2 Plur. Imperat. iyprjyopBf, 3 Plur. Ind. iyprfyopdaorify") . 13. stem e\u5, Perf. «X^Xou5a, Ihave come, 1 Plur. eiXi^Xou- 6nev. 14. Stem TTcvd, Perf. ireirovBa (Pres. 7rdo-xs. Gen. PePparos. 17. Stem n-Tf, vra (mirrcn, I fall, § 327, 15), Perf. TreVrcoKa, Part. Gen. jreirTfrnros, Nom. TrfTrnor. §318. Dialects. — Ion. 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Act. -Co-i(i') together with -va, Aor. eKprjcra. 2. Fut. Kp€ii6a,, Kpepaas (§ 243 D), Digitized by Microsoft® §319. SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN /it. 187 Siems in e. Ohs. — Several of these Stems originally ended inr. 5. evvvfii (Stem originally hs, comp.Lat. ves-tis) I clothe, (only diupt-evwiu is in use) diKpi-S> (§ 263) Fut. Mid. dfi(l>i-€a'ofiai rjficjiUtTiiai Aor. ^fi^i'-eo-o (§ 240) Inf. Aor. Mid. imfo-aa-Bai, 6. Kopevvvfii (Stem Kopi) I satisfy iKopeira eKopeaBriv KSKopetTfiai 7. a^ivuvpi (Stem crfie), 1 quench jv o I transiijive ca-pea-a ) (§ 316, 9) I intransitive (§ 329, 5) Fut. trliTjaofiat J 8. pay), also (fidpympt, and aoc. to Class 4, a, (f>pa, Opt. Ki-oi-fu, Part. Ki-av. 35. Ttvup.1., Tlvvp-ai, additional form of TiVm, § 321, D. 5. 36. opiyvvp-i, additional form of opiya, I stretch out, 3 PI. Perf. Mid. opapexarai (§ 287). 37. '6pvvp.i. (Stem op), I excite, Fut. opa-a, Aor. apopov (§ 257, D.), Perf. opapa (§ 275, 1), I have arisen [Lat. or-ior'], Aor. Mid. 3 Sing, SipTo, arose (§ 316, 38), Perf. Mid. 3 Sing. Ind. opap-e-rai, Subj. ipaiprjTai,, with Imperf. Mid. opeovTO. 38. Tavvfjuu with Tavia, relva, I extena, stretch,. Digitized by Microsoft® 190 FIFTH OK NASAL CLASS, §321, (Mid.) added to a tense denotes that in addition to the Active^ the corresponding Middle form is also in use, e. g. in addition to eno-a (No. 5), eTiaajirjv also is used. Fifth or Nasal Class. § 321. The Verbal-Stem is strengthened by the addition of k or of a syllable containing v to form the Present-Stem. a) V alone, often united with lengthening of the vowel, is added to the following Stems : 1. Stem ^a, Pres. ^alva, I go Aor. Act. Put. Perf. Pass. ?-/37,-v (§ 316, 1) )3^<7o/iaj jSe'/S)?™ (§ 317, 1) ?/37)-(7a i3>56ava, I anticipate (e-05?)-!' (§316, 7) i^Brja-ofmi 'i(p6a.Ka ie- 6 1, Pres. cjidtv a, I perish, waste away e-, I bite i-&aK-o-v Sijlofiai Be'Srjxa €&rix6r]V § 321. Dialects.— 1. Aor. Mid. i^f,a-€To, § 268, D. 2. Pres. eXao), Put. eXo'to, eXaas, § 243, D., Aor. eXao-(ra, Mid. TJKaetTO, § 316, D. 26 ; with Pres. (pdivvBa. 7. Aor. Mid. f'Suo-ero, § 268, D. [Pres. eVSuyeco, I put on. Compi § 323]. Digitized by Microsoft® § 322. FIFTH OE NASAL CLASS. 191 9. Stem Kofi, Tree. Kajxpa, I weary e-KUfi-o-v Kafuivjuu KeKjj-rjKa (§ 282) 10. Stem Tffi, Pres. refivo, I cut c-refi-o-v (fTCLjiov) Tefiai TeTfiqKa (§ 282) iTiiTjBrjV § 322. 5) The syllable aK is added to the following Stems : 11. Stem al(rd, Pres, aio-fl-av-o-fiat, I perceive ^a9-6-fir]v ai(r6-rj-(roji,ai rjaO-rj-iiai 12. Stem djiapr, Pres. cLjiapr-av-to, I err, sin tjfiafyr-o-v &iiapT-rj-(TOji,ai rjfidpT-rj-Ka ^iiapTrj-dr]V 13. Stem a i^, Pres. av ^ - dv- lo ani av^a, linorease [aug-ed] iji!|-ij-(ra av^ija-a ijv^rjKa Tiv^fi6riv ai^Tjcroiiai (Passive) 14. Stem j3X a o-T, Pres. /3X a 0-7 a 1/0), 7 5m(Z e-jSXao-T-o-y /SXacrr-^-tria c^XdaTrjKa (§ 274 exc.) 15. Stem 8ap5, Tres. Sap 6 dv a, I sleep e-8ap6-o-v Sap6-r\-crojxai deSdpBriKa 16. Steme'x^, Viea.{aTr)exddvop,ai, lamhated {drT)r]-)(6-6-p,rjV (&n)ex6-r]-(T0jUU (diryfixStjiuu 17. Stem (f, Pres. tfa»ffl and tjio, I seat myself 18. Stem 21. Stem oaffip, Pres. 6paivopai,, I smell u>(Tp-6-p,r]v oeiKa, I owe Dialects. — 9. Part. Perf. /cfKfiijms, Gen. KeKji-qaTos. 10. with Tfiriyo), Aor. Pass. 3 Plur. iTfuiyev, with Pres. Tifiei. Peculiar to the Horn, dialect are : Aor. t^d-eiy) ,Uluxit, Put. 7re-<^^ • a-ofioi, from Stem ipa, Pres. ^aiVfii ((jyaeiva), I shine, shew, Aor. Pass. (j]adv6r]U. § 322. Dialects. — 12. Aor. ijfi^poTov for fjppaTov (§ 257, D., comp. § 51, D.). 18. a(Of|» X^i/fo/iai eiXi)0a (§ 274) i\rj(j)6riv elXrjfiiiai (seldom XcXij^/xat) 26. StemXa^, Pres. Xavfla via, Jam Ai(Mera, with X^5a> (CI. 3), Mid. I forget. €-\d6-o-u X^o"Q> \e\rjda Mid. eXadofLTjv \ritjofiai, XeXrjo-fiai 27. Stem Xa;(, Pres. Xa'y;;(dj/a), I attain i'-Xd^-o-v Xfi^o/iai fiXijp^a (§ 274) fiXi^y/xat 28. Stem /xafl, Pres. fiavdava, I learn ^~fid6-o-v fiad-rj-ao^at fi€fiddi]Ka 29. Stem nild, Pres. nvv6dvojj.ai, I learn, with 7reu5o/iaj, CI. 2 i-irvB-o-fiTjv vficrofiai mirvafiai 30. Stem ri/Xi ^''^^s. Ti^yx"""*! I ^eet, with t^vx^, I prepare, CI. 2, f-Tup^-o-v Tcv^ojuu Te-rOx-1-«^ seldom rcrevxa 31. Stem (^uy, Pres. ipvyydva, I flee, with (j)evyoj (01. 2). 05s. 1. — The verhs in 23 — 31, whose Stem forms a short syllable, insert another nasal in addition to the affix a v. In ^alva (1) and oa-cppaivoiMi (21) t has crept in (<5 253), as well as in Kep- Saiva, I gain, which forms only the Perf. kckepStjko from the Stem KepSa; all the other forms are regular according to Class 4.— A large part of the verhs (No. 11-^16, 18—22, 28 and 30) form either some or all the tenses, except those of the Present-Stem, from a Stem in e (comp. helow, § 326). Ohs. 2. — The following may serve as examples of the formation of nouns : to Prj-fia, the step ; fj (fiBi-a-t-s, the consumption ; 6 /cii/t- uTo-s, the exhaustion; to X^;x-/ia, tJie assumption; ^ X^6-ij, the Dialects.— 23. Imperf. § 237, D., Aor. [caSoc] evaSov (§ 237), faS))0"Q)] eada. 25. [Her. Fut. Xd^\(Ao/iai, Perf. \eXd^j]Ka, Aor. Pass. iXafujieriv. XcXafi/xat, Verb. Adj. XafMirds.] Hom. Inf. Aor. Mid. XeKafiiadat (§ 257, D.). 26. Pres. with (KkriSdva, cause to forget, Aor. cXtjo-o and XeXdfloK (§ 257, D.), \(\ad6ij.r,v (I forgot), Perf Mid. XeXacr/xae. 27. Aor. XeXaxov, I shared with [Fut. Xd^o/iaj], Perf. XcXoy^a. 29. Aor. Opt. Tren-ufioiTO (§ 257, D.). 30. Also Tevx § 327, 6) iTretrxof"/" VTroa-x'IO'OfUU iijreVx'yf"" SO likewise aiima-xvovfiai I wear (also diiTrixoi^ai), Aor. rjiinia-xov Inf. d/nTno-x"". § 324. ^SiasiA Ctes or Inchoative Verbs. The Verbal-Stem is enlarged by affixing o-k to form the Present-Stem. This o-k is added to Vowel-Stems (exc. 21) at once, but to Consonant-Stems after the insertion of the connecting vowel i. Several of the verbs belonging to this class (Nos. 2, 6, 7, 13, 14, 16, 20) further strengthen the Present-Stem by means of a reduplication with the vowel t : ryi-ryvoo-crK-o) [Lat. (g)^w-sc-o]. § 323. Dialects. — 32. [Herod, ^ivco]. 33. "tKa, Aor. I^ov (§ 268 D.), Part. 'Ujievos, favourable (§ 316 D). 34. Kvcro'a. Moreover, (to a — c) the Verbs : 37. Stem dX IT, Pres. aKiTalvm, I sin, Aoi. ^"Xiroy, Mid. dXiVoj/ro, Part. Perf. dXiTij/ievoj, sinful. 38. Stem dX^, Pres. aXtpdva, 1 acquire, Aor. ^Xi^ov. 39. ayivea, only in Pres., I lead, with aya. 40. ipvyyava, I roar, Aor. ijpvyov, Pres. also epcvyofiai. 41. Stem x°-^j Pres. p^aySdyo), / embrace, Aor. e^aSov, Fut. X^ia-oiJMi, Perf. KexavlBngitized by Microsoft® O 194 SIXTH CLASS OE INCHOATIVE VERBS. §324,. As many of these verbs denote a beginning or coming into being, all of them are usually called Inchoatives. Stems m a. 1. Stem yripa, Pres. y.tj p a- a- k- u>, 1 grow old (seldom yripd-aj comp. sene-sc-o i-yT]pd~d-a-K-a), I say, comp. (jirj-ni, § 312^,5 9. Stem xa and x^v, Pres. xa-o-K-a, I open the month f-X^v-ov ^^av-oO/xat Ki-xr}V-a Stem in e. 10. Stem ape, Pres. dpl-a-K-m, I please ijpe-tra api-am rjpe-a-fftjv. Stems in m, 11. Stem^jm, FieB.(ava)Pia-(rK-oiiai, Irevive {dv)e-fi'm-v (§ 316, 13) §324. SIXTH CLASS OK INCHOATIVE VERBS. 195 12. Stem p\a (from fioX, § 51, D.), Pres. ^Xib-a-K-a, Igo e-fMik-ov fioX'OVfiai 13. StemjSpco, Tvea. ^L-^pa-a-K-a, I consume Be-^pa-Ka (Part, ^e^pas, § 317, D. 16) ^e-fipa-fuu 14. Stem ■)/»(», Pres. yi-yva-a-K-ai, I recognise [Lat. (jr)jio-sc-o] E-yj/to-j/ (§ 316j 14) yva-a-ofiai e-yva-Ka i-yv&-cr6i]v €-yvQ) -, Pres. dX-i'-o-K-o/iai, /am to^e» ( c-aXto-j' dXa>-iro/xat t-aXco-fca or rjkai-Ka Ip^av (§ 316, 12) (comp. § 237) 18. Stem dp.jB'K and dp,^Xa>, Pres. ap.^X-i-o'K-a, I miscarry TJp,^\c^(Ta TJfijSXa-Ka 19. Stem dva\ and dvaXu, Pres. dvdX-i-aK-a, I expend dvoKa-ira or df^Xoxra dvaka-a-a i dvaXa-Ka I dvdXa>-6r]v also r]vd\a-cra Idvrjkai-Ka \dvTJXa>-6riv. Stem in i. 20. Stem tti, Pres. m-Tvt-a-K-a, I give to drink, comp. m-v-a> § 321, 4 c-7rt-(7a TTi-aio Stems in v. 21. Stem Kv, Pres. kv-l-o-k-co, I fructify 22. Stem /xeflu, Pres. /jieBi-a-K-a, I make dnmh, Mid. 7 lecome drunk e-fieBv-aa c-fie5u-(rAji'^ 23. Stem d^TrXax, Pres. diiirXaK-i-a-K-a, Ifail rj/iirXaK-ov ajm\aK-ri-a-at 24. Stem (Jv^aip, Pres. (JiT)avp-l-(rK-oiiai, I enjoy iirrpip-oiiriv Inf. eTravp-eirBai § 324. Dialects.— 12. Perf. iii-p.-^-'Ka-Ka (comp. § 51, D. and § 282, D). 13. Aor. £-Ppa-v (§ 316, D. 23), with the Pres. /Se/SpAfl*). 15. 3. Plur. Put. Bopeovrai [with 66p-m-pM, according to § 319]. 16. "With rpa-a. 19G SIXTH CLASS '^OE INCHOATIVE VEEBS. §324, 25. Stem eip, Pres. evp-'i-a-K-o), I find eup-ov (Mid.) evp-fj-a-a evp-rj-K-a clp-e-Brfv €vp-r]-pai evp-e-6f]-iT0jiai 26. Stem o-rep, Pres. orc-p-i-o-K-cB, / deprive (with o-rcpS, Mid. (rripoiiai, I am deprived) i-a-Tcp-rj-a-a tTTep-rj-ira i-a-Tep-rj-Ka i-arep-rj-Bi^v e-CTep-rj-iiaL 27. Stem aXux, Pres. dXv-o-K-oJ, I shun rfkv^a dXv^co 28. Stem SiSax, Pres. StSa-a-K-a, I teach, £-8i8a|a fiiSa^o) fie-8iSa;(-a i-8i-8dx6riv Se-6iSay/xat 29. Stem Xok, Pres. Xq-o-k-ib, I utter, speak e-\aK-ov \aK-r]-(rop.aL j Xe-Xi)K-a €-\dK-7]-(Ta IXe-XoK-a. 05s. 1. — The last three Stems suppress a Guttural before o-k. Several of the Stems quoted form a part of the tenses by afiix- ing 6 to the Stem (comp. § 322, Ohs., and § 326), especially Nos. 23, 25, 26, 29. 06s. 2. — The following may serve as examples of the formation of nouns : 6 6dv-a-To-s, death ; to fivTj-fielo-v, the memorial ; 6 auT(5-fioX-o-s, the deserter; tj yv^-pjrj, the opinion; rj aXa-ci-s, the capture; 6 Sidda-K-ako-s (from the Present-Stem), the teacher ; fj 8180^-^ (from the Verbal-Stem), the instruction, and from Stems which are enlarged by e : to evp-rj-fm, the discovery; 17 a-Tep-tj-a-i-s, the deprivation. Dialects. — 26. Aor. a-repecrai, Part. Pass. Aor. cmpe'is. 28. [8iSacrK^o-ai] a secondary Stem is 6 a, Aor. bebaov, 1 taught (§ 326, D. 40). 29. Ion. form \r)K.la (§ 325), Fem. Part. Perf. \dka.K.via. And the Special Verbs : 30. Stem oKha, Pres. aX8ij(rK<», / become great, Aor. fjXSavov, I made great. 31. Stem kXc, Pres. kikKtio-koi, with KoKea, I call. 32. Stem ] wt-cpai-a-K-a, I slww. 33. Stem diracj) (from dcj>), Pres. dTr-a(f>-i-, I deceive, Aor. ri77a<^ov, Subj. dird^oi. 34. Stem dp, Pres. dp-ap-i-om-a), I fit, Aor. ^papov, I fitted, Perf. upr]pa, I suit, Fem. Part, dpdpma. Part. Mid. apfievos, suitable, "Weak Aor. fjpaa, I fitted, Aor. Pass. SpSrjv. 35. Stem Ik, Pres. i-t-o-K-a>, I make equal, (comp. § 317, B 7). 36. Impf. ia-K€(i/), he spoke. 37. Stem tvy (comp. § 322, 30), Pres. nrvaKouai, I aim at. agiUzed by Microsoft® '^ §325. SEVENTH OE E-CLASS. 197 § 325. Seventh or JE-dass. A short Stem alternates witli one enlarged by e. A) The enlarged Stem in e is the Present-Stem, the shorter serves to form the other tenses. 1. Stem yafi, Pres. yaij.i-6, Pres. ade-a, I push €-acra (§ 237) acrai (a>6fi(Ta Mid.) e-ai(T-pai i-axrOriv § 325. Dialects.— 1 Put. yap-ea, 3 Sing. Put. Mid. yapea-o-erai., she will marry. 3. [SoK^cfio, eSo/CT^o'aJ. 8. 3 Sing. Plup. Mid. ipipmro. Besides : o) Stem yeyau, Pres. yeymve-m, I call, Perf. yeyava, Put. ycyai'^o-a). b) Stem 8ar, Pres. hari-opm, I distribute, Put. Sda-opai, Aor. ddo'O'aTo, Perf. beSaa-TCu. c) Stem Soujr, Pres. bovni-a, I make a sound, Aor. i{y)hovm)-(Ta, Perf. Se-Sovjr-a. -ai-s or adrj-ms, pushing. § 326. B) The shorter Stem is the Present-Stem, the enlarged one in e serves to form the other tenses. 10. Stem a 1 6(f), Pres. aiS-ofiai ani alSe-oum, I am ashamed 11. Stem dXe|(c), Pres. d\ci-a, I ward off rj\e^at>.r]v aKi^-r)-(TOft,ai, 12. Stem ax6{e), Pres. axB-ojiai, I am vexed d^Be-aoiuu TjxSe-aBrjv a-)(de-a6i]tT0juu 13. Stem ^o(ric(c), Pres. jioa-K-a, I pasture jioa-KTi-a-a ; from the Stem ^o the Verb. Adj. /So-rdy 14. Stem /3ouX(e), Pres. jSouX-o/xai, 2 will (Augment § 234) )3ovX^-o-ofiat /3E-^ouX7j-/xai i-^ovXfj-drjV 15. Stem Se(e), Pres. Se-m, I need (8ei, it is necessary), Mid. Sfo/iai, I require f-Serj-ara Sfrj-a-a Se-Serj-Ka i-her)-6r)V (§ 328, 2) 16. Stem ep(e), Pres. not usual (§ 327, 13) T]p-6fiT)t/, I ashed iprj-a-opai, Inf. epeadai 17. Stem lpp(y), Pres. epp-a, 1 go away ^ppjj-cra epprj-a-a rjppr)-Ka Dialects. — g) Stem ktvtt, Pres. Krviri-a>, I ring, Aor. eicr"iT-ov. h) Pres. nU^o) and tne^i-a, I press, Aor. itrietra. i) Stem piy, Pres. piyc-a>, I shudder, Perf. eppXya. V) Stem a-Tvy, Pres. a-ruye-a, I hate, shun, Aor. etrrvyov and tTTvyrjirm, etrrv^a, I made dreadful, I) Stem 0iX, Pres. cjiiXea, Hove, Aor. 6-0rX-a-/ii)j/. m) Pres. xpo'c/^f <», ^ ^e?P, Aor. expaurp-ov. Three Verbs in am with a moveable a are here to be noticed : n) Stem yo, Pres. ■you-m, I wail, Impf. c-yo-o!'. o) Stem /la/c, Pres. pr)K6.-o-pai, I low, Perf. fU-p.riK-a, Aor. ?-;iaK-oi'. ^) Stem /iuK, Pres. iwKa-o-p/u, 1 roar, Perf. iiifivn-a, Aor. f/ilJK-OV. § 326. Dialects. — 10. ^Utraro, Imperat. mSeo-o-ai, Fut. albl-a-opm, Aor. Pass. 3 Plur. aiSeo-^eK. 11. oKdkKov (§ 257). 14. Pres. /SoXcToi, Impf. i^okovro, Perf. ^ifiovXa. 15. Aor. iSeir]a-a, once 8^X''^> comp. § 35, a) 32. Stem oiEiX(e), Pure Stem dcj)e\, Pres. 64>ei\a>, 1 owe- (§ 253, Obs.y ai(j)cK-ov [titinaTn] ocjxiXrj-cra) oi^eiXij-Ka 33. Stem 7rep6(f), Pres. irepSm €-7rapd-ov napbrj-a-o^t 7re-7rop5-a 34. Stem 7r(e)T(e), Pres. iveT-oji.ai, 1 fly (§ 61 c) 35. Stem pv(e), Pres. peca, i/ow (§ 248) £ppcv-cra (rare, § 200, 2) pvr]-tTOjxaL ippvjj-Ka ippirfv (with peiKrofiai) 36. Stem a- rt 13(e), Pres. a-T^ip-a, I tread 37. Stem rvn-i-e. Pure Stem rinr (§ 249), Pres. Tvirra, I strike €~TV7r~ov TV7rT7j-aa>, Mid. re-rujit-^at e-TV7r-rjv 38. Stem x"'pf) P^i'e Stem ;(ap, Pres. xa'P<"> -^"i'^'c^ (§258) Xaipr}- Ke-xapr]-Ka i-xip-rjv Ke-xaprj-fiaL Ohs. — The e sometimes appears in all the tenses except the Present, sometimes only in some of them ; sometimes it is added to the pure, sometimes to the strengthened Stem: jxcv-e, trTi|8-e, iff, off, TVTTTe. The formation of nouns shows the same varieties : al8fj-piov, shame-faced ; rj ^oiXrj-a-i-s, voluntas ;. Dialects. — 38. Part. Perf. KfxapT/mr, Fut. Kexapfja-o, Aor. ixvparo,, and 3 Plur. Kexapovro, § 257, I). Besides : 39. Stem d\d(e), Pres. akd-op.cu, Ilecome well, Fut. aKSfj-iropai. 40. Stem da, Aor. SeSaoi/ (§ 257, D.), I taught, Aor. Mid. InL SeSaaa-dai (to get to TcnovS), Aor. Pass. iba.T)v (1 learned'), besides Fut. 8ar](ropat, Perf. SeSdtjKa, Part. Perf. Sefiams. 41. Stem K J) 8(e), Pres. K-qB-a, I grieve, Fut. KrjSrj-a-a), Perf. ke- KJjS-a (I am concerned), Fut. KeKaSTja-opju. 42. Stem /iffi(E), Pres. ^e'S-m, I ruZc, Mid. J reflect, Fut. iifS^-0"0jLta(. 43. Stem nid, Pres. neida, I persuade, Fut. also mflijo-a, Part. Aor. TTidrjcras, 44. Stem T.op(f), Aor. '4-Top-ov and e-Topri-cra, I lored through, Fut. TfTop^-cro). 45. Stem <^tS, Pres. 0fiSofioi, J spo9-e, Aor. Mid. 77f(l>i.Sea6at (§ 257, D.), Fut. Trf(j)t8ri-a-ofiai. Digitized by Microsoft® §327. EIGHTH OK MIXED CLASS. 201 idtKri-jxav, voluntary; 6 ixaxy-Tri-s, the warrior; fj fiiWrj- a-i-s, the delay; jiov-ijio-s, remaining; 6 voji-o-s, the law; fi 68-117], the smell ; fj x°P""> '^^ joy. § 327. Mghth or Mixed Class. ^ Several essentially different Stems unite to form one verb: 1. Present aipi-a, I take; Mid. I choose; Stems aipe and e'X. cIX-ov (§ 236) aipT\-a-a ^prf-KU Tjpi-Brjv Inf. eXeiv €iK6]i7}v alpTj-o'oiJiat ^prj-p^i 2. Pres. epx-op.ai,Igo,come; Stems ipx and i\(v)6 fj)\^'\6-ov iKfv-(TOjiai iK-TJKvB-a (§ 275) Imperat. iXBi (§ 333, 12) Inf. i\6eiv. The place of the Put. is generally supplied by elpn. 3. Pres. cpfi-to and pe^-a, I do; Stems ipb, ipy, pey f-pe§a '^p^'" ipex^riv Ohs. — The original Verbal-Stem is fepy, hence to Npy-o-v (§ 34, D.) Attic epy-o-v, work ; from (f)fpy, by the addition of the en- largement of the Present i (ol. 4), arose (J)ipy-i-a>, and from this tpS-m. But by metathesis, ff py became fpey, and with loss of the f, pcy, whence the regular Present according to cl. 4, is pe^-a, i. e., pey-i-a> (§ 251). 4. Pres. iaBl-co, I eat, Stem iadi, e8(f) [ed-o'] and (j>ay e-(pay-ov Fut. eS-Ofim e8-r]8oKa (§ 275) fjSe-crdTjv (§ 265) i8-rjSe8-ffl] Perf. eopya (§ 275, D. 2), Plup. ecipyetv, Aor. e/)|a and ipe^a. 4. Pres. ecr^o) and eSm, Inf. e8-p.evat, Perf. e8-i;S-a, Mid. iSrjSorai. 6. Pres. Aot. fircB, i asm occijpied, Aor. e-a-ir-ov, Inf (rrrclp. Part. OTTiBK, Put. ei|fai, Subj. Aor. Mid. tcjroijLtai, e J'^ave, hold (Impf. elx"" § ^36), Stems ex and (rx(e) i-(Tx-ov, I seized 1. c|io (Mid.) Subj. (TxS, Opt. (TxoCrjv Inf. ffxeii', Part, trxmi' 2. o-x^-tw e-(rxi)-(ca i-(rx^-6r]V Imperat. o-xt'-y (§ 316, 11) e-trxTI^'^^ ^'"'os crxero's Mid. i-a-X'Of^rjv, (rx^/iiat, etc. Inf. (TX-ccrBai Ohs. — The original Stem is o-cx, from whioli ex ^"'^ arisen by ■weakening a- to the rough breathing (§ 60 6). From trex by syncope came e-cx-o-i', by metathesis (rxe> from wliich trxe-r, f-crxq-Ka. From ex came the Future e^m, and the Verbal Adj. «K-T(J-f, whilst in the Present-Stem the rough breathing was changed into the soft breathing, because of the aspirate in the following syllable (§ 53 h, Obs.} : ex-m for ex-m. Comp. also imcrxveoixai aud ap.mtrxviojiai, § 323, 36. — All the Stem forms also appear in the formation of nouns : to (rx^-fia, the form; f] eii-s, the hearing; ix-vp6-i, firm, tenable, 7. Pres. filay-m, I mix, misc-eo, Stems ina-y and /iiy, additional form, fityvvfu (§ 319, 18). 8. Pres. 6po-Q>, I see. Stems 6pa, 18, ott eI8-ov (Mid.) oy^ofiai e-atpa-Ka aipdrjy oir-aTT-a (§ 275) Imperat. ZSe' Mid. iSoC (§ 333, 12) Inf. iS-eiv empa-fxai opdros SifL-fiai OTTTOS Obs. — On the irregular Augment of the Stem Spa (Impf. iiipav) § 237.— The Stem lb was originally fid (§ 34 D.). Comp. vid-e-o ; the Aor. Ind. therefore, i-hS-ov, with Syllabic Augment, contracted to eU-o-v, but Subj. "S-to, Opt. W-oi-fu. The Perf. of this Stem is oiSa, I know (§ 317, 6). — All three Stems appear also in the formation of Nouns : to opd-pia, the spectacle ; to e'S-or, the form, appearance ; f/ oi/^i-r, the sight ; ro o/i-fia, the eye, look. 9. Pres. irao-x-tu, I suffer. Stem naa-x, ira5(e), jrevB e-TTa6-ov TT^L-a-Ofiat Tre-TrovS^a TraOrj-rSs ' (for TvevB-a-ojj.ai, § 50) Dialects.— 6. Perf. 6'x-fflK-a (§ 326, 31), Perf. Mid. Syjuai, 3 Plur. Plup. sSxaTO. 8. Aor. iSoi/, Weak Aor. Mid. hiaaro and eio-oTO, Part, hurdfievos to the Pres. dboiiai, I appear, resemble (comp. § 34, D. 4). As a chorter additional form of the Stem dp a we find in Homer the Stem op(fo/>), thence 3 Plur. Pres. eVi op-o-vTat, they overlook. 9. 2 Plur. Ttirroade (§ 317, D. 14), Part. mTraBvia. Digitized by Microsoft® ^'•^'^''- EIGHTH OR MIXED CLASS. 203 Obs. — ^From the shorter Stems we have the nouns : tA iraB-os, the suffering ; t6 irivB-os, the moiurning. 10. irlv-a, I drink, Stems n-n/, ttj, tto [Lat.^o-tus] comp. § 321, 4. e-TTi-ov Fut. Tri-Ofiai (§ 265) we-n-a-Ka i-!r6-6r)V Imperat. ni-6i § 316, 15 iTe-ivo-fuu no-ros Ohs. — From the Stem tto we have the nomis : 6 'ir6-Tr]-s, po-tor; f] 7r6-ai-s, po-tio ; to no-rfipio-v, po-culu-m, 11. Pres. rpEX"<"> I run. Stems rpex and Spf/i e-Spa/i-ov SpSfioO/i-at 8e-8pap,ri-Ka dpeKreov 6pi^op,ai (§ 54 c) Ohs. — Nouns from both Stems : 6 Tpox-6-s, the wheel; 6 8pop,-€v-s, the runner.. 12. Pres. (jyep-a, I carry [ferd], Stems (^ep, eve(y)K, ol rjveyK-ov o'L-cron ev-fjvox-a- (§ 275) ol-a--6ri6p-o-s, the contribution, tax; 6 (pop-ro-s, the burden. 13. Aorist eiTTov, I spoke. Stems f iir, ip and pe eHT-ow f wr-a (§ 269) ip-Sy d-pri-xa (§ 274, Obs.) ippri6T]V Imperat. et7r-e Inf. elir-^Xv ei-prj-^c pTj-drjcrofiai (§ 333, 12) el-pij-a-opM prj-To-s. Obs. — The Stem elir has arisen by contraction from i-eir, and e-en- from fe-hn, the reduplicated Aorist-Stem of the Verbal- Stem ferr (oros, word, § 34, D. 1). This is the reason why the diphthong el belonas not to the Indicative alone (§ 257, D.). The Stem ip (Fut. ipSi), to which the Mid. ipeirOai, to ask (§ 326, 16) belongs, has likewise lost f, it being originally fep (comp. Lat. TCr-bu-m). From fep, by Metathesis (§ 59) arose Dialects. — 11. edpi^a [Spa/icofiai], beSpopa. 12. 2 Plur. Imperat. Pres. (j>ep-Te [Lat. ferte], Aor. rjvuKa, 3 Sing. Opt. eveUai (ei/eiKot) [Perf. evrjveiypai], Imperat. Aor. oio-e, Inf. olaipevai (§ 268, D.) 13. Pres. f[/j (§ 270, Ols.). Ieeegulaeities oe Meaning. § 328. The most important irregularities of meaning consist in the fluctuation between the Active, Middle, and Passive, as well as, on the other hand, between the transitive and intransitive meaning. A) Active, Middle, and Passive Meaning 1. Very many Active verbs have a Middle Future with Active meaning (§ 266). This is the case with most verbs of classes 5 to 8. 2. The Deponent verbs are to be regarded as Middle, Dialects.— 14. Perf. 1 Plur. ye-ya-fi^v, § 317, D. 2, comp. § 329, 8. 15. Perf. Part, n-c-jn-e-is, § 317, D. 17 Besides : ■ 17. l-ava, Stem av, df, I sleep (i as Eeduplication, comp. § 308), Aor. aecra. Digitized by Microsoft® § 329. lEItEGULARITIES OF MEANING. 205 and also make most of their tenses in the Middle form. Those are called Passive Deponents, whose Aorist has a Passive form : e.g., ^ovXofiai, I wish, S^ovX'^Otjv, I wished. The most important Passive Deponents are the following; of which those marked * have a Passive Future, which is used along with the Middle : ayajiai, I admire (§ 312, 8) evXafieofiai, I am on my guard *aiS£o/iai, / dread (§ 301, 1) *ilbojiai., I rejoice akdofim, I ramble *iv \ ^ ^ il icike to heart &fx,CKKaofi.m, I rival npo I r r '' \j am inclined II am anxious lieXofiai < I repent *apveojiai, I deny *i'wi *ay6ou,ai, I am, indignant 1 (§826,12) / '''■"' ^ovKofiai, 1 wish (§ 326, 14) ajro i. j I despair bioiiai, I need {^ Z2Q, lb) *&ia I ,^ ^^ \l reflect depKOfiai, I look iy [ ^ I ponder "SiaKeyoiiM, I converse jrpo ] [l anticipate Siva/iai, I can (§ 312, 9) *oiofiat, I am of opinion (§ 326, 30) fvavTi6o[iai, I am opposed (re^ojiai, I reverence ■emaraijuii, I know (§ 312, 10) (\iiKonji,eojiai, I am ambitious Obs. — Several of these verbs have the Middle Aorist as well as the Passive. 8. The Passive Aorists of several Active verhs have a Middle meaning: evcl)paiva>, I rejoice, ei^pavOrjv, I. rejoiced; a-Tpejxi), I cause to turn, ia-Tpd^v, I turned — myself ; a,iva>, I show, i (cl. 2), 1 throw doum; svaa-o-a, I caused to dwell, Aor. to vaia>, I[^-^fSed by Microsoft® 206 IKEEGULAKITIES OF MEANING. §329. Transitive and Intransitive, the Strong Aorist has the intransitive and the Weak Aorist and Future Active the transitive meaning; when there are two Perfects the Str, I sink, hide, often ti-ansitive : KaraBveo, I cause to sink, also ehvcra, Bvao) ; but eSw, I sunk myself, I dived; eveSvv, I put mi; i^eSvv, I put off. 5. Stem o-/Se(?), Pres. a-^evvvfii, I quench, Weak Aor. e-a-^e-a-a, I quenched. Strong Aor. ea^Tjv, I was quenched, €a-^7]Ka, I am quenched. The Pres. to it is a-^ivw/jLat. 6. Stem crxeX, Pres. a-KeWa, I dry, but Aor. ea-KXTjv, I grew dry, with the Pres. aKeXkoaai. Digitized by Microsoft® §331. ACCENTUATION OP VEEBAL POEMS. 207 7. Stem TT i, Aor. einov, I drank, eirlaa {iriiria-Kai), 1 caused to drink. 8. Stem k6Ka, I have ruined, perdidi. § 330. In a number of verbs the Strong Perfect alone has only an intransitive meaning, as : 1. dyvv/jLi, I break, Pf. iarya, I am broken (§ 275, 2). 2. iyeipco, I awake „ iyprjyopa, lam awake (§ 275, l). 3. ireido), I persuade „ miroida, I trust (Tretdofiai, I follow, obey). 4. irriiyvvfii, I fasten „ irkirrfja, I stick fast. 5. prfyvvfjii, I tear „ eppwya, I am torn (§ 278). 6. a-rjiro), I cause to rot „ aecrriira, I am rotten. 7. TTjica, I melt „ TeTrfica, I am melted. 8. <^aive€ipa>,g^0^^i^y„0^^pa, I am destroyed. 208 ACCENTUATION OF VEEBAL FOEMS. § 33i. § 332. Compound Verbal forms follow the general rule laid down in § 85, with the following limit- ations : 1. The accent never goes back beyond the syllable on which the first word had it before the composition : «7r6So9, give back (airo), not ciTroBo';; iiriaye';, hold in (eVt), not e'jTbcrj^e'i. 2. In double compounds the accent never goes back beyond the first : aweKBo<;, give out with ; irapevOe';, put in besides. 3. The accent never passes beyond the Augment or Reduplication: awrfkOe, he went away ; dfpiKTai,, he has arrived. This is the case even when the Augment or Reduplication is not expressed : vwelKov, I gave way ; avevpe, he found again; a-vvoiBa, I know along with, from olBa, I know, forms an exception. § 333. The other exceptions are : 1. All Infinitives in vai, have the accent on the penultima : ndevai, Oelvai, 'KeKvKevai, XvOfjvai. 2. the Infinitive of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs in CO is perispome : Xa^elv. 3. the same form in the Middle is paroxytone: Xa/3ecr^at. 4. the Infinitive of the Weak Aorist Active has the accent on the penultima : TratBevcrat, iiraivicrai (§ 268, Obs. 1). 5. so likewise the Infinitive of the Perfect Middle : ireirai.BevaOab, KeKOfiiadai. 6. the Participle of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs in o) is oxytone : Xa^aiv. 7. the Participle of the Present and of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs in /a t is oxytone : ridei^, airo- Bov^. 8. so likewise the Participle of the Perfect Active : XeXvKw (via, 6?, Gen. oro'?), and 9. that of both Aorists Passive : XvOei^, ypa6ek. Digitized by Microsoft® ' 'I' T ^ § 337. FOEMS OF VERBS IN THE IONIC DIALECT. 209 10. the Participle of the Perfect Middle is paroxy- tone : \eXvfj,€vovy-€-(TK€ ((pevyco, I flee) ; a occurs rarely in its stead : p'nrr-a-a-Kov (piVto, / hurl), KpvTrr-a-crKov (^KpvvTai, I hide). Contracted verbs in the Iteratives either leave the two vowels uncontracted : KoKif o-kov (/caX/m, I call), or reject one of them : adeoKov (wBito, I push), ^'iatrKov (^iam, I leave) ; the Stems in a sometimes change ae to aa : vaierdacTKov (vaierao), I inhabit), comp. vaieraa, § 243, D. § 337. Dialects. — In verbs of the Second Principal Conjugation tTK is aiSxed immediately to the Stem : e-, 1 pacify), \i.vi]aa.-aKfro (/icao/iat, I remember). § 338. Dialects. — Many Stems of the Present and Strrnig Aorist in poetry (seldom in Attic prose) have 6 added without any parti- cular modification of meaning. The Preterite is the most frequent of the Stems thus strengthened. The 6 is connected with the Stems sometimes by a, sometimes by e. The most important forms of this kind are : SiwKa, additional form Siaxdda, 1 pursue f"(c6iva> „ „ v\a^, guard, NominaJ and Verbal-Stem (f>vXaK (cjivKda-a-a, Digitized by Microsoft® 212 SUFFIXES FOK FOKMING SUBSTANTIVES.^ § 34J. cl. 4, a, I guard); Stjf, voice, Stem ojr, Ver"b.-Stem eV (eiTTElI'). Ohs. 2. — The Consonant-Stems undergo tbe necessary changes before suflSxes beginning with a consonant (§ 44, &o.) : ypa, Pres. ypd(j)a> (cl. 1) yov-ei-s, begett-ER „ yev „ yiyi/o/iai (cl. 8) Koup-eu-y, Z)ar5-BK „ Kcp „ Keipo (cl. 4, d). An example of the not very numerous Denomina- tives is : 5ropfl/i.-ev-y,/erry-MAN, Nom.-Stem wop dp-o, Nom. TropSp^is, passage. Ohs. — Several Masculines in ev-s have Feminines in eta (pro- paroxy tones) : /Sao-tXeur, king; ^aa-lXeia, queen. 2. rrip Nom. Trip -j reipa Nom. Teipa\ Top „ T-Tiipa „ Fern. / (§ 298) ,, pij-Top „ /5i)-T(Bp, orcj-TOB, Verb.-Stem pe, Ftit.epS (§327,13) „ Kpi-ra „ Kpi-TTj-s, judge ,, icpi, Vies. Kpiva (§ 253, Obs.) „ jroiTj-Ta „ iroiri-Trj-s, poet \ ,, ttoie, Pres, ttoieo) Stem and Nom. iroiij-rpia, poetess) (ol. 1) „ av\r]-ra „ aiXjiTrj-s, flute-play-ER, Masc.l Verb.-Stem ai\e, „ ai\r]-Tpt8„ avXrjTpi-s „ Fem. i Pres. av\e substantives in eta are derived, wbich denote the action, and are ail paroxytone : iraiSeia, I educate, TraiSeia, education ; ^aa-iXeva, I am king, /Sao-iXei'a, king's rule. Comp. § 341, 1 Ohs. S 343. C) The result of an action is indicated by : — Digitized by Microsoft® 214 SUFFIXES FOK FOEMING SUBSTANTIVES. § 344 1. liar, Norn, im, Neuter (accent, § 340, Ohs. 4). Trpay-iialr], the thing done, Verb.-Stem npay, Pres. npda-aa (cl. 4,a) (almost the same as ro irenpayfievov, Lat. factum) prj-palr], luord, Verb.-Stem p e, Fut. epa> (§ 327, 13) (comp. TO flptjpevov, Lat. dictum) T/ii7-/ia[T], cut, Verb.-Stem rep., Pres. repvo) (§ 321, 10) (comp. TO TCT/Jiripevov, the piece cut off). 2. fs, Nom. OS, Neuter (accent, § 340, Obs. 4). Stem Aax-fs, Nom. \axos, lot, Verb.-Stem Xax, Pres. Xayxavto (§ 322, 27> „ ie-es „ Wos, custom „ e fl, Perf. eim^a (§ 275) ,, TCK-f s ,, TCKos, child „ TSK, Pres. tikto) (cl. 3). Obs. — The same suffix in derived words denotes a quality : ^dpos, weight, Adjective-Stem fiapv, Nom. ^apv-s ^ados, depth „ Padv „ ^a6v-s fJ^rJKos, length ,, paKpo „ paxpo-s § 344. D) The Instrument or means for an action is expressed by : Tpo, Nom. rpo-v [Lat. fra-m] (accent § 340, Obs. 4) apo-T p - V, plough, Verb.-Stem a/)o. Vies, apoat (cl. 1) [aro/- tru-rn\ Xi-rpo-v, redemption money „ \v „ \ia> (cl. 1) btSaK-rpo-v, a teacher's fee „ SiSax „ StSdo-xm (§ 324, 28)- Obs. — The meaning of the kindred feminine suffix rpa is less fixed : ^v-17-Tpa (^^ia>,I scrape), scraper, instrument for rubbing ; 6pxr]-cj}po-u 3. I a, Nom. la, Fem. paroxytone 6-s fvBaifiov-i a, hliss „ evbaifxov „ evdalfiaiv. The suffix ta with the vowel e of the Adjective- Stems in -69, Nom. -•?;? becomes eta; and when the final o of an Adjective-Stem is preceded by another o, it becomes oia, oia (proparoxytone). akri6e-ia, truth, Adj.-Stem a\rjde[^s'], Nom. oKrjdrjs (§ 165) eijvo-ta, benevolence „ evvoo „ eiivov-s 4. es, Nom. os. Neuter, § 343, 2. § 347. G) Diminutives are formed from Nominal- Stems by the suffixes : 1. 10, Nom. lo-v, Neuter fraih-io-v, little boy, Nom.-Stem iraib, Nom. iraX-s KrjTT-i o-v, little garden „ kjjtto ,, KrJTro-s. Obs. — Other forms of to are 181.0 (Nom. iSto-v), apto (Nom. apto-v), vSpio (Nom. vbpw-v), vXXto (Nom. vXXio-k) : oiKi 8 ( o-v, a little house (o'/co-s) ; iraiba p i o-v, a little boy (Tral-s) ; piKvbpio-v, a little song (^eXos) ; dbiWio-v, a little picture (eiSos). 2. Masc. la-Ko, Fem. la-na, Nom. utko-s, lanri, paroxytoiier veav-itTKo-s, adolesceniMZifs, Nom.-Stem veavia, Nom. veavla-s 7raih-iirKT],girl „ TratS „ irai-s (rTe(j)av-l yesterday ; eaptvos, vernus; with enlarged suffix : vvKT-ep-i v 6-s, noct-ur-nu-s. 5. evT, Nom. Masc. 6^-9, Fern, ecraa, Neut. ev, denotes abundance : %a/3t-e t-9, grace-/MZ (%api-?) ; vKri-e t-9, wood-t/ {vK'rj) ; ■ijfj^ado-e t-9, sand-j/ {ajjuado-'i). Comp. Lat osu-s: gratiosMs, siivosus, aienoms. 6. /jLov, Nom. Masc. /ioji/, Neut. fiov, denotes the ient or inclination to something : /j,vij-fi co v, mindful ; tXi]-/x tu v, patient ; i'7ri.\ria--fjL a> v, forgetful. Ois. — Adjective suffixes of less defined meanings are : vo, Nom. j/o-r, oxytone, mostly passive : Sd-vo^s, terrible ; cnfi-vo-s (o-t/3-o-fiai-), venerable Xo „ \o-s, mostly oxytone and active: Sti-Xo'-t, fearful; aTraTTj-Xo-s, deceitful jio „ fio-s, proparoxytone, partly active ; pax-i-p-o-s, warlike ; and partly passive : doi8t-|i o-s, capable of being sung ; akin to it is a-ifio „ a-ifio-s, proparoxytone : xpria-ip-o-s, vseful ; ^v^ift.o-s, capable of being fled from, avoidable fs „ rjs, Neut. es : -v^euS-ijr, false, almost exclusively in com- pound words (§ 355). § 353. III. — Derived Verbs are formed in various ways from Nominal-^tem.s. The most important endings of derived verbs, differing little from one another in meaning, are the following, arranged according to their forms of the Present : Digitized by Microsoft® § 353 6. DEEIVED VERBS — ^ADVERBS. 219 1. o-a : fiurdora, IMre (jiurBo-s, hire) Xpva-6-a>, I gild {^^pvao-s, gold') fi)fito-m, I punish (^^rjiita, punishment) 2. a-a : nfid-o), I honour (j'^i''^, honour) alna-onai, 1 blame (^alria, blame) yod-a, I wail (yoo-f, wailing) 3. e-co : dpiBiie-co, I number (dpi5/io-s, number) cirvxe-co, I am fortunate (^fvTvxl]s, fortunate) ia-Topc-co, I search (Jo-rap, searcher) 4. ev-a : ^aa-CKev-co, I am king (fiaa-CKev-s, king) Pov\fv-w, T advise (PovXrj, advice) 5. if-o) : eX7rif-o>, I hope (iKtrl-s, hope) iKhjvt^-a), I speah Greeh ("EXXtji/) CKi.mri^-a>, I am inclined l , _ to Philip ] (!^O.m,ro-s) 6. a^-a> : StKa^-a, I judge i^l-Kr], justice) ipya^-ofiai, I work (epyo-v, worhj jSmf-ojxat, I use violence (/3ia, violence) 7. aiv-ia : o7jp.alv-oi, I sign (tr^p^, sign) \evKaiv-a>, I whiten (Xcv/co-j , white) Xa^ciralv-ta, I am indignant (xaXe7rd-r, severe, in- dignant) 8. vv-a : fjSiv-a), I sweeten (rjSi-s, sweet) Xap.irpiv-co, I brighten (Xa/n7rpd-r, bright). Obs. 1. — From a few Nominal-Stems verbs are derived with different endings and with different meanings ; thus from SovXo, Nom. Sov\o-s, slave: Sovkd-a, I enslave, SouXcu-m, 1 am a slave; from TroXep,o, Nom. irokefio-s, war, !roXe;ie-o> and irdXepl^-a, I make war, jroXe/id-a, / make hostile. Obs. 2. — ^A desiderative meaning belongs to verbs in creia, as well as to several in aa and taa : yeXaa-eia, I am inclined to laugh; hpaaeia, I desire to do; o-<;, a father's brother; it remains, however, where the word originally began with digamma (§ 34, D.) : Horn. Sri/xioepyo-^, Att. BTjfiiovpyo^, artisan. Ohs. — Exceptions to these rules are frec[uent. Thus Stems in o- often appear in an abbreviated form in compounds : ^i(J)o-kt6vos, killing with the sword (Stem ^ t ^ e y) ; Teixo-fiaxi-a, a contest at the wall (Stem reixes); the final vowel of A-Stems is sometimes preserved as a or ?; : dpcra-Xoyor, a speaker about virtue ; x'>^-4>opos, hearer of funeral offerings. A case-form seldom occurs instead of the Stem-form: veas-oiKos, shed for ships ; opf cro-t-(3aT!)r, wandering on the hills. § 355. The ending of a word is often somewhat altered in composition, especially when the compound word is an adjective : Tifirj, (f)iX6-Tifio-^, ambitious ; TrpayjjLa, 7roXv-7rpdry/j,wv, much occupied. The ending Digitized by Microsoft® § 358. FORM OF COMPOSITION. 221 1J9 Masculine and Femiaine, e? Neuter, deserves special notice ; this ending occurs : a) in many adjectives formed directly from Verbal- Stems : a-/3A^j8-77?, uninjured (^Xa/3, Pres. ^XdirTa) ; avTdpK-7j<;, self-sufficient (avro-'i and apKew). b) in adjectives, whose second part comes from a substantive in e? (Nom. o?) : Se/co-eT?;?, ten years old (ero?) ; /ca/co-j^^i;?, of a had nature (fl6o<;). Ohs. — Observe also the compound adverbs in ft or t, oxytone :. avTo-xeip-i, with one's own hand; a-jwrB-L, without pay; ■irav-br]fi-el, with the whole people. § 356. A verb — without changing its nature — can only be compounded vcith a preposition. The looseness of the connection in such compoimds is the reason for the position of the Augment mentioned in § 238 : aTTO^aXKa, I throw away ; a-rre^aXov, I threw away. For the same reason prepositions are frequently sepa- rated from their verbs in the poets and in Herodotus,, and in some cases even in Attic prose (comp. § 446). This separation is called tmesis. When any other word is to be compounded with a Verbal-Stem, a noun is first formed of the two, e. g. from \i6o-'; and Stem ^aX, Xt^o-/3oXo-?, throwing stones, and thence \i6o^o\e-a), I throw stones ; so likewise from vav-<; and fid-xpjj,ac comes first vav-fid'^o-^, fighting at sea, and thence vav/^La'^ico ; from eS and Stem ipry, eue/oyexTy?, benefactor, evepyeTeci), J do good. § 357. A substantive of an abstract meaning can only be compounded with a preposition without changing its termination : Trpo and ^ovXij make Trpo^ovXri, previous consultation. In every other compound the abstract substantive must take a derivative ending: Xi6o ap%-t-T€«;TCBj/, master-builder ; fucr-o-yvvo-^, hater of women (j/,icria}). 2. A form strengthened by cr and resembling the Weak Aorist-Stem is joined in the same way to the second part of the word: 'Kvcr-i-irovo-<;, freeing from trouble; irXri^-i'n-iro-'i {irXrfa-aa, cl. 4, a), whipping horses ; arpe'y^L-hi.Ko-'i (o-r/je^tD, cl. 1), perverter of right. § 359. II. — Meaning of Compounds. In regard to their meaning compound Adjectives and Substantives are divided into three principal classes : 1. Determinative compoimds. In them the second word is the principal, which, without in any way altering its meaning, is merely defined by the first. These compounds may be paraphrased by changing the first part either into an Adjective or an Adverb; aKp6-iro\i-<;, high town, castle, i. e. ciKpa ttoXi? (Horn. ir6Xi,<; aKprf) ; fiea-rjfi^pia, mid-day, i. e. yu.eo-7; Tj/jbipa ; ■yJrevBo-Kfipv^, i. e. ylrevSrj^ Krjpv^, false herald; 6p,6- SovXo-?, fellow-slave, i. e. ofiov BovXevav ; fieyaXoTrpeTrij';, grand, properly, appearing as great ; 6->lri-yovo<;, late-bom, i. e. 0T|r6 yevofievo';. This class is the least numerous. 2. Attributive compounds. In them the second word is indeed also defined by the first, yet so, that the latter alters its meaning and together with the first forms a new idea, which is attributed as a quality to another word. These compounds can generally be paraphrased by employing the Participle of exa or a verb akin to it in meaning, and adding to this the second word as an Digitized by Microsoft® § !559. MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. 223 object, the first becoming an attribute to the object: fiaKpo-yeip, longi-manuB, Icng-handed, i. e. fiaicpk<; X€ipa<; 6%(Bj/ (not the long hand itself) ; dpyvp6-ro^o-<;, provided with a silver how, i. e. apyvpovv to^ov epaiv; ojjlo- TjOOTTo-?, of the same kind, i. e. 6/ioiov rpcnrov exjcov ; ryXavK-MTTt-';, bright-eyed, i. e. yXavKoix; 6(f>6aXfiov^ exovcra ; iriKpo-^afio-';, having a litter wedding ; Kov(f>6- vov--(f>pa}v, of sound sense, sober ; SeKcireTi]<;, ten years old, i. e. having or lasting ten years ; avTo-xeip, making use of one's own hands. Obs. — To these belong the numerous adjectives in -mSj;s and oeiSrjs : yvvai.Kai8rjs=yvvmK0-eiSris (eiSoy), womanKA;e, womam's/i. 3. Objective compounds, or those of dependency. In them either the first word is grammatically governed by the second or the second by the first, so that in the paraphrase one of the two must be put in an oblique case: ^i'^o;j^o-?=t^ rivia ex^ov, guiding the reins, driver ; \oyo-ypd^o-<;, speech-writer, i. e. X07011? ypdt^av ; d^io- Xoyo-'s, worth speaking, i. e. "Koyov d^tc; ; (j)i\6-fwva-o-i;, loving the Muses, i. e. ^CkSiv rdi; Movcra? ; SeKn-Saificnv, fearing the gods, i. e. BeBico^ toik; Balfiova<; ; ^etpoTrow/To?, made by hand, i. e. %6/3crl -Troirjro^ ; 6eo^Xa^i]<;, injured by Crod, i. e. vtto 6eov ^e^Xafi/j,evo<; ; olKoyeviji;, born in the house, i. e. iv oXico-s, speech-writer ; /xj/rp-o-KroVos, mother- murderer ; TraiS-aycoyd-r, boy -leader ; /ifXo-jrojdr, composer of songs. When the meaning is passive, the second word remains unaccented: avT6-ypao-s,written'by one's self; firjTp-o-KTOvo-s, murdered hy the mother ; Svcr-dycoyos, hard to guide. § 360. The prefix av [comp. dvev, without, Lat. in-, Engl. un-~\ before consonants a [comp. Lat. i- in i-ffna-ru-s], called alpha privative on account of its meaning, is found in a very large number of compounds, ■which belong to the determinative class if the second part has arisen from a verb or an adjective, but chiefly to the attributive if from a substantive : d-ypa^o^, un- written, i. e. oil yeypafMfj.evo'; ; av-e\ev6epo';, unfree, i. e. ovK eKevOepo'i ; av-athrj<;, shameless, i. e. alhS) ovk e^^wv ; airai-';, childless, i. e. iralha'; ovk ej(ttiv. Determinatives ■with av (a) from substantives are rare and poetic: fjLijTTjp afirjToip, an unmotherly mother, i. e. /jltjttjp ou firjTTjp ovaa. Ohs. — "Words originally beginning -with digamma (§ 34, D.) have a not av : a-eKav, contracted aKcov, unwilling ; a-f iK-jjr, contracted alK-qs, reproachful (Stem cIk, foixa) ; d-cpyo-s, con- tracted apyo-s, inactive (epyo-v, work). The prefix S u ? corresponds to the English mis, and, as the opposite to ev, denotes something unfortunate, a-wkward, difficult: Sv^dp€aTo<; (§ 324, lo), displeased; 2i/9/3ouXo9, ill-advised, i. e. KaKa^; ^ovXd<; exoJv (attribu- tive) ; Sy?a\a)T09, hard to capture (§ 324, 17). Here, too, determinative compounds from substantives are rare : Hom. Au?7rcr,|0t9, unfortunate Paris. Digitized by Microsoft® ( 225 ) Part Second. SYNTAX. Preliminary Remarks. § 361. 1. Syntax (<7vvTa^i e'lKovTO jSaaiXea, the Persians chose Cyrus Icing \_Persae Cyrum regem elege- runt}. Comp. § 404. This kind of Predicate is called a Dependent Predicate. As the Dependent Predicate here appears in the Accusative, so it may in other cases appear in the Genitive or Dative. Comp. § 438 ; Obs. § 589, &c. 11. Another enlargement of the sentence is the Attri- bute, i. e., any nominal definition added to a substantive as essentially belonging to it and forming with it one idea : KaX6<; wttto?, a fine horse ; 6 irapiov Katpo^, the present time (the present). Ols. — The Greek language in many cases adds an Attribute to the designation of a person, expressive of a generic idea : Horn. rjpaies Aavaoi, ye heroes Danai (ye warring Danai) ; avtpcs SiKatTTai, ye judges, judices. 12. Different from the Attribute is the Apposition. Apposition is such a subordinate deiinition added to a substantive as does not exactly form one idea with it, but is superadded rather for describing or illustrating it, and hence might generally be expressed in the form of a descriptive clause : TlapvaaTi<;, rj tov K.vpov fiijTijp, TOVTOV fiaXKov icf>lXei, r) tov ' ApTa^ep^Tjv, Parysatis, the mother of Cyrus — who was Cyrus' mother — loved him more than Artaxerzes ; ivTevOev Kvpo? i^eXavvei Sia, ^pir/ia^ 6t? H-oXocraovi, ttoXiv olKovfJLevqv, evSai,/j,ova Kol /j.eyaXTjv, from there Cyrus marches through Phrygia to Colossi, a populous, prosperous, and large city (which was a . . . . city). The Attribute and Apposition must agree with the substantive to which they belong, in the same way as the Predicate (5, 7)..,. ,, .„. ^^ ^ ' Digitized by Microsoft® 228 NUMBER AND GENDEK. §362, Chap. XIV. — Numbek and CtENDek. § 362. The Singular sometimes has a collective sense, denoting a plurality : iadri<;, clothing, clotJies ; •yrXlvdo';, bricks; r) iTnro'i, cavalry ; f) acnrii;, the heavi/-armed. Sometimes a Predicate or Apposition in the Plural refers to collective substantives in the Singular : ^Adrj- vaiaiv TO •7rX'fj0o<; o'iovrai "iTnrapxpv rvpavvov ovra aTTodavelv, the mass of the Athenians believe Hipparchus died as ruler; to crTpaTevfia eiropi^eTO oItov k6- •7rT0VTe<; tov'; jSovi xal ovov;, the army obtained food by hilling the oxen and asses. A Plural is formed in Greek from many words, espe- cially abstracts, which have no plural in Enghsh ; especially when the repetition of an idea is to be ex- pressed: al eiri^dveiai koI XafiTrpoTrjTei ix twv ur^oivayv ^Ir^veerOai iXou, b /j.eytcrTOv wyadov eanv, ov (f)povri^ovaiv, they do not care for a friend, which is the greatest good. Chap. XV. — The Akticle. § 368. The Article 6, 57, to is originally a demonstror tive pronoun, and still employed as such in Homer, both in a substantive and adjective sense, and frequently also in the language of the other poets : Hom. ttjv iym 01 Xvcrco, HEE I mil not give up ; poet, tov, & Zev irdrep, v Tpiijpav rpiaKoaicov ovcrwv t&v iracT&v ra<; Si,aKO(ria<; ri iroXi^ Trapic'^^eTo, of the triremes, of which there were three hundred in all, the city furnished two hundred. The Article has a similar effect with quantitative adjectives of a more general kind : iroXKol, many — oi iroXkoL most : TrXeoye?, more — ol ifKeove^, thi Digitized by Microsoft® 232 THE AKTICLE. § 375. greater part ; SXKoi, alii — ol aXXot, caeteri ; oXijoiiUfew — ol oXiyoi, the oligarchs. § 375. 2. The Generic Article indicates a whole class of homogeneous objects : ol TroXirat, all the citisem ; 6 prjTcop, the orator (by profession) ; hel tov 7rov -^vxh tov deiov /iere^et, man's soul partakes of the divine ; so Geo? denotes the deity ; 6 6e6 Xoyov, I exempt. § 377. The Article is omitted with a number of sub- stantives, which by custom have almost acquu-ed the force of proper names: /SatrtXeu?, the king (of the Persians) ; TrpvrdveK, the presidents (as officials) ; ev d/cpoTToXei, in the Acropolis (Athens). §378. The Predicate (§ 361, 3, lo) generally has no Article: Kvpo<; iyeveTo ^aaiXeii^ ruiv Uepcrcbv, Cyrus became king of the Persians; irovo'; evKkeia'; Trarijp, labour is father of fame ; ol 'Adrjvawi lieptKXea eiXovro cTTpaTiryov, the Athenians chose Pericles general (comp. §§ 387, 392, 403, and 438, Obs.). ^ § 379. By means of the Article, any adjective, par- ticiple, or adverb, as well as the infinitive, may be made a substantive : Horn, o yepav, the old man ; ol irXovaioi, the rich; 6 ^6V»!'./J/^/^lg^mero&/!i^^?, the neighbour; § 3*^- THE ARTICLE. 233 oi irapovTe';, those present ; rk kcitco, the under (part) ; ot iraXai, the ancients ; to /j,ia-eiv, hating or hatred. Ohs. — With the Neuter Article any word, or even a whole sen- tence, may be represented as one ohjeot : to avTjp, the word dvrjp or the idea "man;" tA Tvadi fi, the daily nourishment; oi av€v ^virap rjSovai, the painless pleasures. § 383. The Article often stands alone, sometimes with the Genitive of a substantive (comp. §§ 409, 410), sometimes with a preposition followed by a substan- tive; in such a construction the Article has the force of a substantive (§ 379) : to, tSsv ^Adrjvalcov, the affairs (possessions, interests) of the Athenians ; ol iv rfi iroXei, the (people) in the dty ; ra fieTo, Tavra, what follows, the later (events). § 384. When a substantive with an attributive (§ 361, ll) adjective has the Article, the adjective stands between the substantive and the article : o ar/ado^ avrjp, the good man. § 385. If the substantive alone is to be prominent, and the adjective to be added as apposition (§ 361, 12), the substantive stands first, and the adjective with the articU follows, thug,^^,,^^^ ^^ ^.^^^^^^ 234 THE AETICLE. §386 a) The substantive witliout Article, when the case is such that the substantive, if put alone, would have no article, rt Btacftepei avOpanro'i aicpaTr)^ d'qpiov tov aKparea-TaTov ; in what does an ungovernable man differ from the most ungovernahle beast ? for if drjplov stood alone it would be without Article, 07]plov, from a beast. b) The substantive has the Article, when by itself, even without an adjective, it must have the Article : ol Xtot TO Tetyo? irepieZkov to kuivov, the Chians pulled down (their) wall — the new one (which they themselves had built) ; for even without the adjective it would have to be TO TeZ)(p'; irepieTKov (§ 373). § 886. The same rule holds good with regard to the position of the attributive additions mentioned in §§ 381 and 382 : o ^A9r}vaiaiv BrjfjLa, the Athenian people ; 6 StJ/xo?, o tcov 'A67]vala)v, the people, that is, the Athenian ; 6 ixeTh TavTa ypbvo'i, the after time; o yjpbvo'i o /iera TavTa, the time which folloived this. § 387. An adjective which without the Article either precedes or follows a substantive having the Article, is predicative, i. e. the character is assigned to the substan- tive only by this word (§ 361, 4, 8, and lo) : ayaOb^ 6 avTjp or o avTjp ayaOo'i (viz. effTuv), the. man is good; airavTe'i 6')(pfiev to acofia dvTjTov, we all have a body (which is) mortal. The translation may often be effected by a relative clause : ol A.6r)valot, riyovvTo avTovofiav to •TrpwTov avfifid'xaiv, the Athenians had the lead of allies (who) at first (were) independent ; (paivofiai, /xeyaXa? ra? vTTocT'xeaei'; TToiovfjuevoi;, I seem to make promises which are great. Comp. § 378. Obs. — With proper names the use of the Article is very uncer- tain, when the class is added to which they belong : 6 'Evpa'n)s norafios or 6 norauos 6 Eirc^paTijr, the river Euphrates ; fj A'iTvri TO opos. Mount Etna; 'Sinikia rj vrja-os, the island of Sicily; Tj iroXis ol Tapo'ol, the city qf Tarsi, § 388. The possessive pronoun is preceded by the Article when a ^ig&l^^el'^^'^jj/crosfe'^* ^® referred to: SSMI. THE AETICLE. 235 6 e/io? eralpo';, my (particular) friend; ifiof eratpo?, a friend of mine. § 389. avTO'i, as a predicate, put before or after a substantive with the Article, means self: avrb'i 6 ttotj;/? or o TTarrjp a\)r6, I will tell you the whole truth; TOP dpiOfwv iTavTa Bi-)(a Sie\.d^ofj,ev, we divided the whole numher into two parts ; rrj'; rifj,epa<; 0X.17? hirpK.Oov ov ifKeov irivre koX elKoai cTraBlcov, during the whole day they proceeded no mare than twenty-five stadia. Obs. — Tvas with, the Article added to a numeral may often he translated by " altogether " or " in all : " Aapeioc e/SacriXeuo-e ra navra l| Km TptaKovra err], Da/rius ruled altogether thirty-six § .391. Expressions for measures are to be understood differently, according to the position of the Article : ecrxafov to opos, the extreme end of the mountain ; to ea-xo-Tov opos, the farthest mountain (in contrast to other mountains) ; ^ ayopa p,ecrr], the middle (of the) market-place ; 77 fieoT] ayopa, the middle market, that placed in the middle of several others. In Latin /e\eco, I am useful ; /ca/cw? or kukov iroieo), KaKoeo, 1 do ill; aSi/ceo), I do wrong; v^pi^a, I insult ; jSXdTTTco, I hurt, &c. ; also Ko\aKevco, I flatter, and Ttficopio/n,ai,, I avenge myself {tov lj(Qpov, an my enemy") ; o %a>KpdTr)<; ovSeva rSiv ttoXitwv •^SiKi^crev, Socrates acted unjustly to none of his fellow-citizens. § 397. — Not unfrequently the verb of a principal clause takes as its object what should properly be the subject of a subordinate clause : km fioi tov vJoi/ elni, ei /le/xadijKe t7]v Texvriv, more animated than Kai jioi eijrt, el 6 vlbs ftefidBr/Ke t^v re^^vrjp, and tell me about my son, whether he has learnt his trade. Comp. § 519, 5, Ohs. 2. § 398. b) The Accusative of the external Object is used with the verbs : (pevyeo (comp. fugio), airoStBpdcrKa}, I run away from; (f}Odvco, I get before; BrjpdM, OTjpeva, I hunt after ; luixiop^at (comp. imitor), ^tjXoco, I rival ; d/j,ei/3o/iai, I repay, I respond to ; \av6dva (comp. lateo), iKKeiirm (comp. defido) ; eKXeiiret, fie rj ekivk, spes me deficit. Digitized by Microsoft® 238 THE INTERNAL OBJECT. §399. § 399. c) This Accusative is furtlier used with verbs of emotion : alBeo/Mai, ala'xyvo/j.at, I am ashamed (tov irarepa, before my father) ; cjivXaTTOfiai, evKa^eo/MU, 1 am on my guard against; Oappea, I have confidence (rrjv lrjv Swu/cew', to pursue with a writ (comp. '^par]v ypd^eadai) ; c) or a substantive defining the verb : ^OXv/nria viKav, to conquer in the Olympic games ; rydfiov; eariav, to give a marriage-feast ; Horn, voarov o^vpofievoi, weeping for the return ; fievea irvelovret; 'Aj^aiol, the courage-breathing Achaeans ; a/yyeXlrjv i\6elv, to go a message ; m-iip 6tKet iravTolqv cK6Tr]Ta, whom Zeus loved with multiform love, i. e. to whom Zeus manifested love in various ways (§ 400, a) ; Alcrx^vts KTrj(nS)VTa ypacjifjv wapavojiatv ihlmKev, Aeschines prosecuted Ktesiphon with a charge of vio- lating the law (§ 400, 6) ; poet. ttoXKcl ce ohvpjiara Kareldov t^v 'HpaxXeioj/ e^oSov yoa>p,ivrjv, many wailings I saw you give vent to about the departure of Heracles (§ 400, c) ; Hom. eXxos o /le jSpoTos ovraa-ev avrjp, tlie wound which a mortal man struck me (§ 400, d). § 403. 4. The Accusative as a Predicate. A dependent Predicate relating to an Object is in the Accusative. Hence the verbs mentioned in §§ 361, 10, and 392, which signify naming, deeming, making, appoint- ing, choosing, representing, and the like, have a double Accusative in the Active, one of the external Object, and one of the Predicate : ol /coTut/ce? ^ AXe^avhpov deov a>v6/u,a^ov, the flatterers used to call Alexander a god ; alpeiaOai tov a a-Tpar 7] y 6 v, eligere aliquem ducem ; ov TOV? ifKeldTa e^ovTa'i evSatfiovecTT a t o u 9 vofii^co, I do not deem those possessing most the happiest ; wapeym ifMavTov eviretO ij, I show myself obedient ; 'iKa^e tovto S&pov, he received this (as) a gift. Obs. — The want of the Article often of itself distinguishes the predicative accusative from the objective (§ 378). In the pas- sive construction both Accusatives must become Nominatives according to § 392. § 404. 5. In a freer way the Accusative is joined to Digitized by Microsoft® §405. DOUBLE OBJECT. 241 verbs and adjectives, to point out to what the idea of these words refers, in reference to what they are to be understood : Kajivw ttjv Ke^a~Kriv, I suffer in the head (comp. § 400, V) ; dBiKO^ iracrav dBiKiav, unjust in every (kind of) injustice (in every way, comp. § 400, a) ; "EXXTjviv etcri to jivo';, they are Greeks in race; ev eyofj,ev ra aoDfiaTa, we are well in body ; Horn, ofifiaja KoX ice^a\i)v If/ceXo? Ati TepTTi/cepavvo), in eyes and head like thunder-loving Zeus; ■7rap6evo<; /caXij to etSo?, a maiden beautiful in form, or of beautiful form (facie pulchra) ; ovSeh avOpanro'; avTo>; vavTa ao^<;, no man is himself wise in everything ; 6 M.apava<; iroTafio^ e'lKoai, KoX irevTe TroSa'; el-)(e to 6 5/3 09, the river Marsyas was twenty-jive feet in breadth. This Accusative is called the Accusative of reference. Ohs. — ^Hence a great number of independent, almost adverbial. Accusatives : to Svofia, in name, hy name ; to nXridos, in numher ; tov Tp67rov, in character ; tovtov tov rpmrov, in this way ; rjfv (\>vv '^Wrjvwv, most of the Sellenes: Partitive Genitive. 5. ^6^o<; tSiv TroXefMiwv, metus hostium, i. e., either a) the fear of the enemy, i. e., the fear which the enemy feels {Subjective Genitive), or, b) the fear about the enemy, i. e., the fear of which the enemy is the object {Objective Genitive). 6. hovKo'; irivre fivSiv, a slave worth jive minae : Value. 7. r) kXott?}?, an accusation of theft : Cause. 8. TToXtTon apev^mzmtwvJKbm^fm : Quality §4-12. THE GENITIVE. 243 9. Horn. Tpo'u)]KpdT7]oiTa,v, to go to the master's {house), i. e., to go to school ; iv or ek"Ai,Sov (Homer, elp 'Ai'iSao h6fioi<;, in Hades' dwelling, dominion), in or into the lower world. § 412. d) The Partitive Genitive (4), denoting a ■whole to be divided, is most common with numerals and superlatives: iroWoX twv ' Kdrjvaiav, multi Athe- niensium; vorepo'; rwv aSe\nost of the land. § 413. e) The Objective Genitive (5, b) may be trans- lated by various prepositions : evvoia twv cpiXcov, bene- volence towards friends ; dwopla o-lto v, want of food ; Horn., epo'i iSrjTvo s ^Be irorriTo ?, eagerness for food and drinh ; 7]u kokZv ayevaros, a life which has not tasted of misfortunes ; (j)iXav a/sXauTos, unwept hy friends. 6. Adjectives in -iko? (§ 351) denoting capability or fitness for (comp. 3) something: BiSacrKaXcKo^ ypafi- ^aTiKYj';, capable of teaching grammar ; irapaa-KevaariKO'i Tb)v eh TOV TToXefiov, skilled in obtaining the necessaries for war. § 415. Many Adverbs of Place are joined with a Genitive, which is mostly of a Partitive nature (comp. § 412) : TTov 775s ; where on earth? so with ez/ro?, within ; eicTw, inside ; skto^, without ; e^w, outside ; ariyi, i^yv'i, 'TrXrjalov, near ; -jrpoaw ov iroppco, forwards ; -jrepa, beyond; evQv, straight towards; irpoa-Qev, ejunrpoaOev, in front; OTTiaOev, behind; afi^oripcoOev, on both sides; avw, upwards (-Trora/iaiv, up-stream) ; and corresponding with these also some adverbs of time and manner : irrjviKa rrjii fiiiepa<; ; at what time of the day'? tto)? ex^'-'i t?)? ]'i ; what do you think ? \ddpa tcov 'yovicov, secretly from the parents. § 416. The Comparative may have the object with which anything is compared in the Genitive (as in the Ablative in Latin) : fiel^wv tov aSeXipov, major fratre, i. e., rj 6 dBeXo^, than the brother; ov Trpo'iijKei tov apxpVTa TCOV dp^pfj^evoiv irovripoTepov elvai, i. e., rj tov<; Apxo/J'ivov';, it is not becoming that the governor should be worse than the governed. Ohs. l.-This Genj^iv^J^i^^^os^t^^quently where it repre- 246 THE GENITIVE. §417. sents rj with the Nominative or Accusative ; yet it may also more freely represent ij with the Dative : poet. liKuav xpovosy ov Bel 1^ apea-Kdv Tols Korai Tutv ivBd&e (rj rois ivddSe), longer is the time that I must please those helow than that I must please those here. Ohs. 2. — Like the Comparative, the Superlative is sometimes joined with the Genitive of the things with which anything is compared: poet., tpdos KaWia-Tov tS>v nporlpav, a light most heautiful in comparison with the former ones, where we might have expected <^dos koKKwv t&v jrpoTfpcov, lax prioribus pulchrior, or (j>aos koKXio-tov navrav, omnium pmlcherrima. Ohs. 3. — All adjectives expressive of a comparison follow the rule of Comparatives : SiTrXdcnos, doubly (as great as) ; Sevrcpos (oi- 8f Kos), second (to none) ; varepos, later than ; erepos, another than. 3. The Grenitive with Verbs. Very many yerbs are joined with the Genitive on the general principles mentioned in § 408. § 417. 1. The Genitive represents a Predicate (§ 361, 7 and lO) with verbs which denote leing, hecoming^ making, deeming, in order to predicate something of a substantive, as originating from, possessing, consisting of,, or in any other way qualifying it, § 408 : SraKpari;? "Za- <\>povl<7Kov riv, Socrates was Sophroniscus's son (§ 408, l) ; ri oiKia Tov TTUTpo^ iyevero, the house hecame the father's property (§ 408, 2) ; to retT^o? \i6ov ■Tre-TrolriTai, the wall has been made of stone (§ 408, 3) ; oi ©eaaaXol tS>v '^XKrjvoav Tjcrav, the Thessalians belonged to the Hellenes (§ 408, 4) ; TToXiTov ayaOov vofiL^erai dappelv, to be courageous is deemed a good citizen's quality (§ 408, 8). Obs. — The Genitive often occurs with verbs of perception and observation in such a way that it is properly dependent on a noun or pronoun : tovto vfiHv jidkiara 6avp,a^op^v, this we most admire in you (properly : this of you we most admire). § 418. 2. The Genitive of Material (§ 408, 3) is also- used with verbs of plenty and ivant (comp. § 414, 2) : ■jrl/jiTrX'ri/M, TrKTjpoa, I fill; 7rKjj9co, yefiai, I am full; Beofiao (Bel fiot), I need ; to, wra eveifkyjaav Saifwviai a-o(f>ia<;, tliey filled the ears with zumdrous wisdom ; i S419. THE GENITIVE. 247 irapwv Kaipo'; ttoXX^? ^povrlSo'; koI /SovXijs Beirai, the present time is in need of much rejkction and advice. § 419. 3. The Partitive Genitive (§ 408, 4) is used with many verbs which only partially affect the object of the action : a) With all verbs which contain the idea of sharing : //.ere^cB {/MeT€<7Tl /jloo), I have a share in ; fMSTaXa/M^avw, J take a share in; fjLeTaBlBaiij,i, I give a share (tij? Xe/a?, of the booty) ; Koivcovias, I share (comp. § 414, 5) ; Horn. cn/Tov 8' aihol/T) rafilT] irapedrjKe •^^api^ofiivrj irapeovToiv, the modest stewardess brought bread supplying from the store. Obs. — SfiB, I smell, also belongs to these : luipav of«, Tie smells of myrrh. b) With verbs which denote touching, laying hold of, seizing : awTO/iai, ifravco, J touch ; e^pfiai, J hold by, border (rtvot;) on something; dvre'^^ofiai, eTriXafi^dvofiac, J lay hold of; Xafi^dvas rtvd rij? 'x^eip6<;, I seize one by the hand; dp)(pfiai,, I begin (t'^? -TraiBelai;, with the education); poet. Qavovrwv ovhev d'hiyo'i dineTai, no pain touches the dead. c) With verbs which denote striving, aiming at : n, I attain something ; Ttra'r, a share in something. § 420. 4. The Genitive is joined with many verbs denoting a sensuous or moral perception or emotion (comp. § 414, 3), as : aKova, aKpodofiat, J hear ; aurdd- vofiai, I perceive ; fitfMvijcrKOfiai,, I remember (tov if>i.\ov, Tnemini amici) ; iiriKavOdvo/xat, I forget ; fiekei fwi Tivod6yyov, a sound, but tov SiSao-KciKov, the teacher. § 421. 5. With verbs of estimating, buying, selling, &c., the Genitive denotes the valvs or price (comp. § 408, 6, and § 417) : 6 SovXo'; irevTe fivoov rifia/rai, the slave is valued at jive minae ; ttoWov mveiaOai, magni emere ; raXdvTov dirohotrdai, to sell for a talent. § 422. 6. With verbs oi judicial proceedings the Geni- tive denotes the cause (§ 408, 7, § 414, 5): KXoTrrj'? 6vov Buo- Keiv, to prosecute for murder ; (peiiyei iTapavo/^cov, he is charged with violating the law; dire^vye KaKr]'yopia';, he was acquitted of libel ; idXacrav 7rpoSoaLa<;, proditionis condemnati sunt. Ohs. — With verbs of emotion the Genitive likewise expresses the cause, as : 6avfidCa> ere T^r aatppoa-ivr]!, I admire thee for thy moderation ; Horn, p^ud/xerar yvvaiKos, angry aholtt the woman. Digitized by Microsoft® §425. THE GENITIVE. 249 § 423. 7. The Genitive is also joined with verbs which imply the meaning of a Comparative (§ 416), as : tcparea) (jcpevnoyv elfii), dpyat (Kpolao^ Av8S)v VPX^^' Croesus ruled over the Lydians); ^aaiXeva, I rule; irepUifLi, irepir/lp/vofiai, I am superior ; r^TTdofuu (rjTTeov €t/ii'), I am inferior ; Xeiirofcai, vaTepew, I am behind; SMpoveiv Ttvo?, to despise any one ; KarTiyopeiv ri, ti,vo<;, to accuse one of a thing ; 'rrdrpLov rjv ry ^AdTjvalcov iroXec irpoecrTd- vai Tcov '^WtJvoiv, it was a hereditary custom for the city of the Athenians to be at the head of the Hellenes. 4. Freer use of the G-enitive. § 425. The Genitive, without immediate connexion with a noun or verb expresses : 1. Place (local Genitive), almost exclusively in the language of poetry, and that either the place from which something is removed : la-raaffe ^ddpcov, get up from the steps ; inrdr/eiv t^? oZov, to go out of the way (comp. § 419, e) ; — or the space within which something takes place (comp. §§ 412, 415) : t^? 'Icoviaf tovto alcr')^pov vevofiicTTai, within Ionia that is considered dis- graceful ; Hom. ve(po<; ov ayadS fiovo^ ^/Xos, the good alone is dear to the good. § 431. 2. Datiye of interest. The Dative denotes the person for vrhom — for whose interest — something is or takes place ; hence a) the person benefited or injured {dot. commodi, in- commodi) : ttS? avrjp avrm irovei, every man toils for himself ; ^66vo<; fieyierrov kukov Tolf e'xpvaiv avTov, envy is the greatest evil to them that have it. § 432. b) the possessor with el/j,i, ylryvo/iai, and similar verbs : ttoXKoI /moi (j}iKoi, elcrlv, I have many friends. Obs. — The possessive Dative is sometimes, like the Genitive, joined vpith a Substantive ; Herod., oZ s (Tvvekovn emelv, to speak briefly. § 436. 3. Dative of community. With verbs, adjectives, and adverbs, wliich denote community, agreement, friendly or hostile meeting, the person or thing with which such a community, agree- ment, or such a meeting takes place, is in the Dative. a) Verhs of this kind are : Koiva>vea>, I share (rtvl Tivo's, something with one) ; avfi(ovel TOi? XoyoK, the deeds do not harm,onise with the words; poet. KaKolcnv jJi-r] irpo^oiJ[,i\ei dvSpdaiv, aXX' alel tcov dyaOcbv e^eo, with bad men do not associate, but always hold to the good. b) Adjectives: 'ia-o<;,like; ofiow'Sj-Trapa-TrKija-io';, similar ; 6 avTO'i, the same ; oIk6io<;, t'Sto?, peculiar ; koiv6<;, common (comp. § 414, l) ; 6fiQ)vvfj,o<;, of like name ; avvcovv/jLo<;, of like meaning ; Bidcjiopo^, different ; evavrLo^, opposite : oyir\t,fffievoL fjaav rot? avTol'; K.vpa) 07r\oL<;, they were armed with the same weapons as Cyrus. e) Adverbs : besides those derived from the adjectives just mentioned, especially dfj,a, at the same time ; ofiov, together : d/j,a tS eralpo), at the same time with his friend. % 437. The Dative is used with many verbs which. Digitized by Microsort® •' ' §440. THE DATIVE, 253 compounded with prepositions, denote a contact or union, especially with such as are compounded with ev, a~w, eirl, yet also with those compounded with Trpoy, irapd, irepi, v-iro, as : eTncrTrjfj/riv ifi'TTOieiv ttj "^vj^ji, to bring knowledge into the soul ; eirtKeladaL rivi, to press upon, to urge, one ; iTririfiav tlvi ri, to reproach one with something ; wpo^ievai, Ta> hrjijuw, to come before the people ; TrapicTTacrdai, irapeivaL rivi, to support one ; -TrepiiriTrTeiv Tivi, to meet one. § 438. 4. The Instrumental Dative, answering to the Latin Ablative, denotes that hi/ or 5z/ means of which an action is brought about, hence a) the means or instrument (comp. Bid, § 458) : Horn.. Tov /J,ev Kara, (TTfjOoi /Sake Bovpi, the one he struck on the breast with the spear ; 6p5sp.ev toi<; 6vXa^iv ixprjTo, some of them he used as guards. § 439. b) the operating power or cause from which an action proceeds : dv6po)7ro<; ^vaei ttoXitlkov, man (is) by nature fitted for the State; iroXKaKi'i arfvoia dfiap- rdvofiev, we often err from ignorance; ^o^m, from fear. Ohs. — With verbs of emotion the Dative expresses the ground or occasion of the emotion : ^hojiai, p^aipa tj liovcriKrj, I delight in music; "kuTTOVfiai, I am grieved; ji^aXeTraij/m, / am, angry;. arcpya, ayairai, I am satisfied (with something) ; alax^vofiai, lam ashamed (about something). § 440. c) the measure, by which a thing is measured. hi/ which one thing surpasses another, bj/ which it is distinguished : TaD'fsihL^tjtMimpBiaS^v rot? yejevrj/ievoit;, 254 THE DATIVE. §441- the future we judge of by the past ; Se/ca erea-i irpo t^s ev 'toKaiuvL /u.a%??? ol 'ABTjvaioi iv MapaOoivi, evUrjdav, ten years before the battle of Salamis the Athenians con- quered at Marathon; -ttoWS fieil^mv, multo major (also iroXv, § 404, Obs) ; hiajiepew rivo<; ^povrjaei, to differ from any one in insight. § 441. 5. The freer use of tlie Dative expresses : a) the way and manner, or an accompanying cir^ cumstance : Tovrm Ta> Tpoirai, in this way ; /3ta, by force ; cnrovBr}, with zeal ; aiyfj, in silence ; epyo), in fact; T& ovTi,, in truth; Ihia, privatim ; Br^fioa-ia, publiee ; Horn. vrjineycTi,, in his folly (§ 362, Obs.). Ohs. — The Dative with airos should he particularly noticed: 6 ^iXiTTiros TrevraKoaiovs iinreas eXa^ev avTols toIs OTrXotff, Philip took five hundred horse together with their armour. (Comp. the Dative of community, § 436.) § 442. 5) The place where something happens is expressed by the Dative more rarely in prose than in poetry : MapaOcbvi, at Marathon ; Horn. 'EXXaSt oiKta vatfov, inhabiting his house in Hellas ; Horn. t6^^ &ixoicn,v ex<>>v, having the how on his shoulders ; poet. oBol'i, on the way. § 443. c) Time is expressed by the Dative as defi- nitely limited in answer to the question when : TrjBe ry vvktI, hoc node; rfi va-repala, on the following day; Terdpra erei, in the fourth year; 'OXu/iTTiot?, at the Olympic games ; poet, '^etfiepiip voTtp, in a stormy south wind. Obs. — Notice the difference between the Accusative (§ 405) and the Grenitive (§ 426), in their application to relations of time. Digitized by Microsoft® §447. THE PREPOSITIONS. 255 Chap. XVII. — The Pkepositions. ' § 444. Prepositions have a double use. Either they are combined with a verb, to define the direction which the action of the verb takes, or they are used inde- pendently, and serve, in connexion with different cases, to point out the relation of single words in a sentence to one another more distinctly than could be done by the cases alone. § 445. Ohs. 1. — As tlie name praepositio (jrpodetns) points to the first of these uses, those prepositions which are not comhined with verhs, such as : avev, without (poet. Six"; X""?'*) i "W' /^^'XP'' till; jj^ra^i, ietween; evexa, on account of; TrKfjv, besides, — are called spurious. They are all used with the Genitive (oomp. § 415), except as, to, which has the Accusative. § 446. Ols. 2. — All Prepositions were originally adverbs ; many of them are still used as such in poetry, and a few even in prose : irepl, beyond, very ; iierd, later ; irpos, m addition. On account of this origin, their position in Homer is very free ; they may be separated from their verb, as well as from their substantive : Hom. cV 8' avrog iSitrero vapoira x'^'^o": ^'^ ^ himself put on the glittering brass ; aficj)! 5e ;(atTat c^fiots dwaovTcu, and the manes wave around the shoulders. On the anastrophe in placing the Prepositions behind, see § 90. In prose only irepl is sometimes thus used. § 447. With regard to the cases joined with Preposi- tions, the following general rules are to be noticed : 1. The Accusative with Prepositions expresses the object upon which, over which, towards which an action extends (§§ 395, 405), and with many Prepositions the goal of an action itself (§ 406). 2. The Gfenitwe frequently, denotes the place from which an action proceeds (§ 425), often also a moral relation (§ 408, etc.), whilst it depends on- other Pre- positions in the same way as on the adverbs mentioned in § 415. 3. The Dative denotes a more external connexion C5% 435, 442). ^■''' / ' Digitized by Microsoft® 256 PEEPOSITIONS "WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. § 448. General View op the Prepositions. § 448. I. — Prepositions which can have only on& •ease : A) the Accusative: el;, oi?. B) the Genitive : avri, wko, e/c (e^)j ttjOo — avev, cuyfii, /^e%p') f^era^v, eveica, ttXtJp. C) the Dative : iv, crw (^w). II. — Prepositions which can have two cases : A) the Genitive and Accusative : Std, Kara, virep. B) the Dative and Accusative : avd. III. — Prepositions which can have all the three oblique cases : afi(pi, eVt, fierd, -Trapd, irepi, irpo';, inro. I. — Prepositions which can have only one Case. § 449. A) Prepositions with the Accusative 1. et? or 6? (Lat. in, c. Accus., and inter), to, into, points out the goal towards which the action is directed. The opposite is i^, out. ek is used : a) of place : ol AaKeBaifj,6viot eke^aXov et? rrjv 'At- TiKriv, the Lacedaemonians invaded Attica ; et? BiKocrTripiov ehievai, to come into court; Xeyeiv et? to Tr\r]0o<;, to speaTc to the multitude; ek avhpa' LTnreov SXto p^ayiiafe, he sprang off tJie chariot to the ground. b) of time : from, since : air iKeCvT]'} rrj'; rjfiepa'i, from that day. o) of cause: by, from, through: avrovo/x.o'; airo ttj? elpi^vrj^, independent through the peace. Phrases : airo aKowov, far from the goal ; airo yva/j/rj^, contrary to expectation; airo aT6/j,aTov T^yeiv, to speak from, mem/rry ; ol airo crKrjv^'i, those of the stage, the actors. In compounds it signifies frmn, off, away. § 453. 3. Ik, before vowels e'^ (Lat. ex, e), out of (opposed to et's), denotes removal from within or from amongst : a) of place : Ik '%irdpTr]<; (pevyei, he is banished out of Sparta. b) of time : ix iraihav, from boyhood (a pueri£). c) of origin : bk 7rarpo^o deliver speech after 258 PKEPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. § 45t speech; iic t5)v ofioXoyovfiivav, according to the agree- ment (Lat. seeundum). Phrases: sk Se^ta?, on the right; i^ Xaov, equally; Bfjaai, KpefiAaai Tt e/c two';, to fasten, to hang one thing to another (Lat. pendere ex, ab aliqua re). In compounds : out, away. § 454. 4. TTjoo (Lat. pro), for, before, instead, a) of place, before: Trpo Ovpmv, before the door h) of time : irpb tij? fid'^r)';, before the battle. c) of preference ; irpo rovrcev reOvdvab /j,3X\ov av eKoiTo, lie would choose death befiyre this, i. e., rather than this. d) for, a rare use : vpo iraiZav ficuxea-Qai, to fight for the children. Phrase : irpo iroXKov iroteicrOai (c), to prefer greatly. In compounds : before, forth, beforehand, forwards. § 455. The spurious Prepositions : 5. dvev, without (poet, j^toyat?, St%as, drep), 6. a%pt, /^6%pt, until. 7. fiera^v, between. 8. eveica, also eveKev, elve/ca (poet. ovveKu), for tlte sake of an object to be attained (Lat. causa): tt}'; vyteia'; eveKU 'y^pcofieOa rm larpm, we employ a physician for the sake of health. (Comp. Sta with Ace. § 458, B.) 9. ifkriv, besides (praeter). Obs. — irKriv is often used quite adverbially without governing a case : poet, ouk S.p' 'AxaioU avSpes ei(ri ■n-Xfjv oSe ; have then the Achaeans no men lut this ? It miglit be nX-qv ToOSe, besides thisi § 456. C) Prepositions with the Dative. 1. ev (Horn, evi, ev, Lat. in, c. Ablat. and inter), in, answers to the question where ? a) of place: ev 'AdijvaK;, in Athens; also among (inter) : iv tovtoi';, among them ; ev Btj/^co \eyeiv, ta speak before the people (comp. § 449, a). Digitized by Microsoft® ■I 458. PREPOSITIOKS WITH THE GEN. AUD ACC. 25& b) of time : iv rourp tS erei, in that year. c) a moral relation : with : ev t& Oem to ttJ? fJ-a^Ti T-fiXo?, the result of the battle rests with God. Phrases: 17 iv MapaOStvo fidxHt the battle at Mara- thon ; iv TOK TrpoJTo?, first by far ; iv Kaip^, at the right time ; iv irpo<;9r)KT)<; jxepei, in addition ; iv %epo"f ^idivai, to put into the hands (comp. Lat. in mensa ponere). In compounds : in, into, on. The accented evt=eveaTi signifies, it is in, it exists, it is possible. § 457. 2. crvv or fw (Lat. cum), with, denotes com- panionship (opposed to dvev, comp. /lerd with Gen. § 464, B.) : a-vv 'Adijvri ivUnjaev, he conquered with (the help of) Athene ; aiiv v6fj,l tovtov tov ^(^povov, about this time; dfj,(f)i to; k^rjKovTa, cireiter sexaginta ; aficjil S^iTrvov iroveiv, to be occupied about a meal. Phrase : ol ajM^i ruva, any one with his attendants ;: hence even : ot dfKJA TTXaTcova, Plato and his followers. In compounds : about, around, on two sides, douhly. § 463. 2. eVi, radical meaning, upon, on, on the- surface, by. A) with the Dative : a) of space: Hom. eTrl ■)(9ovi crlrov eSoj/re?, eating- bread on earth; iirl t§ OaXdcrcrrj olicelv, to dwell by the sea. b) of time : iirl to-utoi';, thereupon. c) of an ethical relation : iirl rot? wpdy/jLaaiv ehai, to preside over the business ; hrl rot? •Tro'X.efi.LOK elvai, to be in the power of the enemy ; cTrt rivi %at/3en^, to rejoice at a thing ; especially also of purpose : iirl Tvaiheia tovto e/j,a9e<;, you learnt this for education ; and of condition : iirl t6koi<; Savei^eiv, to lend on interest; iwl tovtm, on this condition. B) with the Genitive : a) of space, in answer to the question where : KOpo? Digitized by Microsoft® § 465. PKEPOSITIOKS WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. 263 •n-pol^aweTo i(f> apfiaroi;, Cyrus appeared on a chariot ; and to the question whither : eirl Xdfwv ifkelv, to sail to Samos. (Comp. § 419, c.) h) of time: eirl Kpala-ov apxavTOi, in the reign of Croesus ; also in many connections : near, hy. C) with the Accusative : on, orirto: ava^aiveiv i(j>^ 'hnrov, to mount (on-to) a horse ; eVl he^ia, an tJte right. Phrases : ms eirl to ttoXv, for the most part ; ro iir i/Me, for my part. In compounds : on, at, hy, in addition, he-, very often untranslateable. § 464. 3. p,eTa (German mit), radical meaning, in the midst. A) with the Dative : in poet, only : amidst, among (inter) : Horn. "^KTopa, o? 6eo^ eaxe fier avSpdai, Sector, who was a god among men. B) with the Genitive : mth, in the sense of participation with (comp. avv, § 457) : fierci, rmv ^vfip.d'^aiv KivBweveiv, to fight with (in alliance with) the allies ; fiera SaKpvcov, with tears. C) with the Accusative : a) into the midst, among : poet. : Horn. Imv fiera eOvo'i eralpmv, going among the crowd of companions. h) usually after: Hom. o'i'xpvrai fierd helwov, they go after (for) a meal; jMercc tov HeXoTrovvrja-iaKov iroKefiov, after the Peloponnesian war. c) seldom in (as with the Dative) : fiera %6tpa9 ex^i'V, to have in hand (comp. Zed) ; fieB^ rjp,epav, interdiu. In compounds: mth,. after, trans- (fieTaTiOevai, trans- pose). § 465. 4. irapd (Hom. Trap, irapaL), radical meaning, beside, near. A) with the Dative : at or near: Hom. irapa VTjvcrl Koputvicri fiifivd^eiv, to Digitized by Microsoft® 264 PEEPOSITIONS WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. § 466. linger near the curved ships ; koI Trap" ifJ.oi ni ifiireipia ia-Tiv, I also have some experience [with me also is, &c.). B) with the Genitive : a) from, with verbs of motion, and such as denote receiving either bodily or mentally: Horn, avovoareiv TTapa vrjSiv, to return from the ships ; 'Kafi^aveuv, fiavdar veiv irapd tivo<;, to receive, learn from some one. h) hy, very rare, and only poet. : vaieraiv Trap' 'loyi?;- vov peLOpmv, dwelling hy the waters of the Ismenus, C) with the Accusative : a) to : Hom. tm 8' avri'; lttjv vapa vrja';, they went again to the ships. h) along, near hy : of place : Hom. -irapa diva daXdcrcr'r}';, along the sea heach. of time : during : Trap o\.ov top /3toj/, per totam vitam, during the whole of life ; compared with : Set ra? irpd^ei'; irap oKK-qKas ridevai, you must put the acts hy the side of (or compare with) one another; with the comparative, puel^ov n Trapa TovTO, something greater than this ; on account of (comp. propter, near, and on account of) : Trapa rrjv -^fierepav dfLeXeiav ^LXnnro^ av^erai, on account of our neglect JFhilip hecomes great. Taken negatively : besides : e')(pp,ev n Trapa ravra aXKo Xeyeov, we have something else to say besides this ; contrary to (opposed to Kara with the Ace): irapa Tov vofMov, contrary to the law, properly past the law, by evading the law. Phrases : "jrapa fiiKpov, nearly ; irap ovBev iroieurOai, to deem as nothing. In compounds: near, at, past, beyond, over (irapa- j3aivetv, overstep). § 466. 5. Trept (Hom. adv. irepi, very = Lat. per in per-magnus), radical meaning around (from above), comp. a/i^t. Digitized by Microsoft® §407. PREPOSITIONS WHICH CAN HAVE THREE OASES, 265 A) -with the Dative : round, around, near, for: Horn. irepX %KMy<7i, irvkycn,, round, the Skaean gate; irepl rots (piXTo.TOi'i Kv^eveiv, to gamble for what is dearest. Horn, irepl Krjpi, at heart ; 'irepl j)6^(p, from fear. B) witli the Genitive : a) mostly in a figurative sense, about, Lat. de: riva Bo^av exeK "Trepl tovtwv ; what opinion have you about this ? fiovkexiovrai Trepl tov TroXe/iiou, they consult about the war. i) in Horn, over, above : irepl irdvTcov eiifxevai, aXKwv, to he above all others; hence the prose phrases: irepl iro'}OMv iroieiaOai, to place above much, i. e. estimate highly ; Trepl ovBevo? irobela-dai, place above nothing, i. e. estimate at nMhing at all. 0) with the Accusative : ahnost the same as dfij>l (§ 4<32) : wepl A'lyvn-Tov (around, i. e. everywhere, in Egypt), about the country of Egypt ; figuratively : in regard to, about, concern- ing: irepl epeLv irpo^ apsTijv, to differ in regard to virtue; irpb<; rh KaXXiara tuv vTrap'XpvTcov Bel ra XoiTrci 'TTpaneiv, we ought to arrange the future according to the best of the present means; irpo^ Tama, according to this. Phrases: tt/jo? rjSov^v, according to pleasure; Trpois Xapiv, in favour of; tt/oo? ^lav, by force; ovSev Trpo<; €/ie, nothing to me. In compounds : to, in addition, near, together with. § 468. 7. vTTo (Horn, also viral, Lat. sub), radical meaning under, below. A) with the Dative : under: Hom. fSiv viro m-ocrcn fieja arevayl^eTO <; ehriov inro ttovtov iSvcrero KVfLalr- vovra, having thus spoken, he dived under the billowy sea; viro to opo<; rjiiXi^ovro, they spent the night under (at the foot of) the mountain. b) of time : towards (Lat. smJ) : viro vvktu, towards^- night ; viro ttjv vvktu, during the night. In compounds : under, down under, gradually, secretly^ often untranslateable. Chap. XVIII. — The Pkonotws. § 469. 1. The Nominative of the Personal Pronouns: is used, as in Latin, only when the person is to be men- tioned with special emphasis: koX ah oyjrei, amov, tu quoque eum videbis, i. e. ov fiovov eyd> (not merely I). § 470. 2. The place of the Possessive Pronoun is frequently supplied by the article (§ 373). On the- article with the Possessive Pronoun, § 388. a) Instead of the Possessive Pronoun the Greek likes- to use the Genitive of the corresponding Personal Pro- noun. Such a Genitive, when the substantive to whichj it belongs has the article, usually stands either before- ° Digitized by Microsoft® -268 THE EEFLEXIVE PKONOUN. §471. the article or after the substantive : gov 6 vm or o vlo^ (70V, thy son, not d aov vl6<;. b) As the Possessive Pronoun approaches very near ■to a possessive Genitive (§ 408, 2), it may be qualified by a Genitive : rafxa Bvarijvov kuko,, my ills, the. unfortu- nate one's \mea miseri mala\. § 471. 3. The Meflexive ProTwun refers either to the -subject of the clause in which it occurs : St wyade, fxir) aiyvoei, aeavrov, good friend, be not ignorant of thyself; or, in dependent clauses, it refers back to the subject of the leading clause : ehiAvat eKeKevaev, el fie\Xoi<; a-vv eavrS eWXeti/, he bade you enter, if you were going to sail away with him (secum). Obs. a) — Instead of the Eeflexive Pronoun the usual Personal Pronouns also may he employed : 8okS juoi oIk. anapda-Kevos ehai, I think myself not to he unprepared. €bs. V) — The simple Pronoun of the third person, ov, of, e, &c., is commonly used reflexively by the Attic writers, hut in Hom. it is exactly like the English, of him, to him, him, &c. (like the Attic avTOv, aira, avTov, &0., according to § 474) : Xey^rai. 'AttoXXo)!' iicheipai Mapaiav ipi^ovra oi nepl (rotpias, dicitur Apollo Marsyae cutem detraxisse de arte secum certanti ; Hom. airSpaTOs de oi §X6e — MivcXaos, sponte sua ad eum venit Menelaus. Obs. c) — The Eeflexive of the third person sometimes supplies the place of that of the first and second : Set rjpas avepia-Qai, eavTois, we must ask ourselves; in like manner the Possessive os sometimes stands for the Possessive of the first two persons ; Hom. ov yap eymye ^s yairis hivapai yXvKeparepov oXXo IbiaBai, for I can see nothing sweeter than my own country. § 472. The following are used as Possessives of the Meflexive Pronouns : a) the Genitives of the Eeflexive Pronouns, especially in the Singular : i/navrov, creavrov, eavrov. When the substantive to which they are joined has the article, the Genitives stand between the article and the substan- tive : Zeii? TTjv 'AOt/vuv e, I take, aipeofj-at, Pass. I am chosen; fiereTri/jicpOr), he was sent for, fieTOr •Trkyjwoiiai, I send for (§ 479). Chap. XX. — ^Use op the Tenses. § 484. In marking the time the Greeks distinguished : 1. The Oedee of time. The three Orders of time being the Present, the Past, and the Future. 2. The KiSD of time. In regard to the Kind of time an action is either a) going on, e. g. '^i^voxtkuv (gradually), to learn to know; or, h) momentary, ^■,^^'^^^v<^to^^<^^ive, know; or, 27'± USE OF THE TENSES. § 485; c) eompMed, e. g. i'yvmKevai,, to have learnt, to know (Lat. nosse). Ohs. — The momentary action may be compared to a point, the action going on to a line, and the completed action to a surface. An action ffoi77g on is indicated by the forms of the- JPresent-Stem. A momentary action is indicated by the forms of the Aorist-Stems. A completed action is indicated by the forms of the Perfect-Stem. The Future denotes the future Order of time of an action going on, as well as of a momentary action : ^vwa-ojjbai, I shall (gradually) get to know, and I shall perceive; the Third Future (futurum exaetum) that of a completed action : iyv6}Ka)<; eaofiai, I shall have learnt (Lat. novero). In the Present, Aorist, and Perfect, only the Indicative indicates a dBflnite Order of time; the other Moods, the Infinitive and the Participle, resemble the cor- responding Indicatives only in regard to the Kind, not in regard to the Order of time. The following table presents a general view of these relations : Present. Past. Future. Going on. Ind. Pres. Imperf. Subj., Opt., Imperat., Inf., Part., of the Present. ^ i i i I Momentary. I Aor. Ind. ^ Subj., Opt., Imperat., Inf.,. of the Aorist. Completed. Perf. Ind. Pluperf. I Futm-um exact. Subj., Opt., Imperat., Inf., Part., of the Perfect. § 485. Ohs. — As the English as well as the Latin language generally neglects the distinction between an action going on and a Momentary action, it is difficult to comprehend it. A similar dis- Digitized by Microsoft® § 488. THE PRESENT INDICATIVE. 275 tinotion, however, may be perceived in some Bnglisli verbs, as flee QpcvycLv), and escape (c^vyeij') ; flicker and flash ; fear ((jio^cia-dai), and ie frightened (0o0))6^vai, hua-ai) ; worarfer (5au/xaf fiv), and to he surprised (6aviJ,dM0MMM,&'°^^g with others, or in 276 THE IMPEEFECT. § 489- their frequent, continued repetition: Horn, ol fiev dp' otvov e/J^icryov ivl Kp7jT7]pcri, koX vhoap, oi o avTe UTToyyoiai, iroKvrprjTOicrt, rpaire^ai; vi^ov koX irpoTiOev, To\ 8e Kpea iroXKa BarevvTo, some were mingling loine and water in mixing-bowls, others cleaning tables ndth porous sponges, and placing them, the rest were carving much meat; rov? fLev ovv irekTaara'; iSi^avTo ol ^dp^apoi Kal ifxaxovTo, the barbarians met tJie peltasts, and then were fighting, — Horn. 6(^pa p,ev ^o)? ^v Kal ai^ero lepov ^fiap, TOippa fJLohJ ajx^orepcov jSeke rjiTTero, irlirTe re Xao9, as long as it was morning, and holy day increasing, so long the darts of both were striking and people falling. — oinroTe fjuelov aTreaTparoTreSevovTO ol /3dp^apoi, tojv 'K\X^va>v k^rjKovTa araSicov, the barbarians (did not encamp) used never to encamp less than sixty stadia from the Hellenes. § 489. Ohs. 1. — The Imperfect frequently expresses a merely attempted but not accomplished action : jrpSiTos KXeap^os tovs airov (TTpaTtoiTas ejSta^ero Uvat, ol 6e avrbv e^aXkov, varepov de eVet eyi/cr oTt ov bvvr](rcTaL ^idfracrOat., (rvvrjyayfv kKKkruriav, first Olearchus tried to force his soldiers to go, hut they shot at him ; afterwards, however, as he perceived he would not he ahle to force them he sum- moned a meeting. So ihibov sometimes means he offered to give, to distinguish it from eSowce!/, Ae gave. § 490. Ohs. 2. — The Imperfects of the verbs which denote should and must are used, just as in Latin, to denote what should be done, in opposition to what was done : eSei roiis 'Keyovras jujre irpos e)(^Spav wou'Lo-dai. tov Xoyoy fx^Te npbs x^P'") ^^ speakers ought to have made tJieir speeches neither from Imired nor from, favour (Lat. oportebaf) ; so xp^", «'* ought ; ukos tjv, it would he fair. On the Imperf. with &, § 494, Ohs. 1, and § 537, &c. § 491. c) The Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, Infinitive, and Participle Present simply express an action in progress, whether it lie in the present, past, or future : iiaivojx^Qa TrdvTe';, ottotov opyi^cofj.eda, we are all mad when we are angry ; eXeyov Tc5 ^vdvBij/jLo), oTi wdvTe'i eToiiJLoi elev jjuavOdvew, they told Euthydcmus that tlieii were all ready to learn ; outoi •^ Digitized^by Microsoft® ^ ' § 492. THE AOEIST INDICATIVE. 277 iroirtao), ott&j? av crv Kekevri<;, I will do ^eivov hrjBd BvprjaiV i?, ore, as, wlien, like the Latin Perfect with postquam, ubi, ut: to? o KOpo? fj(r9eT0 Kpavyfj';, dveirriBr^aev eirl rov "irirov acrirep ivOov- criwv, when Gyrus perceived (ut audivit) a cry, he sprang upon his horse like one inspired. § 494. The Aorist Indicative is used in statements of experience implying that a thing once happened, hut admitting an application to all times : poet. t£ xP"*"? V ^'"'J "■"^^rtof ^\6' cnronaafiivr], with time avenging justice always came (and hence always comes) ; kol ^padvs ev^ovKos etXeu ra^vv avBpa diatKcov, even a slow man, when well advised, overtooh (overtakes) In/ pursuit a quich man. In English vre employ the Present in such general assertions, and often add such adverbs as usually, commonly, always, &c., ras tS>v avXQ)v crvvovalas Skiyos -j^povos biekvaev, a short time usually dissolves the associations of the had. This Aorist is called the gnomic Aorist, because it is often used in gnomes, proverbs, or maxims. In Hom. it is often-also used in comparisons. Ohs. 1. — In expressing what usually happens, the Aorist some- times has av in order to express the case as one that may have occurred, ajid therefore may occur oftener : eKe^ev av, he may have said. In the same way the Imperfect is used, but re- ferring to an action in progress : avakaji^avav airav to. ■jroiriftaTa SirjpaiTaiv av, ri \tyoifv, taking up their poems I would asle what they meant. Ohs. 2. — The Aorist Indicative, especially in the 1 Pers. Sing, is frequently used to express actions and states begimiing only at the moment of speaking : iyiXaara, I burst out laughing ; poet, injivea-' epyov Kol jrpovoiav fjv Wuv, I praise the deed and the prudence which you have exercised. On the Hypothetical Aorist, § 537, &c. Digitized by Microsofi® ?§ 496. THE AOE. SUBJ., OPT., IMPEEAT., AND INFIN. 279 § 495. 5) T}ie Aorist Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, and Infinitive, denote a Momentary action simply, whether of the present, past, or future : ol rpiaKovra Trpo<;iTa^av aira- ja/yeiv Aeovra, tV airoddvoi, the Thirty commanded to take Leon away to die ; a/wopm, tL irpcorov fivrjaOS), I am in doubt what first to mention; firj dav/idaTjre, i^v irapd- So^ov elTTca to, be not surprised if I say something strange ; aive(fOai, to appear, ipavfjvai, to become apparent; voaelv, to be ill, voarjaai, to become ill ;■ TToKefielv, to be at war (bellum gerere), "TroXe/MricraL, to begin war (bellum inferre). (Comp. § 485.) Ohs. — This meaning, however, is not always attached to these forms ; and iTToke/irja-av may also signify simply helium gessenmt (§ 492). § 499. 3. The Futuee expresses the futurity both of an action in progress and of a Momentary action : ap^v ; from what class of men are you P Ohs. — On the Indicative in hypothetical sentences with or without av, § 536, &c., in sentences expressing a wish, § 515. On the Aorist Ind. with ay, to express what usually happens, see § 494. 2. 27ie Subjunctive. § 508. The Subjunctive expresses what ought to take place; it always refers to the present, to reality. Hence it is used in the following cases : § 509. 1. as a challenge in the first person: 'ieofiev, let us go \_eamus'\ ; ^epe B^, ra? fiapTVpuiiegative admonitions (comp. § 518) : firj tovto TroiJ^o-j;?, tie hocfeceris, you ought not to do this. § 511. 3. In hesiiafim^ i§imiieimm7heTe it is asked 284 THE OPTATIVE MOOD. § 51!t. what should be done : rt ^cS ,• what am I to say ? Horn. TTois Tt? roi ■7rp6(j)pa)v eireaiv ireiOnfjTai A.')(aiS}v ; how shall any of the Aehaeans willingly trust thy words? Be^ea-Oe -nfici^ n aTri(o/u,ev ; will you receive us, or are we to depart ? § 512. 4. with jxri ia sentences expressing fear or anxiety : firj op/poiKorepov § to a\.r]6e<; ehrelv, if it he not rather rude to say the truth. If the anxiety is to be negatively expressed, jjJfj ov is used : Horn, firj vv rot ov ^paicr/j,r} crKfjirrpov xal crTef:ifj,a 6eolo, lest the staff and wreath of the god should not help thee, i. e. it will cer- tainly be of little help to thee [Lat. vereor ne ncn or ut tejuvet]. Comp. §§ 533, 616, Obs. 3, § 621, a. § 513. 06s. — The Homeric language employs the Subjunctive of future events, quite like the Fut. Ind. to express a thing that is to be expected (§ 545) : ov yap ttco tocovs tSov dvipas ovSs 'IScofiai, for never yet did 1 see such men nor Tnay (shall) I see them, av is sometimes added in Hom. to this Subjunctive : ovk av toi ;i(pai'(r/ii7 Kidapis TO. T£ 6mp' 'A0po8iTT)f, the lyre and Aphrodite's gifts would not help thee. Comp. § 500, Ols. 3. The Optative. § 514. 1. The Optative alone (without the particle av) is used to express a wish that something may take place : poet. & iral, yevoio ■7raTpo<; e\nv)(iaTepo<;, boy ! may you be happier than your father [Lat. Pres. or Perf. Subj.]. The particles used (like Lat. utinam) to introduce a wish are : el (Horn, at), eWe (Horn. atOe), el yap, o)?. § 515. Ols. — If it is to be intimated that a wish is not to he realised, it is referred to the past, and expressed by the Imperfect or Aorist Indicative : tiff rjo-Ba Bwarbs Spav otrov 7rp6dvp,os ei, would that you were able to do what you wish ; eWe croi Tore a-uveyevop-qv, would that I then had met you. The same kind of wish is expressed by the Aorist m^eXov (properly " I owed ") and the Infinitive : oXeVflai &(j)e\ov TrjS' rjpepa, would that I had perished on that day [Lat. Imperf. and Plup. Subj.]. Comp. § 537. § 516. 2. The Optative with the particle av (Horn. Ke Digitized by Microsoft® ■§ 519. THE IMPEEATIVE MOOD. 285 or Kev) exTpresses possibiUti/ : tovto yivoir av, that (coald) might be ; rt '^ap yevoir av eX/co? /xei^ov -rj <^/\o? KaK6<; ; what greater evil could there be than a bad friend ? ttov ■Stjt' av elev ol ^evoi ; why ! where can the strangers be ? [Lat. Pres. and Perf. Subj.] The Optative with av is therefore called the potential Optative. § 517. Ohs. 1. — Hence the Optative witii av is used in modestly- expressed assertions : ovk hv Xe'yoi/it, I would not say [non dixerini] ; j>pa &v ava-Kevd^eardai e'lrj, it is perhaps time to hreah up ; ovk &v Svvaio firj Kafimv eiSai/ioveiv, you could not witJwut taking trouble he happy. Ohs. 2. — In the poets the Optative in a potential sense is also used without av: Horn, peia deosy id^Xmv Koi TrjXodev avSpa a-aacrai, a god who is willing can easily save a man even afar off. But this use of the Optative to denote a possihle and merely imaginary case is originally peculiar to this mood, and hence is preserved in depen- dent clauses, §§ 528, 529, 532, 06s., 546, 552, Ols. § 518. 4. The Imperative. The Imperative is the mood of command and, with negatives, of prohibition. A prohibition in the second person can be expressed only in two ways, viz. either with fj}) and the Present Imperative : /j,7) irparre, of a continued action, or with /t?; and the Aorist Subjunctive: fir; ■n-pd^ri';, of a Momentary action, do not do : raOrd fiot irpa^ov, tekvov, xal firj ^pdSvve fjiriS" iirifiVTjaOfj'i ere Tpoia<;, do me this, child, and delay not nor think further of Troy. In the third person also jj^rj with the Aorist Imperative is admissible : fj/riBel<; ifi&v TrposBoKrj(rdTa) aWco<;, let none of you expect otherwise. On the Infinitive instead of the Imperative, see § 577. On the Imperative as a substitute for a hypo- thetical clause, § 545, 05s. 3. B) The Moods in Compound Sentences. § 519. Preliminary remarks on the connexion of sentences with one'S!($»Mi^.'W'crosoft® 286 THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. §519. 1. Two simple sentences (§ 361, 2) may be combined in two ways, viz. eitlier a) so, that the one may be quite independent of the other — this combination is called Co-ordination, or Para- taxis (Trapdra^hs). b) so, that they mutually are referred to each other and express a complete thought only in their combi- nation — this combination is called Subordination, or Hypotaxis (vTroTa^is). 2. Of two Co-ordinate sentences each is a principal sentence, and in every respect independent of the other : Koivrj rj tvx^ ''^''■' "^o fieXKov doparov, fortune is common, and the future invisible ; tovto iryo) ovt e'cprjKa, ovre Xiyoi/u,!, dv, I have Tieither said that, nor could I say it. On the manner in which coordinate sentences may be combined, § 624, a. 3. By Subordination two sentences are combined in such a way that one expresses the principal idea, the other a secondary one. The former is called the leading sentence, the latter the secondary, dependent or Subordinate. One leading sentence often has several subordinate ones dependent on it. The moods of sub- ordinate sentences are in many ways determined by the leading sentence : Ti,(Tcra(f>epv7]<; Sia/SdWei, rbv ILvpov "TTjJo? rov dSeX(j}6v, d>^ i-irt^ovXevoL uvtS, Fissaphemcs brings a calumny against Cyrus before his brother, (saying) that he was plotting against him; Hom. trol dfi ea-TTofieO', ocjjpa av %at/Jj?9, we have followed thee thai thou mayst rejoice. 4. The Correlative connexion of sentences is a special kind of subordination. Of two correlative sentences, one always refers to the other. The one is called the Protasis, and the other the Apodosis. The Protasis, which requires to be completed by another sentence, is subordinate (3). The Apodosis is a leading sentence, which furnishes |jie.feng^es^i;g^^(^pletion • Hom. S, § 520. THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. 287 iSev, &<; fjLiv eSv x°^°'^' ^ ^^ ^^^ *^ wrath seized iiinir Horn. OTTirowv k et-Trrjada eVo? rolov k enaKovaai,^, the- Mnd of word you speak such you will hear. Obs. 1. — This correlation is frequently expressed ty two Pronouns- or Particles referring to eacli other (§§ 216, 217), as in the examples just quoted, hut not always : ci tv-tj ex^is avrCKiyciv,. dj/TiXeye, if you can in any way reply, reply, Obs. 2. — The'Apodosis often precedes the Protasis : oStos iScXno-ros- &.V e'ir] 0(TTis KOcriudnTara ras (ru/i0opaf <^epciv Sivarai, he would he the lest who can hear calamities with most dignity. 5. From the subordination of one clause to another^, there arises a compound sentence. Ols. 1. — The same thought may often be as well expressed in two Co-ordinate sentences as in one Compound sentence : /iijSevJ- (Tv^opav 6v£i5ltrj}$, kolv^ yap f] tv^tj, reproach no one with a calamity, for fortune is common ; or iwe\ tj Tixo koivt) iariy IxrjScvi (TVji^opav oveiBloTjs, since fortune is common reproach no one with a calamity. The Homeric language abounds in series- of Co-ordinate sentences (the paratactio arrangement). Ols. 2. — Frequently a word belonging to the Dependent sentence- is drawn into the Principal sentence, where it may appear in different cases. If the Principal sentence stands first the ar- rangement is called prolepsis (jrpokijijns, taking beforehand) ;• Kai fioL Tov vlov fine, el pepdBrjKe ttjv tcx"'!^ ^ '=°' f"" f OTe, el 6- viis fjffia^Tjxe TrjV Tex'"]" (§ 397). Horn. TtiSeifij/i' 6' ovk av yvoirjs, TvoTepoKTi p-erelr), you could scarce perceive on which side Tydides stood ; koI twv ^apfidpav iiTep,eKeiTo, as nokep.eiv iKavoi eirjo-av, he also took care that the barbarians should he capable of carrying on war. On the other hand a substantive may pas» from the Principal to the Subordinate sentence : Hom. fiera S ecraerai fjv tot aTnjvpav Kovprjv Bpicrrjos, among them also will b& the daughter of Srises whom I then tooh away (comp. § 602). 6. On the different kinds of sentences according to- their substance, § 624, &c. Only those kinds will here be noticed which are most important in regard to the- use of the Moods. § 520. The use of the Moods in Dependent sentences is subject to the following general rules : 1. The Indicative in Greek is Yery extensively used' even in Depend@i^'^^fetofcM'ee§°«1he Greeks merely 288 THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. § 521. annexing or inserting many sentences without any mark of dependence where the Latin language marks the dependence by the Subjunctive or Infinitive: [irj ft avepy, Tt? elfjbi, ash me not who I am \ne me interroges, ■quis si'wi]. § 521. 2. The Subjunctive in Dependent sentences also denotes always that which ought to take place, and •can generally be employed only when the leading sentence contains a principal tense. Every verbal form is regarded as a Principal tense which connects the action with the present ; hence the Fresent (except the Historical Present, § 487), the Perfect, and the Future Indicative, and aU tenses of the Sviijunctive and Imperative. § 522. 3. The Optative (without av) denotes some- thing merely conceived or supposed (§ 517, Obs. 2), and generally can be employed only when the Principal ■sentence contains an Historical tense. Every verbal form, however, is regarded as an Histo- rical tense which connects the action with the past, hence the Historical Fresent (§ 487), the Indicative of the Aorist, the Imperfect and Fluperfect. A Dependent clause, moreover, frequently has the Optative when this mood occurs in the Principal sen- tence. § 523. 4. In indirect speech (oratio ohliqua) the Opta' tive (without dv), but only after an Historical tense, is used to denote something which is to be stated, not as the opinion of the speaker, but of another person : at AO'qvaZoi TlepiicKea eKaKi^ov, oti, aTpaTrjyo'i wv ovk eTTe^dr/oi, eVt tou9 iroKefiLovi, the Athenians reproached Fericles because being a general he did not lead them out against the enemy \c[uod non duceret] ; ev^avro a-anrjpM dvaeiv evda irpcoTov et? n haberem ; rjKev u 290 MOODS IN DEPENDENT ASSEETIONS, ETC. § 527 ar/yiWwv tk, ta? 'EXareta KarelXTjTTTM, some one came- bringing the news that Matea was taken (direct: 'EX- dreia KaTeLXTjiTTat). Besides the Indicative, the Optative also is in this- case admissible, § 528, a. § 527. 2. The Subjunctive cannot occur at all in Dependent assertions, and in Dependent Interrogative sentences only if, when con- ceived as independent, they woidd necessarily have th& Subjunctive, and thus a) when the leading sentence has a Principal tense the Subjunctive must remain : ^ov\evojj,ai, ttm? o-e d-TToSpa), I am planning how to escape from you (direct according to § 511 : Troi? ce diroBpo)) [delibero, quo modo te effugiam'l ; 5) when the leading sentence has an Historical tense the Subjunctive may sometimes occur : i^ovXevofirjv, TTfti? ere drrohpS) ; but the Optative is more frequent in this case than the Subjunctive (§ 528, b). The Sub- junctive in Dependent Interrogative sentences accord- ingly is to be translated by may or shall. § 528. 3. The Optative (without av) may occur in such sentences : a) as a substitute for the Indicative (§ 526, b), i. e. when there is an Historical tense in the leading sen- tence, in case the Dependent sentence, if conceived inde- pendently, ought to have the Indicative : el-rrov, ■^vriva ryvmfjbijv exoifj-t (direct : el'xpv) [Lat. dixi, quam senten- tiam habereni] ; eyvcocrav oti Kevo'i 6 6Po<; rjBocTTa Siar^oi'; ; Hom. 'Tvheihrj Atofi'^Bei IlaXXa? 'A6i^v7] SuKe fievo<; Kal ddpcro? "v eKBrj\o<; fierd irda-iv 'Apyeioicrt, yevoiTO, to Tydides Diomedes Pallas Athene gave strength and courage that he might be distinguished amrnig all the Argives [JDiomedi Minerva animos dedit, ut insignis fieret inter cunctos Argivos']. Ois. — The distinction between the Subjunctive and Optative in sentences of purpose after an Historical tense consists in the rarer Subjunctive expressing the sentence more as an object or demand that may be attained, the Optative, more as the thought or conception of the acting person (comp. §§ 521, 522). On the Future Indicative with oTrtos, §§ 500, 553. On the hypo- thetical Indicative in Sentences of Purpose, § 500. On the non-intended conseriuence (coot*), § 565. § 533. Sentences expressive o! fear introduced by jiij (Lat. ne), or firj oi (Lat. ut") follow the construction of sentences of purpose Ccomp. § 512). They have the Subjunctive necessarily when depen- Digitized by Microsoft® §536. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 293 dent on a Principal tense : oi ^o(3ei, fj-ri ^Sij jrpcafivTepos f/s ; do you not fear to he already too old [nonne times, ne aetate provectior sis] ? The Optative is commonly used after an Historical tense : itjyofiovvro, jif) n irddoi, they feared he might suffer somewhat [vereiamtur ne quid illi accideret] ; tut not unfrequently also the Subjunctive : oi 'Adrivaloi Toiis ^vfijiaxovs eSfSUa'av, fifj aiTO(rrStcri.v, the Athenians were alarmed lest the allies shmdd revolt (comp. § 519, 5, Ohs. 2). Obs. — fir) and oTrtos f»^ after verbs of fearing seldom have the Future Indicative, oftener the Perfect Indicative when the fear refers to a completed action : ^o^ovfieBa, /irj ifiipoTipav fniaprfj- Kafi,fv, ivefear loe have failed in hoth. Mixed Examples : TOVTO ov irpoTjprjfjyai Xeyeov, Iva Tiaiv vjjloiv wKeydavaijiai, I have not chosen to say this in order to be hateful to some of you ; KOjOo? l\av Sera BelaOai, to? avvepyoii'; e')(oi, Cyrus thought friends necessary that he might have helpers ; AiSoixa, fir) iiriXadoifieda rrj^ oUahe ohov, I am- afraid lest we should forget the way home ; 4>iXt7r7ro? ev o^a) ?iv, fir] eKcpvyoi to, irpdyfiara avTov, Philip was in fear lest the affairs might escape him. in. — The Moods in Conditional Sentences. § 534. Conditional or hypothetical sentences belong to the Correlative sentences (§ 519, 4). The Protasis states a condition under which something is to occur ; the Apodosis states that something happens under a certain condition. Both sentences together form a Hypothetical Period. § 535. In the Protasis el (Horn, al), iav (i. e. el-av), contracted to ffv, or av (Horn, ei Ke-v), if, are employed ; in the Apodosis the particle av is sometimes used to show that it is true only under certain conditions. In Greek there are four principal forms of the Hypo- thetical Period : § 536. 1. in the Protasis el with the Indicative, in the Apodosis the Indicative without av, or the Impera- ,. '■ Digitized by Microsoft® ^ 294 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. § 537. This form of the Hypothetical Period is employed when the relation between the Protasis and Apodosis is to be represented as one absolutely necessary, actual, without any opinion being expressed by the speaker as to the probability or improbability of the case : el 6eol elalv, ea-Ti km epya 6ewv, if there are gods, there are alsi worhs of oods ; aol el irrj dWy BeSoKrai, "Keye koX BiBacrKe, if you have any different opinion, speak and explain. Ois. — All tenses may br used in this form, consequently also Historical tenses. If these latter occur, care must be taken not to confound this first principal form with the second : e^rjv croi amivai ix t^s TroXetor, (I /x^ rjpetrKov v Seovrav ewpd^dri, tov Kaipov, ovK ip,i (jiTfa-iv ainov yeyevrjtrdai, if anything right was done, he says that the occasion, not I, was the cause. A sure sign of the second principal form is the particle av in the apodosis. § 537. 2. in the Protasis, el with the Indicative of an Historical tense ; in the Apodosis, av with the Indicative of an Historical tense. This form of the Hypothetical Period is applied when the relation between the Protasis and Apodosis is to be represented indeed as one quite necessary, but at the same time neither of them as real. The Indicative in such conditional sentences is called tJie Hypothetical Indicative, which, therefore, always denotes the opposite to reality (comp. § 515). In such Conditional Sentences, a sentence contra- dictory of the Protasis may always be supplied in thought. Hence the Protasis may have the following forms : § 538. a) The Imperfect is used when a condition is stated as not existing at present: el tov ^IXnnrov ra SiKuia irpuTTOvTa ecopojv, a-(f>oSpa av Oav/xaarov ■^yovur/v avTov, if I saw (were to see) Philip acting justly, I should deem him very admirable. Here we may oppose to the Protasis the thoug^^^^^.^^^^w r^ SIkuiu irpdr- ^ 541. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 295 Tovra, but now I see Mm not act justly. The verb of this •contradiction to be supplied is in the Present. To this form corresponds in Latin the Imperfect Sub- junctive : si viderem, putarem. § 539. h) The Aorist Indicative is used when a con- ■dition is stated which did not take place in the past : aired avov av, el /xr) rj rwv rpiaKOVTa ap^r) KareXiBrj, I should have died, if the government of the thirty had not ieen overthrown. Here we may oppose to the Protasis the thought ■xareXvOri Si, but it was overthrown. The verb of this contradiction to be supplied is in the Aorist. To this form corresponds in Latin the Pluperfect Sub- junctive : periissem, nisi dominatio eversa esset. § 540. c) The Pluperfect is used when a non^completed condition is stated : el tovto d)fio\6y7]To ■^fuv, paSlco^ av SoefiaxoiJ'e6a,ifinthiswe had been agreed, toesliould easily carry the contest through. Here we may oppose to the Protasis the thought atO^ ou% mn,o')J)'y7}Tai, but we have not been agreed. The verb of this contradiction to be supplied is in the Perfect. To this form corresponds in Latin the Pluperfect Sub- junctive : si inter nos convenisset. § 541. The Apodosis to a Hypothetical Protasis of this kind may have either the Imperfect or the Aorist Indicative, or the Pluperfect with dv [Hom. Ke-v], and that quite independently as to which of the three tenses occurs in the Protasis. In this case, also, the Imperfect corresponds to the Latin Imperfect Subjunctive; the Aorist and Pluperfect, to the Latin Pluperfect Sub- junctive : el TOTe e^orjdijcrafiev, ovk av ■^vco'x^ei, vvv 6 ^iXtTTTTo?, if we then had rendered help Philip would ■not now be troublesome; el avrapKr] to, ^jf7)\eiTe, you would long since have perished through yourselves (i. e. if left to yourselves). § 545. 3. in the Protasis lav {fjv, av, Horn, el' Ke-v) with the Subjunctive ; in. the Apodosis the Indicative of a Principal tense or the Imperative. This form of the Hypothetical Period is used to express or prescribe something in regard to a case that is to be taken for granted and expected. It is admissible only in connexion with present and future time (§ 521), and is met with chiefly in maxims or proverbs : Set Ta jSekTiara avrl twv ■^Becov, av fjur] crvvafKJjoTepa i^, Xafi^dveiv, ycni must choose what is best rather than what is agreeable, when both together are not allowed; av to, TrapeXrjXvOoTa /jlvt] fj,ov€vrji;, afietvov irepi twv fieWovrcov ^ovXevcret,, if you remember the past, you will judge better about the future. Obs. 1. — The Aorist Subjunctive in such conditional sentences often comes very near to the Latin Future Perfect: veos av irovr](rps, yjjpas e§eis ev6a\es, si Juvenis laboraveris, senectute'in habebis jucundam. Obs. 2. — We find el with the Subjunctive in Homer, and occasion- ally also in Attic writers, in the same sense as eav, el av and el Ke-v : Soph. avSpa, Ke'l Tis 3 ^^^ ^* ^"^V TovTOiv ri j(alp€tv, rSXV eyo) Kairvov cKias ovk hv irpiai^riVj for be rich, if you will, at home, and live in the splendour of a great ruler; hut if joy he wanting to it, I would not give the shadow of smohefor the rest. (Comp. § 549.) § 546. 4. in the Protasis el with the Optative ; in the Apodosis av (Ke-v) with the Optative. This form of the Hypothetical Period is employed intentionally to represent what is said as quite uncertain, as merely possible, as a merely conceived case : el tc^; kskt-t)- fiivoi; elr) irkovrov, 'Xpauro he avTa> fj,rj, ap av evBatfiovol ; should any one possess wealth and not make use of it (suppose any one possessed), would he be happy P Comp. §§ 516, 517, Ohs. 2. The Present or Perfect Suhjunc- tive in Latin corresponds to this form: si possideat (or possederit), num beatus sit? Ohs. — ^Tn Homer the Protasis of such a period also sometimes has K€-v or av : et rovTa Ke Xd^oifiev, dpoifiedd kcv Kktos etrffkov, if we should get these two, we should get glorious fame. The Attic writers very rarely use av in the Protasis. § 547. Since et with the Optative intimates that a thing is merely possible, it expresses in reference to the past what possibly might have been, i. e., a repeated case (comp. § 494, Obs. 1) ; the Apodosis then usually has the Indicative : e'i ttov i^eXavvoi 'AaTvaiy7j<;, e'^' iinrov j^pvcro'^aXivov 'Trepirjye tov K.vpov, if ever Astyages rode out (might ride out) he tooTc Cyrus with him on a horse with a golden bridle. § 548. 61 with the Optative in the oratio obliqua, takes the place, accordfegf/tec/ §>528jrooifft€i' with the Ind. (1). ■298 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. §549 or idv with the Subjunctive (3), when a Hypothetical sentence depends on a Historical tense : fjBei, K.vpo<;, on €0 Ti jJ-axV^ TTore ^e-qaoi,, e/c t&v (plXcov avrS TrapatTTaTa^ "XtjiTTeov ett}. Gyrus knew that, if ever any battle should ■be necessary, Jte would have to take his supporters from his own friends. In direct language, Cyrus would say, ^v TTore Serjcrr) or el' Trore Seijcrei — XTjirriov iari. If in its relation to the time of the governing verb, the condition lies in the Future, the Future Optative is used. We seldom, in this case, find idv with the Subjunctive. The following general remarks also are to be observed in regard to Conditional sentences : § 549. 1. The two members of a Hypothetical Period are not so dependent on each other, as that the one necessarily requires a special form in the other. A Protasis of one form may, on the contrary, be joined with the Apodosis of another form. It occurs very frequently that a Protasis is in the first or third form, and the Apodosis in the fourth, in order to represent the Assertion which it contains as merely possible: el tovto A,6'7et?, dfjbaprdvoi^ av, if you mean this, you would be in ■error ; iav iOeXijarjTe irpdrrecv a^ia><; vfiaiv avr&v, i(Ta>e\ov oioiVc dvm o'c jroXXoi tcl niyiara Kaxa ■e^epya^fjOm, Iva oioiVe ^a-av aS koi dyaSa Ta fieyiara, I would that ihe many were capaMe£^/#g^,ifi'/4t!Xc0V ide\ei<; a/yairacrOai, rovv v 8e Tnffiovav /ioKiora Xmrova-' at t^avacr aidaiperoi, the sufferings afflict most which appear self-caused (comp. d with the Subj., § 545, Obs. 2). Homer has also the Fut. Ind. with /ce and the Eelative (§ 500 Obs.). § 555. If the verb in the leading sentence is an IRs- torical tense or an Optative, the Eelative without av with the Optative is used, quite in the same sense, as a substitute for the Subjunctive (§§ 522, 523). These l^elative sentences take the place of those mentioned in § 554, in the same way as the fourth kind of Con- ditional sentences takes the place of the third (§ 548) : sKeXevcrev avTol<; eTrecrdai, oiroi Tt? '^yolro, he bade them follow wherever any one might lead. Thus we read in Homer : 6v he k iyav dirdvevOe fid'^ij'i eOeKovra vo-ija-o) ULfivd^etv, ov ol eireiTa apKiov ia-a-etrai pa, as long as, till ; rjfio^, when ; and besides the Eelative expressions : a^ ov, ef ov, since ; iv a>, whilst ; a%pt ov, et? o, until. In these sentences the Indicative is used when any- thing actual is stated; the Optative may supply the place of the Indicative in indirect speech after an His- torical tense (§ 522). § 557. When a Temporal sentence states something merely conceived, occurring only conditionally, the par- ticle of time, like the Eelative, has dv (Ke-v) joined to it (§ 554). This occurs usually only when the leading sentence has a principal tense, and the Subjunctive must then follow. By combination with av, are formed the Hypothetical particles of time : orav, oirorav, enredv, or eTTrjv, eireihdv : iTreiBav iravra dKovcrrjTe, Kpivare, wlien ye have heard all, judge; eto? av am^rfTai to aicdfo';, Tore ■Xpv Kol Kv^epvijTTjv KoX TrdvT dvSpa irpodvfiov^ ehai, ad long as the vessel is safe, the sailor, the pilot, and every me ought to be zealous. Ohs. — Here also av is sometimes wanting (§ 554, Ohs. 2). Digitized by Microsoft® §558. MOODS IN TEMPOEAL SENTENCES. 303^ § 558. If the leading yerb is in an Historical tense, the particle of time with the Optative without av occurs in the same sense : eXeryev oti, hreihh irdvTa aKovcreiavy Kpiveoav. Obs. 1. — Here, too, the Optative often implies repetition (comp. § 554, Obs., and § 547), so that ore, djrdi-e, tVe/ with the Optative may he translated hy, " as often as," " whenever :" OTTore oi EXXT/veff rots TToKefiiois iirioiev, padicos a7T^<\>evyov, as- often as the Hellenes went up to the enemy, the latter readily fled. Obs. 2. — ^Here, too, exceptionally, av and the Suhjunotive some- times occur after an Historical tense (§ 555, Obs. 2). On irpiv with the Iniinitive, § 565. Mixed Hxamples of Relative and Temporal sentences. 'Tfiel'i Trdvra Xoyicrdfievoi ravra '^ecpoTovelS' , 6 Ti av vfitv SoKrj fjbdXiirra <7Vfi(f>epeiv ry iroXei, after havinff weighed all this, vote for what you thinh will most benefit the state ; 01 t&v ^apfidpcov WTTret?, Srivi evT%i^-)(dvoi,ev ^XXrjvi, irdvra'i e/creivov, the cavalry of the barbarians, whatever Greek they met, hilled them all; M.e')(pi<; av iyo) ■Sjkco, ai (nrovSal /jLevovTcov, till I come, let the treaty remain; Poet. Mjjttot' iTraiv>^arj<;, Trplv av el8fj<; dvSpa crar]va><;, opyfiv /cal pvdfiov Ka\ rpo-irov oWt? av §, never praise a man before you clearly know his temper, and bearing, and character ; 'ETretSi; n ifKpdryoiev, dviaravro Kal i-TTopevoirro, after having eaten something, they rose and proceeded ; 'O XcoKpdTr]'; roii'i avvovTa^ eTrolei ov fiovov OTTore VTTO T&v dvdpdyjrcov opavTO, wnk'yeijQaL twv dhiKwv teal alcT'Xpwv, oKka, Kal OTrore iv eprifjbLa elev, Socrates caused his disciples to abstain from what was unjust and shameful, not only when they were seen by men, but alsa when they were in solitude. Digitized by Microsoft® 304 THE INFINITIVE. § 559 Chap. XXII. — The Infinitive. A) Tlie use of the Infinitive gefMrally. § 559. 1. The Infinitive is a verbal noun (§ 225, 5) which, as such, has certain properties in common with a verb, others with a noun. With a noun the Infinitive agrees a) in expressing the action of a verb in general, like the nomina actionis (§ 342) : iroielv, Trpdrretv, doing; comp. -TToiTjai';, Tr/jfi^t?. b) in the fact that it may have the article like nouns : TO iroieiv, TO irpdrTeiv, the doing; comp. ■^ iroLi](TUi, r] With the verb, on the other hand, the Infinitive agrees a) in its power of denoting different times: Troieiv, •TroLrjaai, treiroi'qKevai, and of being formed from the Active, the Middle, and the Passive : iroiriaai, ■n-oirjira- ffdai, 'TTOiTjOrjvai. i) in being occasionally joined with dv, and thereby sharing the functions of mood (§ 575, &c.). c) in governing the same case as the verb to which it belongs : Troieiv rd SiovTa, doing ymir duty ; '^p'i^crdai Toi? oTrXot?, making use of arms. d) in being qualified, like the finite verb, by adverbs, never by adjectives: KaXSi^ Trpdrrew, doing nobly, but KaXr) -Trpd^K, a noble action. 2. The Infinitive is used very extensively in Greek. Very often, besides the more definite mode of expres- sion, by means of a Conjunction with a finite verb, the less definite, by means of the Infinitive is admissible. § 560. The Infinitive serves to complete and qualify different sorts of verbs, viz. : 1. those which express the occasion, capability, modality of an action : SvvavTai direkOelv, tltey can go Digitized by Microsoft® S562. THE INFINITIVE. 305 away ; jieli^ov ti exet elirelv, he has smnething greater to say (can say); Poet, oiiroi, crvvexOeLv aXKa a-viM^Ckeiv e(f>vv, I am horn not to Join in hating but in loving ; dp^o- fiai Xiyeiv, I begin to speak ; eTriTpiirco aoi, woi.eiv 6 ti- av 0ovXr], I leave you to do whatever you wish ; 2. such verbs as denote appearance, perception, opinion : So/cet? ajxapTelv, you seem to have erred ; 3. such verbs as denote striving after something, im- pelling towards, or frightening, deterring, preventing, something : fir] cnrevBe ifkovTelv, do not hasten to he rich ; Horn. KeXeai p,e fwOrjo-aaOai, you bid me to speak ; •7ravTeS)v to i^/Mo-v Tov tTTpaTevfiarov KaTeKiire ^vXarreiv to aTpuTOTreBov, JCenophon left half the army behind to guard the camp ; •7rapi')(a) i/j,avTov rm laTpm Tefiveiv koI KUietv, I give myself up to the physician to cut and burn (me) ; iTLelv BtBovat TLvi, to give any one (something) to drink. Ohs. — Nqt only with verts of this kind, but also with those men- tioned in § 560, this Infinitive has a much wider application in Ilonaer : apuTTevetTue fudxecrdai, he used to he tlie first in fighting ; da-l koI olSe rdS' elnefiev, these too, then, are (able) to say this ; ^ij Uvat, he started to go ; ^vverjKe ^d^ecdai, he urged (them) to fight. § 562. The Infinitive, serves to complete or qualify adjectives of different kinds, partly in the sense of the English Infinitive with to, partly corresponding to the Latin supine in u : 'xaXeirov evpeiv, difficult to find [diffi- cile inventu]; oiK^jt'^^pj^i^i^^e^aa-dai, a house very X 306 THE INFINITIVE. §563. pleasant to live in ; af to? eo-rt TrXi^ya? Xa^elv, Tie deserves to get blows ; o^vrarol iare yvavao to, fnjdevra, you are very Iceen in perceiving what is said ; S€ivb<; T^yeiv, powerful in speaking ; 6 ■xpovo^ ^payv'i d^t&j? Sir]yija-ar aOai TO, rrrpaxOevra, the time is short for worthily nar- rating what has happened. Ohs. — In Homer such Infinitives are particularly frequent : ixeya Koi ia-aofievoiai, TwBia-Bai, great also for posterity to learn ; 6eUiv dvefiotrriv ofioioi, like the winds in running ; so with some substantives : duvfw. iSea-dat, a wonder to see. On otoffj oiosTe, and o(tos, with the Inf., § GOl. § 5G3. The Infinitive, as in Englisli and Latin, is used as the Subject of a sentence to which the predicate is a neuter adjective, a substantive, or an intransitive verb : Trdcnv aSelv '^aXeTrov, to please all is difficult ; KivSvvo'; iartv riTTaaOai, there is danger of being worsted ; crov epyov Xeyetv, speaking is your business. § 564. The infinitive is used in a freer way, without depending on a particular word, with and without the particle as, in several phrases almost like a free Accusative (§ 404) : as emelv, so to speak ; efio\ SoKcIv, as seems to me ; oKiyov Suv, almost ; to vvv etvai, for the present ; Kara toiito eluai, in this respect. On (Kav dvai, § 570, Ohs. § 565. The Conjunctions to?Te, so that; -rrpiv, before, and its Homeric synonym 7ra/ao?, are joined with the Infinitive : ^iXofiadeaTaTO'; r/v o JLvpo^, S^re irdvTa •Kovov cLvarkrivaij tov hraivelaOai, eveKa, Cyrus was very fond of learning, so as to endure any trouble for the sake of being praised; -Trplv rrjv a,p')(r)v op6S)<; virodea-Oat, fidraiov '^yovfiai irepl t?}? reXei/T?)? ovrivovv Troieiadai, Xoyov, before properly establishing the foundation I deem it useless to make any words whatever about the end. Obs. 1. — These conjunctions may also he joined with the finite verb (oomp. § 556) ; aore with the Indicative represents a sentence as an actual consequence more independent and by itself, and may accordingly be often translated by therefore, lience : ds rnv varepaiav ovv nKf v, as6' ol 'EXKrives ichpovritov. Digitized by Microsoft® ' rf i » § 567. THE INFINITIVE. 307 he came not on the following day, therefore the Hellenes hecame anxious. Ohs. 2. — For irpiv we also find Trpiv rj, prtus-quam; properly irpLv, when, it means sooner than, is always to te regarded as an abbreviation for irpiv rj, npiv originally answering entirely to the Latin prius. On the Infinitive after rj, than, see the following §. On i are, on condition that, with the Infin. § 601. § 566. After a comparative the Infinitive is preceded by ij asrc or ^ alone in the sense of than that: t^o^ovjiai iifj n fisi^ov i) &sTt %tftiiP^f^£iscerentur. 308 THE INFINITIVE. § 5o*. The Accusative with the Infinitive is properly dependent on the verb of the leading sentence (comp. the English : I hear you sing, I hid you go), and is explained by the prolepm meotioned in § 519, 5, Ois. 2. Instead of rjyyeCKav on 6 Kvpos ivUrjo-ev, we might have : fjyyeiXav tov Kvpov on eviKrja-ev ; and for on iv'uaia-ev, viKrja-ai, according to § 560, 2 ; thus we obtain ilyyeCKav TOV Kvpov viKTia-ai. If the governing verb is intransitive or passive, the Accusative is of a freer kind (§ 404) : iXirls iari Ts-avra KoXas ex^'") '^'s™ '^ ^i'^ *^'*' '^^^ '^ iDell. Ohs. 1. — The impersonal verbs Set and xP'ht '* *'^ necessary, are joined with the Accusative and Infinitive like the Latin oportet : Xp^ Tokfiav x°^^7rot(Ttf eV oKysa-i Kelpevov avbpa, the man thai lies in painful sufferings ought to he courageous. Obs. 2. — As a continuation of an Accusative with the Infinitive the same construction may be employed in indirect speech m Eelative sentences and after Conjunctions, denoting time and circumstances : roiavT arra o-cj^as €aa-Kev elvat ^i,o<; vlo^, Alexander dicebat se esse Jovis filium ; iyw ovk ofioKoyija-eo ukXi^to'; rjKew, ahX iiiro crov K€K\r]fievo<;, I will not acknowledge that I am come unin- vited, hut invited by you; ol BoKovvTe<; ao^ol elvai, they who seem to be ivise. Obs. — From the Predicate ixav joining the freer Infinitive ehm (§ 564), arises the combination excov eivai : tovto ckcov elvat ov iroifjira, this (if I am) to he of free wiU I will not do. § 571. 5. In many cases a personal instead of an impersonal form of expression is used in Greek, the Subject of the Infinitive being made the Subject of the leading sentence ; so instead of the English, " it was announced that Cyrus had conquered " (rjyyiXOT] tov Kvpov vcicrja-ai), we have, d KOpo? r^yyeXOrj viKpiffai,, Cyru^ was announced to have conquered. This form of expression occurs not only — as in Latin with diatur, videtur — with SoKei, eotKe, it seems; Xeyerai [dicitur, - traditur'\ ; dyyiXXeTai, it is announced ; 6/j,oXoyelTai,, it is agreed, but also with crv/i^aivei, it happens, and with several adjectives with el/j^l, as: BiKaw;, jtist ; eVtTJj- Seto?, eVt/catpto?, fitting ; eVt'So^o?, probable ; avar/Kam, necessary : avT6<; fioi, Sokco ivOdhe Kara/ievelv, it appears to me that I myself shall remain here ; hUaio<; el ariew avOpmirov^, it is just that you should lead mm (you are justified in leading men) ; iTriSo^oi. elai, to uvto ireiae- aOai, it is to be expected that they will suffer the same ; Poet, irpeiraiv ecj)v<; irpo Toi>vSe (j>coveiv, it becomes you to speak in their presence. The Personal construction is explained, like that of the Accusative with the Infinitive (§ 567), by prolepsis (§ 519, 5, Obs. 2). For ■^yjeXOr] on 6 KO/oo? ivUrjae there might be ^iffl^'&^d^TO^ on evLier^ae, and for 310 THE INFINITIVE. §575, this again yyyeXOr] 6 KOpo? viKrja-ai, ; for iiriSo^ov eariv^ oTb TO avTo TTeiaovrai — iirl^o^ol elcn ort to avTO Trei- crovrac, and hence iirLBo^oi elai to avTo -jreiaecrOac. Ols. — The Accusative construction, however, is almost every- where applicatle : Xeyerai rbv Kvpov viKrjOai, dicimf Cyrum vicisse. § 572. 6. Predicative qualifications referring to a Genitive or Dative may be in these cases : ^p^ov iiri tivo. tS)v Sokovvtwv aocpwv etvai, I came to one of those who seem to he wise ; eX&yov roi? SoKovcri v StKTvav a-KOTTovs KaBioTafjiev, we place scouts that the hare may not escape from the nets. (Comp. the rare use of the Lat. Geni- tive of the Qetym^^^^f^ffff^^^j^imt^ndae libertatis.) 312 THE INFINITIVE. § 576. 4. Dative. The Dative is eepecially frequent to express Instru- mentality (§ 438) ; it is then, like the Latin Ablative of the Gerund, to be translated, 5y : ^iXiTTTro? KSKpaTijKe Tco TTpoTepo'; (§ 570) ttjOo? Toii'; TroXefiiov; ikvai, Philip has gained the victory ly going first against tJie enemy [comp. the Latin, docendo discimus'] ; also with the pre- positions iv, in ; eVt, on, on condition that ; irpo';, besides, and others : tt/so? tw /juTjSev ix t?}? irpea^euK Xa^eXv T0U9 al-)(jj,a'Xa>Tov<; sk twv ihlwv iXvad/j/rjv, besides gaining iiothing from the embassy, I set free the captives at my own expense. D) The Infinitive with av. § 575. By the addition of av the Infinitive acquires a potential or hypothetical meaning, and denotes therefore either that something only might happen, or that under certain circumstances something vjould happen, or would have happened. Here two cases are possible : 1. the Infinitive with dv can be replaced by the Opta- tive with av : fiaki(TTa olfiai av crov "TTvOeadab (pTi irvBol- fiTjv av), I think I could learn it best from you; BoKeiTe fioc TToXu ^eKTiov av nrepl tov TrdXifiov ^ovXevaaaOai, (oTi av ^ovXeva-aicrde), el tov tottov Trj<; %copas 7r/309 fjv "TToXe/MecTe ev6v/j,7j6eir]Te, it seems to me you would much better settle about the war if you took into account the localities of the country against which you are making ivar. This Infinitive with, av therefore answers either to the Potential Optative (§ 516), or to the apodosis of a Hypothetical Period of the fourth form (§ 546). § 576. 2. The place of an Infinitive with dv can be supplied by the Hypothetical Indicative with dv : Kvpo'; el i^iwaev, dpiaTO<; av SoKec dp'^^cov yevicrOai, (ol/j,ai oTt, av iiyiveTo), if Cyrus had lived, it seems he would have become one of the best of rulers ; tov<; raOra a/yvoovvra'; 'ZeoKparr]'; avBpaTiroBmBei^ av KeKknaSai '^jeiTO (i, e. X. Digitized by Microsoft® ? 578 THE PARTICIPLES. 313 rjyetro, on el rive:; ravra '^yvoovv, itceKKriVTO av avBpa- TToScoSet?), Socrates thought that, if any did not know this, they would be called slavish. This Infinitive with Hv thns answers to the apodosis of a Hypo- thetical Period of the second form (§ 537, &c.). Obs. — The context must show into which of the two forms the Infinitive with av is to be resolved. E) The Infinitive instead of the Imperative § 577. belongs almost entirely to poetry ; it is used for the second and, rarely, for the third person. The Subject and Predicate are in the Nominative: Horn. GapaSiv vvv, Ai6/J/r]Se^, iirl Tpcoecrcrt fid-y^eadai,, cou- rageously now, Biomede, fight against the. Trojans ; iralha E ifiol \vcrab re (jjlXrjv to, t diroiva Se^etr^at, deliver up to me my dear child and accept the ransom. Chap. XXIII. — The Participles. Preliminary Remark. A Participle, like the Infinitive (§ 559, l), is a verbal- noun (§ 225, 5). It has the same things in common with the verb as the Infinitive, the same points also in common with the noun ; but it is distinguished from the Infinitive inasmuch as the latter resembles a nomen actionis, whereas the Participle has the nature of an adjective. § 578. A) Their Attributive Use. A Participle, corresponding to an adjective or to a relative sentence, is joined to a substantive, to ascribe to it a permanent quality : TroXt? evpeia'; aryvia'; exovaa, i.e. Horn, evpvdyvia or ^ evpeia^ aryvM^ ^%^'> ^ ^^^2/ having broad streets ; al KaXovf^evai, Alokov vfjaoi,, the so- called islands of Aeolus ; 6 Trapoov Ka.ip6<;, the present opportunity (comp. p^if dl^JVlicrosoft® 314 THE PARTICIPLES. §579. 06s. — Like an adjective the Participle also becomes a substan- tive by having the article prefixed : ol irapdvres, (hose present (comp. § 379); d nxdiv, the first comer. Such participles may often be translated by substantives : 6 Spauras, the doer ; oj \eyovTfS, the speakers ; to av/icfifpov, the advantage ; ra Seovra, the duty ; npos to TeXcvToiov (§ 361, 8) ix^av exaarov tS>v irpXv virap^avTtav Kplverai, everything that happened before is judged of m accordance with its final result. On the peculiar use of the Put. Part, with the Article, § 500. B) Tlieir Appodtive Use. § 579. The Participle serves to ascribe to a substan- tive a merely transient quality or activity. In this case the Participle is a shorter and less definite mode of expression for what is otherwise expressed by sub- ordinate clauses with conjunctions of the most different Idpds (comp. § 583, Ohs.). A Participle used in this way is : § 580. 1. Temporal, with the distinctions of time nientioned in Chap. XX. (esp. § 496) : 7rj0o?6;;^6T6 tovtoi<; dva/yiyvcoa-KOfievoti; tov vovv, give attention to this whilst being read; Horn, w? dpa ^avijcrati ave^-^crero = 67ret o)? icpcovrjae, after having thus spoken he went away. Observe especially e^^toz; and ^epa>v in descriptions, which may frequently be trans- lated by the English with : ra? i/au? airea-Teikav 'expvra 'AXKiBav, they sent away Aleidas with (having) the ships ; "XpwjMevo'i, in a similar sense : ttoXX^ '^s-)(vr] j^cofiepo^, with (using) much skill. So also, dp^ofJiepo';, at first ; reXevTav, at last ; Bi,aXnra>v •^(povov, after a time ; ev itolSsv, fortunately ; KaXw'i Trot&v, Justly. The Participle civ cannot be omitted when being is to be ascribed to a substantive : 'AX/ct/StaS?;? en Trat? av iOavfid^ero, while yet a boy (Lat., merely puer) Aldbiades was admired (§ 428, Obs.). § 581. 2. Causal and final, where the Participle is to be resolved by since, by or fy Digitized by Microsoft® §583. THE PAETICIPLEM. 315 the fact tJiat, when referring to the present or past, and by that, in order that, when referring to the future : ovk eoTiv aBiKovvra Svvafuv ^e^aiav KTrjcraaOai, firm power is not to he gained by acting unjustly; tov aSi/covvra irapa tov; Sf/tacrTa? ar/etv Set Blktjv Bcoa-ovra, he who acts unjustly ought to be brought before the judges in order that he may suffer punishment. § 582. 3. Concessive, a somewhat rarer use : t6 vBap evatvoTarov apurrov ov, water is the cheapest though it is the test ; ifiels icfiopaiticvoi to imrpayfieva Kai Svsx^paimvTes rjycTc r^v elprjvriv o/ims, though suspicious of what had been done, cmd indignant, you still maintained the § 583. 4. Hypothetical, a very frequent use, where the Participle is to be re- solved by if, and corresponds to one of the forms of the Hypothetical Protaseis mentioned in § 534, etc. : roii? Kplvat, fUKpa Twv Trporepov ttotc prjdevraiu fivrj^oveva-avras, I thinh you would tetter judge about what I am now going to say, when you rememier a little 0)^i?feai?*i^aiwfc^afeiW® 316 THE PARTICIPLES. § 5St, C) The Participle with an Absolute Case. § 584. The Participle with a noun or pronoun in the Ahsolute Genitive (§ 428) or Accusative, serves to point out the circumstances mentioned in §§ 579-583. The noun or pronoun to which the Par- ticiple refers may be regarded as its subject, since from it proceeds the action expressed by the Participle. This construction, therefore, may be resolved by a separate clause, beginning with a conjunction, in which the word in tne Genitive or Accusative must appear in the Nominative : Tovratv avayiyvaa-KOfievaiv tov vovv irposfx^Te, attend whilst this is being read (comp. § 580). 1. The Absolute Genitive (comp. § 428), for ■which may be substituted clauses with temporal, causal, concessive, or hypothetical conjunctions : Hepi- K\eov<; '^yovfievov 'ttoXKo, Kau koXo, epya a/wehel^avTO ol ^AOrjvaloi, as long as Pericles led them (Pericle duce), the Athenians produced many and splendid works ; vavfia')(ia<; 'yepofj,ev7]<; rerrapa^ Tpiijpei,<; Xafi^dvei Topyanrai;, navali pugna facta Crorgopas quattuor triremes capit ; 6\7](; ri)? TToXeo)? ev rot? 'jroXefiiKOK kivSvvok iTriTpewofiem]'; rm v and axmi/, which very much resemble Par- ticiples : cfiov eKovTos, with my luill ; ifiov ukovtos, me invito. The Poets take other licences. c) As the Greclffl have two active Participles to express a past action, they use the Absolute Genitive of a Passive Participle less Digitized by Microsoft® § 587. THE PARTICIPLES. 317 frequently than the Romans do their Ahsohite Ablative: 6 KOpor, Tov Kpo1(rov viKr\tras, Karea-Tpe^jraTo Toiis A.v8ovs, Cyrus, Croeso vicia, lydos sibi suhjecit. d) The Absolute Genitive is employed even where the subject of the Participle is mentioned also in the leading sentence: ravr dmvTos avTov eSogc n X/yeii/ ry ' Aa-rvdyei, after thus speaking he seemed to Astyages to say something (of importance). ' [Lat. ita locutus — visus esi.] § 586. 2. Tlie Absolute Accusative is usual in the case of some impersonal verbs, especially Uov, it being a duty; e^6v, irapov, it being allowed, feasible; Trpo^rjKov, it being befitting; So^av, it having been decided : ovBeh i^ov elprjVTjv op/eiv TroXe/iov alprjcreTai,, no one, being allowed to be at peace, will choose war ; ttoXXAkk vjuv i^ov TrXeoveKTrjcrai ovk rjdeKrjaare, though it was often easy for you to gain more you were unwilling ; oi %vpa- Kovcrwt Kpavyfj ovk oXiyr/ i-^^pwvTo, ahvvaTOV 6v iv vvktI dXkw T(p a7)fji,rjvai, the Syracusans raised no small shout, it being impossible to make a signal during the night by - anything else. D) Supplements to Participles. § 587. For the sake of greater clearness, certain par- ticles are added to Appositive Participles, as well as to Participles joined with an absolute case ; they give more distinct prominence to the idea expressed by the Par- ticiple. Such Supplements to Participles are : 1. ajxa, at the same time, denoting contemporaneousness : ot 'EXXtj^cs ijia.)(ovTO ajxa iropevojiivoi, tile Hellenes fought vjhilst marching. 2. fiera^v, between, amidst, with pretty nearly the same meaning : iireax^ f-^ XeyavTa fiera^v, he checked me in the midst of my speech. 3. airUa and eidvs to express immediate succession : tm Scliw Kspa fvdiis aTTO^ePtjKoTi f jre/ceivro, they pressed upon the right wing immediately after its landing. 4. ToVe, ilra (Kara), eireira, ourfflj, are added to the principal verb, to indicate that the action of the Participle was past before, and laKe up the substance of it with various accessory ideas : KaToXin-ww ^povpav ovTois eV o'Qi&*ii9^)^f0^i9^l^ having left a garrison S18 THE PAETICIPLES. §583 he thus went away home ; Poet, /i^ vvv ^vyovres el6^ SKwfiev varcpoy, lest though now escaping we should afterwards he caught. 5. KaiTTfp (more rarely Kai alone), with a Participle, to be trans- lated though, renders prominent the concessive meaning : Kaimp ovrat a-QCJios toy jSeXrtcoz' hv yevoto, though so wise you might perhaps become better ; Homer often separates Kai from nep : ol Se Kai a^vijifvoi nep iir avra rjSv yekacrcrav, and though vexed they heartily laiighed at him ; op.a>s in the same sense though or yet, is used with the principal verb : Herod, varcpov aTriKopevoi t^s av/i^oX^s ifielpovro oiMcos Berja-ao'dai roits Mrjdovs, though they did not come till after the engagement, yet they desired to see the Medes. 6. are with a Participle (like oTov, ota Sri) answers to the English in as far as, since, and brings into prominence its causal meaning : Karedapde Trdvv ttoXv are p^oKpav rcov wktS)u ovo'av, he slept a great while since the nights were long. [Comp. Lat. quippe guum, quippe ijp.ii.'\ § 588. 7. (»s and a)velv m e/M)v /iWTj? TreXa?, you may speak out since (in the convic- tion that) I alone am near ; Xiyei to? SiBaKTov ovarjf; T^? dper^'i, he speaks thinking that virtue is capable of being taught; "Tre^^f^^T^^^^^g^^/Xou? cb? airk fiev § 590. THE PAKTICIPLES. 319 e/cooTOS ov iroirjo-wv to So^av, rov Se m-Xria-lov -TTpd^ovra (absolute Accusative), you looked at one another thinking that each one of you would not do what was decided wpm,, hut that his neighbour would. E) The Predicative Participle. § 589. The Participle, like the Infinitive (§ 560), serves to complete a verb, by attributing to a word con- tained in the sentence something which is not a mere addition but an essential part of the statement. The Supplementary or Predicative Participle may refer either 1. to the subject of the sentence (§ 361, 5, 7, 8) : iraveade ae\ nrepl rwv avreov ^ovKevofjuevoi, cease always consulting about the same things ; ta-Ot, Xvirnjpb'; civ, know that you are troublesome, or 2. to a dependent word in the sentence (comp. § 361, 10, and § 403) : o TroXe/io? eiravcre tou? ' AOt^vuIov; asl irepl tSxv avrav ^ov\evo/j,evov<;, the war caused the Athenians to cease from always consulting about the same things ; olZa avrov Xvirrjpbv ovra, J know Jdm to be troublesome. In English such Predicative Participles are mostly expressed by the Infinitive with to, or by sentences with that, sometimes also in other ways. In some cases however, the English language also makes use of a Participle in a similar way : I- feel myself affected by it, he found him armed (comp. § 361, 10, Obs.). The verbs which admit of a Supplementary Participle may be classified as follows : § 590. 1. Verbs which express a condition, as : exco, I am in a condition ; rvyxava, I chanee to be (Poet. Kvpem) ; Xavdavto, I escape notice ; (palvofiai, StjTww, <^avep6^, Brpw'; elfii, lam manifest; eoiKa, I seem ; Sia- reXio), Bidr/co, I continue ; avk')(pfi,ai, KapTepico, I hold out, endure ; Kafivm, I grow weary ; a-rrop/opevw, I despair ; as weU as the verbs which denote the beginning, inter- rupting, or ending (l>^imm^^vm:ef^ff^iJ.ai, I begin ; . 320 THE PARTICIPLES. § E9L I am beforehand ; oi^ojx.ai,, I depart, I am off ; eVt-, Sto- Ti.eiTTco, I break off, I suspend ; iravai, I make to cease (pravofjuM, I cease). In translating we frequently change the Participle into the principal verb, and render the principal Greek verb by an adverb. Examples : Kripv^a<; e')(ai (more emphatic than iKi^pv^a, comp. Lat. nuntiatum haheo), I have announced ; rk erv^e Trapayevofievo'; ; who happened to be present ? BiareKw evvotav e^cov Traaiv vjjuv, I continue cherishing a kindly feeling for you all ; UT] Kafifj^ (plXov dvSpa evepyerwv, don't grow weary of benefiting a friend ; aXKa fjuvpla eirCKeiira) Xeycov, I re- frain from saying innumerable other things ; Horn, clyj^er dTTOTTTdfievoi;, he luas gone flying away. Obs. — Even the verb eljii may be joined witb a Participle : rj rovTO ovK eVrt yiyvo^ievov irap Tjfuv ; is this not liajppeniruf (usual) among us? A Participle is necessarily so used witli fi/ii to complete certain verbal fonns, comp. §§ 287, 291, espe- cially the Participle of the Perfect or Aorist with Afii instead of the Future Perfect : hehaxais or bovs crjiJiai, I remember. In several of these the object is in the Genitive according to § 420. Examples : to? elhov avTOV<; ireKafyvra';, oi XerfkaTOvvTei eu6v<; aevyov, cum eos appropinquantes vidissent, praedantes praeda stdtim relicta fugam capes- siverunt; iJKOvcrd Trore XcoKpdTov; "rrepi cf)iXcov Stdkeyo- fjbhov, I once heard Socrates discoursing about friends [audivi Socratem disputanteni] ; 'Keppovqaov Kare/uide TToXei? evBexa rj SooSeKa ej^ovcrav, he learnt that the Chersonese had eleven or twelve cities ; dvOpeoTroi /caXol Koyadol eTreiSdv yvdoaiv dTricrTovfievoi (comp. § 483, l), ov (fiiXovcri roil'; dTnaTovvTa<;, when good men perceive that they are distrusted, they do not like (hose who distrust tlvem. Digitized by Microsoft® S 595. THE PARTICIPLES. 321 Ois. — With (TvvocSd fioi, 1 am conscious, the Participle may be connected with the Nominative of the Subject or the Dative (j»oi) : ffiavTW a-vvfiSeiv oiStv iTnardfievos or eTriora/ieVa), I was conscious of knowing nothing. In the sense of " to be aware " it may also have the Accusative witli the Participle. § 592. 3. Verbs of emotion, as : %a^jO(B, TjBofiai, Tepirofiai, I rejoice ; arfairaco, I am satisfied; ■^aXeircSi; ^ipco, aegre fero; dyPofxai,, I am dissatisfied ; cuyavaKTeoj, I am vexed ; atVywo/iat, I am ashamed; iMerafiikofjiai, or yaera/ieXet fioi, I repent. Examples : Horn. 6 he (ppeal repweT aKovav, but he rejoiced in heart at hearing (it) ; (jbeTafjueKei avT& ^jrevcra- fievw, he repents having told a lie. § 593. 4. Verbs oi pointing out and asserting. as : SeiKVVfit, a-jroipalveo, J shew ; e^eXer/yw, I prove, convict ; a/yyeWco, J announce ; o/j-oXoyeoi, I assent. Examples : ^tXtTTTro? irdvTa eveKa eavTov ttokSv e^ekrj- XeyKTai, it has been proved that Philip does everything for his dim sake ; anro^aivovo't, roix; cpevyovra'i •jraKai TubvTjpov'; ovTa<;, they make manifest that the banished had long been base. § 594. Obs. — The Infinitive according to § 560 may be used as vcell as the Participle with many of the verbs enumerated in §§ 590- 593, but in a somewhat different sense : Sp^o^ai SiSda-Ktov, I iegin to he a teacher ; apxa/iai SiSaVicf tv, / begin to teach (my teaching) ; alcrxivonai \iyav, I am ashamed though I say it ; aurxivofuu Xeyeiv, shame prevents me from saying. F) The Participle with av. § 595. By tbe addition of the Particle av the Par- ticiple, in every case like the Infinitive (§§ 575 and 576), acquires the meaning of possibility or that of an Apodosis in a hypothetical /Sentence, and may therefore be resolved in two ways : 1, by the Optative with dv (§§ 516 and 546) : eya> elfii tcov rjMo)^ fiev av eK^yOevrmv, ■^Bia><; S' av iXey^dvTwv, I am one of those who tvould gladly be refuted {ol hv e\ey^i^^,hfrf4^^sgf^ gladly refute {ot An Y 322 THE PAETICIPLES. § 59«. eXiy^eLav) ; evpia-KO) ravTTjv av fiovriv r^evoiievrjv twv jjueXKovToiv KivSvvcov airoTpoTrrjv, I find this would be the only "prevention of the coming dangers (on av ryevoiro) ; Lcr/jLev Koi v/MO,'; av koX aXKov;, iv ry ainfj Svvdfiet rjfuv yevofievov^, SpMvraKaTe. hpKov. 4. If the word referred to by the Eelative is a mere pronoun, the Eelative remains quite alone, but stands in the case which the Demonstrative would have had : ^fivrjcrde ov 6/J,c0fi6KaTe = fie/ivrjcrOe tovtov o dfia>/j,OKaTe, remember that which you have sworn ; a/teXw mv fie Bel 'jrpoLTTeuv = d/ieXS rovrwv a fie Set irpdrTew, I neglect what I shmdd do. Digitized by Microsoft® 324 PECULIAEITIES OF KELATIVE SENTENCES. § 59& § 598. Attraction, however, can occur only under the- following conditions : 1. The Relative clause must be closely connectecC with the word to which it refers, must be an essential part of it. Attraction is iuadmissible in a Relative, clause,, which only loosely adds a remark to a substantive,, which might quite as well be wanting, or be annexed by means of Kai and a demonstrative pronoun. 2. The sentence must be such as would have the' Relative pronoun in the Accusative, but its antecedent in the Genitive or Dative: rt? rj cc^eXeia toZ? ^eoZ?- TV^')(avei ovaa airo t&v Bcopcov Siv -Trap' tificov Xafi^d- vovcriv, what advantage have the gods from the presents- which they receive from you ? eh^epere acj)' oaav eKaa-To av Kvpo? So), we shall trust the commander whom, Cyrus gives (us), (tovto) ov). Ols. — Attraction very seldom takes place with other cases : iiv iVTvyxo-vtii fioKuTTa ayafiai (re, i. e., Tovrav oTs, -Z" admire you most of all I meet. § 599. AU clauses subordinate to a Relative Sen- tence, so far as they consist of words referring to the Relative, and are capable of inflexion, must likewise be modified iu the Attraction : 0?? oSaiv vixeTepoi<; e^eh TovToi el/ii, that is quite impossible to such a man as I am. Sometimes the article is prefixed at the same time : toIs olois Jjpv, to such as we. By the same ellipsis ostisovk acquires the fixed meaning, who- ever, i. e., any whatever : ovk coti Sixaiov av&pos /SXaTrreii' ovtivovv dyOpaiircov, it is not a just man's nature to injure any person what- Digitized by Microsoft® ^603. PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. 325 «w (i. e., any one, whoever he may be). [Comp. Lat. r), godlike Polyphemus whose power is the greatest among all the Cyclops, and him (whom) the nymph Thoosa lore. Chap. XXV. — ^Inteeeogative Sentences. § 606. 1. The simple direct, question may be intro- duced by the Interrogative pronouns or adverbs men- tioned § 214, etc. In Greek several different questions may be included in one interrogative sentence: Hom. Tt's •jTodev eh avhpwv ; what man, whence are yon ? cnrb rovTtov (j^avepov jev^crerai, rk rivo^ atrw^ eariv, from this it will be clear who is chargeable with what (who is chargeable and with what). 06s. 1. — An Interrogative pronoun may be joined with a demon- strative : ayyfklav €pv ; what ham you passed through, that? tI iiaB&v; what have you got to know, that ? Ti iraj9av dSoceis 1-171' narpiba ; what have you passed through to make you act unjustly towards your country f § 607. 2. When the question refers not to a single word, but to a whole sentence, it may be indicated a) merely by the tone of voice : oii (po^el fiij rfirj TTpecy^vrepo^ §<; ; do you not fear that you are already too old ? h) by Interrogative particles, which, in translating into English, cannot always be expressed by separate words, but often may be rendered by the position of the words and the tone of pronunciation. The most important Interrogative particles are apa and ?), both comparable to the Latin affix -ne. Which answer is expected, is indicated by neither of these particles : ap' eljuX fidvTi,<; ; am I a prophet ? rj ovtol -TroXe/Moi eicriv ; are those enemies ? Ohs. — If an affirmative answer is to be specially indicated oi is added, if a negative, firj is added to Spa. Hence apa oi corre- sponds to the Latin nonne. &pa p.rj to the English, surely not. § 608. Of other Interrogative expressions the following may he noticed : rj yap ; isn't it ? ^ nov ; surely ? cSX\o rt rj, properly aXXo Ti ecTTLv rj : does anything else happen than f hence, also with ^ omitted (comp. § 626, Ols.), like the Lat. nonne, where an affirm- ative answer is expected : SlCKo ti rj ahiKovfiev ; are we not doing wrong ? SKKo ti ovv rnvra ravra av eirj p-ia imarfjpr) ; would not this, then, he all one science ? ov put in a question also anticipates an affirmative answer, and may be compared with nonne and the English not. The opposite to it is pij, which may often be translated by surely, as pS>v, formed from /ii) oSv, surely not, always points to a negative answer, pfj 'A;^tXXe'a oiet (^poi/nVai Bavarov kcu kiv&vvov ; surely you do not think Achilles cared about death and danger ? § 609. 3. The indirect question in Greek, according to § 520, is by no means clearly distinguished in regard to Mood from the direct. So likewise the direct Interrogatives, pronouns and adverbs, are often used instead of the indirect ones : al ywacKe'i rjpmTwv avTov<;, Digitized by Microsoft® §612. THE NEGATIVES, 329 TiVe? elev, the women ashed them who they were (§ 475, J). § 610. 4. The English indirect Interrogative if or whether is represented by el (§ 525, etc.), more rarely by edv (with the Subj.), sometimes by apa, and in Horn. by rj (r)£). Whether or not or whether perhaps may be rendered by firj : a-KOTreire, el SiKauo<; j^pijcro/jLai, t& \6jq>, see whether I speak justly ; 6pa, /irj irai^tov eXeyev, see whether or not he spoke in jest. On the subject of the Interrogative Sentence heing drawn pro- leptically into the principal sentence, see §§ 397, 519, 5, 06s. 2. § 611. The direct double question (disjunctive ques- tion) is most generally introduced by mTepov (-n-oTepa) — ^, Lat. utrum — an : irorepov BeSpuKev rj ov ; irorepov uKcov rj eKcov ; has he done it or not ? mllingly or unwil- lingly ? In an indirect double question the same Inter- rogatives may be used, but also el — rj, whether — or, and efre — eXre : a/iropoviiev, elVe clkoiv elVe eKwv BiSpaKev, we ure in dvuit whether he did it willingly or unwillingly. Obs. — The Homeric language has for the direct, but more fre- quently for the indirect double question, the conjunctions 7 (r/e), V (^0 • *5 v/A^' €v frjecra-t. Ilo(reiddo}V eBafxaa-trev, 7] irov avaptrioi avbpes ibrjKrjtravT iiri x^pcrou ; did Poseidon overpower you in your ships, or have hostile men injured you on land f elire Se fioL fivrjOTrjs dXo^ov jSouX^v re voov re, rje fievet jrapa iratbl Koi e/iireSa irdvTa (j>vKdrJTe eav re 0^re, it is entirely so whether you deny or assert it. Obs. 2.— The Optative expressing repetition likewise has /i^. (§ 547). . . . Obs. 3.— With verbs of fearing, /i^ like the Latm ne, signihes. lest 01 that: SeSoiKO, firi eTrCKa6a>ne6a r?js oixaSe oboi, I fear lest we forget the way home (comp. § 533). Even without & governing verb the fear that something may happen is mtro- duc6d by i^i,, whi0i^fflfe|feigys?\?fc^to*e translated if only not,. 332 THE NEGATIVES. §617 or if but not : /ifi iTriKadaiieBa ttjj oiKaBe oSoC, if only we da notforyet the way home (comp. §§ 620, 621, and 512). § 617. 6. The Infinitive generally has firj, particularly "when the Infinitive has the article : ra? ofioia'; ■x^dpiraf jMr) avTiBiBovat alcr')(p6v, not to return equal thanks is base ; aoi to fir) criyfjcrai Xonrov r)v, it remained for you not to he silent. Obs. 1. — ov may he put with thelnfimtive after verbs of declaring and conceiving : 6no\oyS> ov Kara toutous ehai pfjraip, 1 acknowledge I am not an orator in their sense. Obs. 2. — Ssre, so that, when joined with the Infinitive generally has fiTj, more rarely ou. Obs. 3. — After verbs of hindering, forbidding, refusing, denying, and others which contain the idea of declining (§ 612), fif) is usually added to the Infinitive, and is rendered in English by from, or not expressed at all : KaXvofitBa jii] im6eiv, we are hindered from learning; ^pvovvro firj jrejrrmKcVat, they denied having fallen. § 618. 7. With Participles firj is used when they are to he understood hypotheticaUy, i. e., in the sense of a Hypo- thetical Protasis (§ 583) : ovk av Svvaio jj,r] xafiav evBai- jjioveiv, i. e. el fir) KajMoi'i (§ 613) ; so, likewise, when the Participle has the article, if it can be resolved into a hypothetical or a hypothetical relative clause : o fir] Sapel<; avOpcoTTd ov TraiBeverai, i. e. idv Tt? fj-rj Bapfj, or o? av /Mr] Bapfj (§ 583). Obs. 1. — When fir) is added as a Negative to single woi'ds, they are likewise to be taken hypotheticaUy : to ^ij dyadov, the not good, i. e., 6 &v firj dyadov rj. Obs. 2. — With Participles as well as with other words fif] often occurs as a Negative on account of the prohibitive, declining, or hypothetical nature of the whole sentence : ^rjcjiia-aiTBe tov TTokf/iov firj opridevTes to airlKa Seivov, determine upon the war without fearing the immediate danger. B) Several Negatives combined. § 619. 1. A Negative is not neutralised by a subsequent compound Negative of the same Mnd, but only continued.^ In translating, the Negative is employed only mee in Digitized by Microsoft® § 621. THE NEGATIVES. 335 English, and the place of the other Negative is supplied by an indefinite : Poet, ovk eariv ovSev Kpeiaaov fj v6/j.oe TToXet, tJiere is not anytMng better for a state than laws ouSet9 "TroyjTOTe AtOKparovi ovSev aae^e^ ovSe avocriov ovre irpaTTOVTo^ 0VT6 XeyovTO'; ^Kovaev, no one has ever heard Socrates either doing or saying anything impious or unholy, Obs. — A Negative is neutralised by a subsequent simple Negative of the same kind : ovSelff avdpairoiv dSiKSiV tlo'lv ovk diroSacet.^ no one who does wrong will not (i. o., every one will) pay the penalty. § 620. 2. oi) followed by fir) with the Subjunctive or Future Indicative is an emphatic negative. This mode of speaking is to be explained by the idea of fear being supplied after ov (comp. § 616, Ohs. 3) : oii fj,fj iroi.ria-a), about the same as ov ^o^rjTeov /ir/ iroirjaa, there is no fear that I shall do it, i. e. I shall certainly not do it : ovheh jjLrjiTOTe evp^cret, to KaT ifie ovSev ikXei^div, no one will ever find that anything, as far as depends on me, is neglected; ov firjiroTe e^apvo<; '^kvajj.ai, I shall certainly never deny. § 621. 3. iiri followed by ov is used in very different ways : a) After verbs of fearing, /j-tj ov corresponds to the Lat. ne nm, or ut, and is to be translated by that not : SeBoiKa, fir) oil 6e/MTov fi, vereor, ne nonjustum sit, I fear that it is not just (comp. § 616, Obs. 3) ; also without a governing verb, fii) ov defurov y, if it be but not right, i. e. if it be only not wrong (comp. § 512, and § 616, Obs. 3) ; Horn, /i?; vv Toi ov ■xpalanri aKrjin-pov Kal arefi^a Oeoh, the god's staff and garland will surely not help you. b) In indirect questions where /j-v would mean if perhaps (§ 610), fi^ ov means if or whether perhaps not : adpei fir) ov rovro § ro afyaeSv, look whether perhaps this is not the good. Ohs.— In the cases adduced under a and b, m is a Negative Con' junction, and oia/i#/2ie66ja)Mrdi«)&)fi^oial word. :S34 ' THE NEGATIVES. §822. c) fit} ov is used with the Infinitive after Negative ■expressions, in the sense of so as not, or not to : ouSei? •o16<;t6 aXXco? Xiyav firj ov KaTor/eXaa-ro? elvai, no on£ ■speaJdng otherwise is able not to he ridiculous. d) /j,^ oil is further used with the Infinitive after nega- tive verbs, or questions containing verbs of hindering, forbidding, denying, refusing (§ 617, 05s. 3). The In- finitive in this case is often preceded by the Article. In English the negative is not expressed : ov KwXvo/ieda jj.ri ov fiaOeiv, we are not hindered from learmng ; fiv -jrapfj^ TO /u.^ ov <})pdcrai, do not omit saying it ; riva oiei ATTapvrjcrea-Oai fit) oiixi' eTTicrTacrdai, ra BiKaia ; whom ■do you think will deny at all understanding what is Just ? Ols. — ov is here only a repetition of the Negative contained in the principal sentence. C) Some Negative Phrases. § 622. 1. ovBev, /MrjSev, and ovti, fJiriTi, rwthing, are •often used as free Accusatives, like the Latin nihil, meaning not, not at all; comp. § 404, Obs. 2. ovirto, ixriTTco, not yet ; are to be carefully distin- guished from. ovKert,, /irjKeri,, no longer : oihrfo ■ire'jrovr]fca, nondumfeci; ovKeri ■jroi^a-co, nan amplius faciam. 3. ovx oTi stands for ov Xeya on, I do not say that, mot to mention; koL ovy otl 6 JS-piTav iv rjair)(l.a r)v, aXKa jcal oi t^iXoi avTov, and not to mention (i. e. not only) ■Crito was quiet, but his friends also were. 4. jxr) oTi for fifj eiirco on (/J.'tj ottib?) means dont suppose, nedum, by which the mention of something is declined as unnecessary, and hence may sometimes be translated in Negative sentences by not only not : fir} on Sea's, aXXa Kal av6po)Troi ov (piXova-i tov<; aTTKyrovvTa';, ■don't suppose that only Gf-od, but men also do not love the faithless [non homines injidos amant ; nedum dens]. In like manner ov% ott&j?, properly not that, don't suppose^ Digitized by Microsoft® -§ 624 a. THE PAETICLES. 335 may frequently be rendered in connexion with Nega- tives by not only not. 5. ixovov oil, fjLovov oiixh o^^y not, is equivalent to ulmost, nearly ; oaov ov, temporal [tantum nan'], nearly, ■almost: KarayeXa vtt avSpav ou? crii fiovov oil iTpoj/j,i,Be<; 'A^atot, ye Atridae as well as ye other ivell-greaved Achaeans ; Horn, alel yap Tot, epi^ re ^i\r] iroKeiiol re fid'^ai re, for strife is always pleasant to you and wars and battles. We may further add the Epic ^fiev — r/Be, as well — as also. Obs. — In single instances we also find re — St, where the second member is made more prominent by contrast. 3. Kai has, moreover, the meaning also : Horn. Trap' efioiye koo aXXoi, o'C Ke fie rip/ria-ovai, with me aro also others, who will honour me. Digitized by Microsoft® 5 «25. THE PARTICLES. 337 In this sense, also, km is frequently used in both the connected parts of a sentence : koX rjfuv ravTo, SoKet d'/rep •jtai ^aajX^l, we also approve the same t}dng as the king ■does {also). The meaning also by intensification be- tjomes even ■; koX Xiav, even very much ; and in the oppo- site case even hut : Kal ^paypv ■)(p6vov, even but a short time. Koi Si answers to the English and also : SUaiov Kal irpeirov Se dfjia, just and at the same time also becoming. After words of resemblance or Kkeness /cat means as : ■ojjLOLw; Kai, aeque ac. 4. aXXffls re (cat properly means, "totli in other respects, and •also;" it serves to give prominence to the subsequent word or words, and may he translated by especially : j^aXfTroi/ eWi Sia^alveiv TOP TtOTafiov aXXmr re Ka\ noXefilav iroiKXStv eyyui ovrtov, it is difficult to cross the river especially as many of the enemy are near, km 8fi ■Kal is used to make the last part of a series emphatic : Herod. iKpoiVou jSao-iXevovTOS awiKviovTai is SdpSis oXXot re oi ndiTfS ix TTTis 'EXXdSos a-o(j)urTai, Koi 8^ Koi SdXav, during the reign of Croesus ■there came from Sellas hoth all the other wise men and especially Solon [Lat. cum — tum\ 5. In the Epic Dialect re is frequently employed to indicate the agreement not only of separate parts of a sentence, but of whole sentences, often, too, in connexion with other Particles, such as Kai, iiiv, Sf, aXKa, and with relatives (osre, oo-osre). In these cases Tc must generally be left untranslated or rendered by an unaccented dso : Hom. os Ke QeoXs Imit^WriTai iiaXa t eicKvou aiiroVf whoever obeys the gods they greatly listen to him also. Ohs. — The re in asri, oldsTe, which occurs also in prose, is of the same origin. 6. The rising climax is also expressed by oi fiovov — aXXa Kal, not only — but also. On ou% on, /jltj oti, ou% OTTO)?, see § 622. § 625. 1. The Particles ovBi, fjjjSe and oike, /xi^Te serve to form a negative series. Two different meanings belong to ovBi and yui^Se, viz. a) rwyr either, and not ; in this sense they are used to connect a single member of a sentence with a preceding one negatively : Hom. ^pwfiTjs ovt^ aTrreai, ovBe ttot'^to?, t/ou touch not meat nor drink either ; tt/so? crov ovS" ifiov ^pd<^.o,, to your (^^d^ft^^m^^cPo^lM "^"^^ ^'"^'^^ 'P"^^ 338 THE PARTICLES. §826*. 5) also not, not event iXwi^eo ovBe roii'; rroXefiiovr- fieveiv eri, I hope that the enemy also will not longer stay ;• ovSe TovTo i^rjv, not even this was allowed \ne hoc quidem liceiai]. 2. ovTe — ovre, fxriTe — fJi.riTe, are used with mutual re- ference to each other, and may be translated neither — nor : Horn, ovre ttot e? iroXefiov TraiXiaKeTo, ovTe iror eh ar/opriv, he neither went to war nor to the assembly. Sometimes a negative member of a sentence is brought into relation with a positive one, by means of ovre or fjLriTe — T6 [Lat. neque — «^] : cjfioa-av fiijTe irpohaxrew aXKrjkov; avfiyi,a')(pi re ecreaOat,, they swore not to betray one another and to be allies. Obs. — ^If something else be added to tTvo members connected by otVe — oiVe, or /u^re — jthTe, it may be done by ovbe, jirjSe. When,, on the contrary, oi8e or ^ijSe corresponds to a preceding otVe or lifjre, it mnst be called an irregularity (comp. re-Se, § 624, 2, Obs.), and the member thus added is emphatic, dWa yap- ovre TOVTbtv ovdev ecrriv oK-qBes, ovde y el rivos aKijKoare, oys iya TTaiBeveiv e7n;^etp£ dvBpbiiTovs, hut neither is any of these things true, nor even if you have heard fro-ni any one that I undertake to train men. II. — Disjunctive Oonjunetions. § 626. 1. 7], carefully to be distinguished from ^/ (§§ 643, 607), means a) or, and in this sense is often doubled : ■7 — ->j, either — or, for which tjtoi — ^ is used when greater emphasis is to be given to the first member of the sentence : r> aa-ros TK rj ^evo<;, either some citizen or a stranger. b) than, after comparatives and comparative adjectives like aXXo9, alius ; eTepo<;, alter ; Bid^opot;, different ;. ivavTLo<;, opposed to, &c. : TtVt av fiaXKov TnaTevaaifM 4 croi ; whom should I trust more than you ? ovhev aXkcf i'mT7]Sevovaiv rj a'TToOinjaiceiv, they think upon nothing else than dyin^. Ohs. — After liKiov (jrXeiov contracted n-Xetj/), more, and eXarrov, neiov, less, fj is sometimes omitted with numerals, just as juo?» Digitized by Microsoft® §629. THE PARTICLES. 339 is after plus : enj yeyov^s irXelov i^hofirjKovTa, more than seventy years old [^lus septuaginta annos natus]. The same is the case also after oXXo n in questions (§ 608). § 627. 2. e'ire — elVe, iavre — idvre are used like the Latin sive — sive, when it is to be left undecided which of two sides is to be chosen : etVe aXTy^e? etVe -i/reOSo?, ov KcCkov fiob SoKei TovTo Towo/j,a e'x^ew, whether true or false it seems to me not fair to have this name. III. — Adversative Conjunctions. § 628. 1. Be, expresses so slight a contrast or oppo- sition, that though it is generally rendered by but, it may also, and especially in Horn., be translated by and. The Greeks, however, also like to indicate the first of two sentences which are contrasted to one another, and this they do by /j,iv, in truth, truly, indeed; but it may often be left imtranslated : Horn. SXkoi fiev pa Oeol re teal dvepe<; hriroKopvcTTai evBov iravvv-^ioi,, Ata S' ovk e')(e vijSvfio^ vTTvo';, the other gods, indeed, and the horse- hair crested men slept through the night, hut sweet sleep did not hold Zeus. As here, fiev — Se express a contrast, so elsewhere they indicate only a difference: Aapelov Kal TiapvcrdTi,So<; jlyvovrai TratSe? Svo, -jrpea/Svrepot; [lev 'Apra^ep^<;, vemrepa he K.vpo';, Darius and Parysatis had two children, the elder Artaxerxes, the younger Cyrus; Hom. Trept fiev ^ov\y Aavatov irepl B' 'iare fid'^^ea'Oai, in council, on the one hand, and in battle on the other, you are distinguished among the Danai. Ohs. — In Homer an Apodosis also may he opposed to its Protasis by means of 8e, especially when the Protasis is introduced by a temporal conjunction : ecos 6 ravB' apjiaive Kara (j)pEva Koi Kara 6vfi6v, rjXBe 8' 'ABrjvr], while he pored on this in his mind and spirit Athene came. This is founded on a combination of co- ordination and subordination. Comp. § 519, 1 and 5, Ohs. § 629. 2. dXKa, yet, hut (originally Ace. PL Neut. of aXKo^), denotes a stronger contrast than Be: Hom. evB' aXXoi fiev Travre^ i'7rev(fyijfj,7jaav A^ostot — dW ovk 'ArpelBy 'Aya/j,e/j,W9^iz^$9imicS3^^ dWd KaKcb'i d^iei,, 340 THE PABTICLES. § 630. then all the other Achaeans assented, yet it did not meet the feelings of Atrides Agamemnon, but he harshly dis- missed him. Ols. 1 . — After a kypothetical sentence either expressed or under- stood, oXkA., sometimes with a strengthening yi added to it, may frequently he rendered by hut or yet at least: ei fif) iravra, aWa TToXXa y 'ia-re, if not all, yet you know at least much ; Poet. S) 6eo\ irarpaoi crvyyevia-Oe y' dWa vvv, oh gods of my fathers, he with me at least now [if not before]. Oha. 2. — oKKa frequently serves to break off a long discussion and emphatically to introduce a request : Horn. aXKa iridea-Be Koi i'/ii/iej, hut do you also follow me. Ohs. 3. — After negatives aXX' rj or aXKa alone means except : apyvpiov iih ovk exa> aXX' ^ iiiKpov ri, I have no money except a little. On ov fiTjv aWa, § 622, 6. § 630. Other Conjunctions which point out a contrast or a transition to something different are : 3. av, avre, properly again, then on the other hand, yet. 4. Horn, avrdp, and ardp, but, on the contrary, yet. 5. fiivToi, certainly, however, see § 643, 13. 6. Kairoi,, and yet, still. 1. ofiQ)';, nevertheless, yet, denotes a strong contrast [Lat. tamen, nihilominus'\. On o/itu? as a supplement to a participle, § 587, 5 § 681. IV. — Conjunctions of Comparison. 1. £09, as (Lat ut) is properly the adverb of o?, rj, o. It differs in accent from w?, so or thus (§ 99), except when in poets and the Homeric Dialect, it is placed after the word compared (§ 98, a) in which case it is oxytone : ira-TTjp &? r;7rto? fjev, he was gentle as a father. Like the Lat. ut it is employed in very different ways : a) In its original comparative sense (u? means as or how, and is used in comparisons : d><; /SouXet, as you wish ; jiaKpov (1)9 yepovTi, far for me an old man (Lat. tan- quam) ; Horn. 0)9 jmol Bi'^erai KaKov eic Kaicov alei (liow with TM one evil follows anotlier, I^at. quam) ; with super- Digitized by Microsoft® § 632- THE PAETICLES. 341 latives like the Lat. quam : £09 rdxi(7Ta, quam ceUrrime ; as quickly as possible (comp. oti). In statements of number and measure it means about, nearly ; co? SeKa, about ten ; &>? em to ttoXv, for the most part ; with verbs of motion or action it indicates what is merely intended, apparent : dirriei cb? et? tou? TroXefiiov;, he went away in the direction of the enemy (as if he went against the enemy) ; hence it occurs with participles in the manner described § 588. On its use with the Infinitive, § 564, and on oi? as a preposition, § 450. b) In a temporal sense v tk, ft)? 'EXareta KaTeiXrjTTTat,, some one came announcing that Elataea was taken. § 526, b. e) ft)? is rarely used in a consecutive sense, so that ((5j?T6). /) In a final sense «!)? means in order that : (u? /j-rj TTai/Te? oXcovTab, in order that all may not perish. Comp. § 530, &c. g) On to? expressing a wish (Lat. utinam) see § 514. § 632. 2. mirep, as, is only a strengthened w? (comp. § 641, 3), and is used only in a comparative sense. 3. oTTfi)?, how, that, in order that, is principally used as a final Conjunction, and may then Digitized by Microsoft® 342 THE PAKTIOLES. § 63S. be translated by that, or in order that, comp. § 530, &c. On ov^ oTTM?, § 622, 4. 4. &J9Te, as, so that, has rarely the comparative meaning as, generally the consecutive so that, when it is followed either by an Infinitive or a finite verb. Comp. § 565. 5. Horn, ^vre, as, just as, like, only in comparisons. § 633. V. — Declarative Conjunctions. 1. oTi, that, because [Lat. quodi], is originally nothing but the Neuter of the pronoun OST49, Ti, on the distinction of which from oti, compare § 214, Obs. 2. Like the Latin quod, 'on has two prin- cipal meanings, the declarative that, and the caudal became. a) oTi means that after verbs of saying and declaring (comp. § 525) : '}lpdK\eCTo<; Xeyec, oti, irdvra 'X^'pel Kal ovSev fiivei, Heraclitus says, that everything moves and nothing is stationary. Hence the phrase hrjkov on (also written BrjXovoTo), it is clear that, manifestly. Ohs. — Sometimes, also, a direct speech, is introduced by on, so that the Conjunction is, as it were, a mere sign of quotation : eS^Xou fi ypafjjrj, on ScfiiaroKX^s tJko) napa uk, {he letter stated (that') 1 TJiemistocles am come to you. h) because, that [Lat. quod'\ : Horn, 'xaonevo';, tov apiarov ^A'^ai.wv ovBev enaw;, angry that you have not honoured the best of the Achaeans. The use of on (or o n) with a superlative deserves attention : on rd-x^icrra like w? Taj^iara, as quickly as ' possible; and on fj,j], except, besides: oiiic fjv Kptjvr) otl /jltj aia, there was no fountain except one. 2. o)?, tJiat, § 631, d. 3. Sion, that, § 636, 2, 4. ovveKa, that, § 636, 3. Digitized by Microsoft® '^ 635. THE PAETICI/ES. 343 VI. — Temporal Conjimatdam. § 634. (Eespecting the Moods, see § 556, &e.) 1. ore, OTTOTe, when, as [^qucmdo, cum] : orav, oTrorav, when, if: rjv Trore 'xpovo'i, ore deal jmsv rjaav, dvqra Se r/evr] ovK rjv, there once was a time wliencjods existed, hut mortal races did not exist; Horn, oi S' ore 8^ Xijj.kvo'i -TToXv/Sev^eo? eVro? lkovto, laria fj,ev crreiXavTO, hut when 'they got within the deep harhour t^y furled the sails, 'ore and oiroTe with the Optative, according to § 558, Ohs. 1, mean whenever, as often as: Horn, 'ivda -n-dpo^ Koi/iad' ore fj-iv jXvkv^ vttz/o? iKavoc, where formerly he used to lie down whenever sweet sleep came upon him. ■ Sometimes ore has the causal meaning sirtce. 2. Hom. e5T6 = 0Te. 3. ^vLKa, oTTTjvlKa, when, at ike time when (§ 217), •denotes rather a point of time : iJi/tW rjv SetXij, e^arrrivrj'i .iiTKpaivovTat ol TroXifjuiot, when it was evening the enemy ■'Suddenly appeared. 4. ^/i09, poet, when.: Horn. 5/*0E 8' Tfikios fica-ov ovpavov a/;i(|3cj3^Kei, (cni r^ 817 XP^' ireia iraTTjp tViVatve TaKavra, when (at the moment) the sim had entered mid heaven, just 'then the father raised the golden § 635. 5. eirei, after, when, as: iiredv, hr-qv, eirdv, -wJien ; Hom. airap eirel Trocrto^ koX iBrjTvoi; .e'f epov evTO, hut when they 'had quenched the desire for food and drink; K-vpa i/7reo-%6T0 dvSpl eKdcrro) Bdxreiv irevre dpryvplov fivd'i, iirdv ek Ba^vXava ij/caa-iv, Cyrus promised to give each man five silver minae when they should come to Babylon, eirel frequently introduces a reason, and then is to be translated by because or for: Hom. dXKd TriOeaOe Kal vfip.e'i, ivrel weiOeaOai, d/ieLvov, hut do you ■also ohey me, for it is better to obey. 6. iirei^ri, now since, since : eVetSa?/, when, is eVet strengthened by ^ (§ 642), and points more strongly to the reason assigned than iirei: iareiSij dvecpx^V ^o Digitized by Microsoft® 344 THE PAETICEES. § 68S» Sea/MOT'ijpcov,. ehrjKOo^iev, now since the prison was openedn we entered. 1. Sbt, as Ivng as, till \_quamdiu, dum, donee] : ew? eV* iX-TTK, as long as there is still hope; irepiejMevofiev eco? avoix^eij] TO Sea-/j,coTi^piov, we waited till the prison should be opened. 8. 69Te. I ^ " 8. /*e%/3t, a'xpi (comp. § 455) J ^'"'' 10. poet. 6j>pa, as long as, till: Ham. opa rfXf'crtjTj, he nurses wrath till he fulfils it. ocppa is- very often a Particle of purpose or intention, and then to be translated by that, in order that : Horn. o(f)pa firj olos dyepavTos^ ta, in order that I may not he alone unhonoured. 11. Trpiv, before, sooner [^priusquam] (comp. § 565), is- joined sometimes, with, the InfinitiTe, sometimes with a finite yerb. Its original adverbial meaning, previously,, earlier, has been preserved, especially in to irplv, for- merly. In Hom. the Conjunction Trpiv may refer back, to the adverb wpiv : ovh^ o^e irplv Aavaolcnv aetKea \oi/yov aTTaxrei, irpiv y a-TTo iraTpl ^iXa Sofievai eXiKO)- -TTcSa Kovpriv, and he will not avert the dreadful suffering' from the Danai, before they have given back the quick-eyed' maiden to her father. 12. •irdpo'i, Hom. == Trpiv. VII. — Causal Conjunctions. § 636. 1. oTt, § 633, h 2. BioTi, because, properly 8ia tovto on, for this reason- ihat, or that. 3. ovveKsa, because; poet., from o5 eveKO, for rovrov 'ivsKa oTi, for this reason that ; because, also declarative- that. So likewise odovveKa from otov (ovtivc;) eveica. 4. eVet, § 635, 5. 5. OTe, § 634, 1. 6. yap (always postpositive), for, namely, to witr Special peculiarities in the use of yap are : Digitized by Microsoft® § 637 THE PAKTICLES. 345 a) In animated discourse the sentence containing a reason is often put before the one for which the reason is given, especially after a Vocative : Horn. 'ArpelSr], •TToWol 7^/3 redvacn KapijKOfj.oavre'; ^A.yaioi — tw ae yprj iroKefiov Travcrai, Atrides, for many rich-haired Achaeans- have died, therefore you ought to put an end to the war. b) By namely, ydp may be translated when it intro- duces the substance of a speech or opinion before announced, so especially after TSKfiripuov Be, fiaprvpioi/ Si (supply eo-Tt), for that there is a proof, a testimony. c) In answers ya/j may often be rendered by yes^ certainly, but must in reality be explained by an ellipsis : cuycovia-Teov fiev apa tjimv Trpo'i tov<; dvSpa^ ; avarfKt) i 6 TOVTO-TroincrasirfM ovBims av Xoyia-mro, he who did 348 THE PAETICLES. S 6*0- this would not, I suppose, judge correctly or soundly about any thing. 4. Horn, ki, kcv (enclitic and postpositive) is used almost entirely like Sv. XI. — Concessive Conjunctions. § 640. 1. el KM {iav Kai), if even, although, denotes a simple concession : poet. iroXiv, el koI firj /SXevret?, ^povelt 8' '6fJM<;, o'Ul voaai ^vveariv, though you have not sight, yet you are aware in what misery the city is involved. 2. Ka\ el {jcaX edv, Kciv), even if, even though denotes an emphatic concession, like etiamsi : ■fj'^evTO avBpo'i elvab arfaBov oitpeXelv tovs (^tXou?, Kal el /iijSet? /jbiXXoi e'ia-eadai, he deemed it to belong to a good man to benefit his friends, even if no one should know it. Ois. — The distinction between el nal and koi ft consists mainly in the former giving the emphasis of the kqi to the Protasis, the latter to the Apodosis. Hence the meaning is in many cases almost the same. 3. Kainep with the participle, § 587, 5. In the Apodosis the Concessive Conjunctions are often followed by ofi:os, notwithstanding, § 630, 7. B) Particles of Emphasis. § 641. 1. 76 (enclitic and postpositive), at least [Lat. quidem], gives the word before it greater weight, and is often represented in other languages merely by a more emphatic accent on the word to which je is attached: Hom. eiwep 'yap"FiKTa)p ye kukov kuI avaXKiSa ^Tjaet,, dXX' ov -TreicrovTai Tpwe?, for if Sector shall call (you) base and effeminate, yet the Trojans will not believe (it) ; Hom. aXXa crv, el hvvaaai ye, TrepLcryeo TraiB6<;, but do you, if you can, protect the son; tovto ye olfiai vfi,d<; airavraeTai 8€ ■^vxfj Tivi ; fia6r]jj.a. " S&neftmg," Verbs of, 396. "Buy," Verbs with Genit, 421. " Capability," etc, Verbs with Inf., 560, 1. Cardinal Num., 220. Case, 100— Use of, 392, etc. — Endings, 100 — Ace, 142 ; 153— in Comps., 354» Obs. " Cause," in the Genit, 408, 7—422 ; 426— Dat., 439— Part., 581. Challenge or Command — in the Subjunc, 509 — by ottws, 553, Obs. Cliaracteristic, 249. Circumfex, 21 ; 80; 83, etc.; 87,0. Classes of Verbs In la, 247- 250; 320-327 ; of Verbs in jLLi, 305-319- Collective Sing., 362. Cominon Gend., 127, 5 ; 140. " Commwiity," expressed by Dat, 4 J 6. Comparative, 192, etc. ^de- clens., 170, etc. — irreg., 199 — Adv., 203 — with Genit, 416 — Adj. and Verbs with Genit., 416, Obs. 3 ; 423. G.~Pre8. Aor. and Perf. Mid., J33, 6-10 — with Art., 379, etc. ; 578, Obs. — in Dat., 43 5. Obs. — bypoth, withiinj, 583,618. Partides, 92, 5 ; 623, etc. Partitive Genitive, 408, 4; 412 ; 419. Passice, 483 — with Dative, 4J4 — Aor. In Act verbs with Mid. meaning, 328, 3. Patronymics, J48. Peculiar Charact. SuflBx, 351 —Genit, 408, 8. " Perceive," Verbs of with Genit, 420; 417, Obs.— with Inf., 560, 2 — with Part, 591. Perfect, weak, 277, D. ; 280, etc.- strong, 277, etc.— in- trans. meaning, 330 — trans, and intrans. meaning, 329 — use of the Ind., 502 — Moods, Inf., Part, 506 — Per- fects with Pres. meaning, 503. Period, bypoth., 5J4~lnter- posed, 550 — Negative, 616. Perispomes, 21 — before Eji- clit,, 9J, b. Personal Endings, 226— Pro- noun, 250, etc. ; 92, 2 — Meaning, 469— Genit., 470, a — for reflpc. pron., 471, Obs, a, b — Personal Constr., 571. Place, Suffix of, 345— Genit. of, 412; 415; 425— Dat, 442 — Adv. with Genit, 41 5 — Desig. of, 82, 2 ; 179 ; 41 2. Plenty and Want, Adj. of, 414, 2— Verbs, 418. Plural, 3 Pers. PI. Mid. in -arat, -aro, 226, D. ; 2JJ, D., 6—1 Mid. in fieaBa, 233, D. 5, 362, etc Position, 71, etc. ; 19J. Possessive Article, 373 — Pron., 208— with Art, 388; 47Q— of the reflective, 472, 6, c — Poss. exp. by Genit, 408, 2 ; 414, I — by Dat, 422. Possibility, exp. by Verb Adj., 300 — by Opt. with av, 516, etc. ; 546 — by Part with av, 595- Predicate, 361, 3, etc^de- pendent, j6i, to; 589, 2— without Art, 378, 187. Predicative Ace. 403 — Genit, 417 — Ace. with Inf., 570— Gen. or Ace., 572 — Part, 589. Prepositions, lose their Ac- cent 88— Elision in dissyl., 64; 90; 238 — Anastrophe, 90 — Augm. aft Prep., 2?8, etc. — Use, 444— Adverbial, 446 — with Ace, 449, f— Genit, 451, etc. — Dat, 456, etc. — Genit and Ace, 458— with three cases, 462, etc. — spurious, 445. Present Ind., 486, etc. — Moods, Inf. Part, 491 — hist, 487— exp. by Ind. Aor., 494, Obs. 2 — enlarge- ment of, 246— Stem, 231— like the Verb Stem, 247— with lengthened Stfni Vowel, 248 — from Verl Digitized by Microsoft® ENGLISH INDEX. 355 PRIMITIVE. Stem with t, 249 — with i, 2^0, etc. Primitive words, J39. Principal Conjugations, 2jo — first, 231, etc, ; 320, etc. — second, 302-319 — Declen- sions, III — first, 112-134 — second, 135. ProcUtics (see Atona). "Prohibition," 518; 510; 499 — Prohibit, Hinder, Deny, etc.— have the Inf. with jllm, bi";, Obs. i — with jlltj ov, 621, d. Prolep&is, $ 19. 5. Obs. 2 CComp.,.56'7;5'jO. Fronvmciation, 4, etc. Prt^pa/roxi/tones, 17 — before Eincl., 93, d. Pi'operispomes, 11 — before End., Qj, d. Proper Names in -a, iiy, D. 2 -^s. 174 — k\yi^, 167— with Art,, 37t, Obs. ; 375, Obs.; 387, Obs. "Property," SufBx of, 346; 34h Obs. QuwnUty, in Crasis, 65 — in Monosyl., T42 — doubtful, 75, D., I — reversing quant,, 37, D., 2; 161, Obs. Quantitative Adj. and Adv., 224 — with Art., ^74. Questions, dubious in the Subj., 511. Reciprocal Pron., 211. B&iuplication, 51, 10, a — in the Perf., 273, etc. — in the 2 Aor., 257, d — in Verbs in fxL, 308. Refliective Pron., 210 — ^Mean- ing, 471 — 3rd for 1st and 2nd Pers., Obs. c — to denote possession, 472 — for Recipr,, 475. Relative A(^., 414. Relative Pron., 21J ; 216 — Craais, 65— Compound, 214, Obs. 2-^Hypoth., 554— fol- lows the Predic. Subst., 367 — used once only, 605. Relative Sentences, 551 — with Fut. Ind., 500 — with /a^, 615, Obs. 2 — complication, 604 — Connection, 605. " Reference to," exp. by the Ace, 404. Rejection of letters, 61 — of a Vowel at begin., see Syn- cope — of a vowel at end, sfe Elision. R^etition, exp. by the Opt., 547 (Negative, 616, Oba 2) 555, Obs. 15558, Obs. I, SUBJDKCrrVE. Remit of an Act, 34i— In the Ace, 400, d. Root, 245. " Scare," "Obstruct," and other Verbs, with the Inf., yjo, J. Semivowels, 31. Sentences, Compound, 519, 3, 5 — Principal, Subordinate, 519, 4 — Moods of, 525, etc, — Condlt., 534; 549, ^^c* — Negat., 616 — of Experience in Aor. Ind., 494 — Interr., 525 — of Pui-pose, 5 jo-533— Negat., 616. " Shew," Verbs of with Part., 59 J ; 580. , Slwrtening, at the begin., 74, D.— of the final syll., 75, D. 2— in the Perf., 285, D.— in the SubJ., 228, D.; 233, D. 2 — in Rel. Sent., 597. 3. " Should, exp. In depend. Sent, by the Subj., 527, b. Opt., 528, 6. Sigma, tuture, 259 ; 260, etc. — Aor., 269. Singular, 3 Pers. in e (y), 68, 4 — Accent on Imp. Mid., 268, 2 — Accent on 2 Aor, Imper, Act. and Mid., 333, ri, 12, 362. "Space," exp. by the Ace., 399, b. Spiritus, position, 12; 22 — with p and pp, ij— Spir. Asper, 6d, b — in Augm., 235, Obs.— -Spir, Leiiis, 11. Stem, 100— St, Vowel leiigtb- ened, 147, 2 ; 248 ; 253. Obs, ; 2^1, 270, changed to e, 157. "Strive," "Aim at," Verbs with Genit,, 419, c — with Inf., 560, 3- Subject, 361, i— Omitted, Obs. 2 — ^with Genit, Abs., 585, a — of a Subord. Sent, as Object of the Principal Sent, 397 ; 5i9. 5— Obs. 2— Subj. of Prill, Sent, in the Subord. Sent., 602; 519. 5. Obs. 2. Sut^ective Genit., 408, 5, a, Svhjyjnctive, 228— Shortened, 233, D, 2; 255, D. I ; 502, D. —of the Perf, Mid., 289— of verbs in p-t, accent, 309 — IWeaning, 508, etc.— similar to Fut., 5 1 J— in dep. sent,, 521 — in dep. assert, and interrog., 527— in sent, of purpose, 531. 5?2» Obs. — express, fear, 533 — in condlt, sent,, 545, 554. 555. Obs. 2 —in temper, sent., 55*?, jcS. Obs, 2, Subordi7iatUm., 519, j, Substavtive, degrees of, 199, D.— joined to the Dat., 430, Obs., 432, Obs. Sujjixes, ^40; 178. Superlatives, Adv., 203 — with Genit., 416, Obs. 2— with ws. 631, a— with oTt, 633, I, b. Supplements to the Part., 361, 8. Supplementa/ry Aorist, 270, etc.. Syllabic Augm., 234 — with, initial vowel, 237— omitted, 283. Syllables of both quantities, 75. D- i;77- Synizesis, 39 ; 66 ; 243, D., 3. 61, c;257, D. " Taking part in," with Ge- nit., 414, 5 ; 419, a. Temporal Adj., 352, 4, Obs.— Augm., 234, 6; 2J5. Tevses, 225 ; 3 Princip. Tenses, 521- Subord.. 522— Tense Stems, 227, Tenues, 32 — for Aspirates, 32, D. Time, in Ace., 399, 6 ; 405 — in Genit., 42&— in Dat. 443 — Adv. of with Genit., 415 — kinds, degrees of, 484, i, 2. rransiiiue and In trans. Mean- ing, 329, etc.; 476— Mid., 477. " Touch," and other Verbs with Genit., 419, b. Uncontracted Syll., 35, D., i. Vej'ba Cuntracta among Itera- tives, 336, d — V. puru, impura, 247. FerftaZPredic, 361,4— Nouns, 225, 5— Stem, 245, etc.— Pres. Stem, 246 ; 260, 3. Vocal Stems, i Perf., 280. Vowels, 24, etc. — in divis. of Syll., 470 — before others, 74 — long without Augm., 235 — Clianges, 40, etc. — in 2 Perf., 278- in derivation, 340, Obs. J. Weakening of Conson., 60. " When," exp. by Dat., 443 . " Whither," exp. by Ace, 406. '* Wish," exp. in the Opt., 514, etc. Worth and Price, in the Ge- nit., 408, 6; 421. Digitized by Microsoft® ( 356 ) GEEEK INDEX, a for rj, 24, D. 2 ; 41, D. ; 115, D. I ; 121, D. 2; 235, D. ; 270, Obs. a for T], 277, D. a becw, 268;278 — bee. 0,268. a bec.Tj,4o; 115, i,c; ii6,d; 235; 270; 268; 278; 303- a bee. €, 31, !>• 2; 169, D. ; 243, D. 3. a bee. at, 24, D. 3. a from ao, aw, see ao. a after e, t, p, 41 ; 115, i, a ; 116, c; 121 ; 180; 261 ; 270; 278. a before vowels, 235, a, connecLing vowel, 276 ; 336, O.; 358, D. — in the 3 Plur., 302, J. a, cbaracteristie of the First or Weak Aorist, 268. a, privative, 360 — in Adj. with the Genlt.,4r4, Obs. 5. -a, ending of the Accus., 141 ; 156; 17J, Obs.; 181 ; 276. -a, quantity of, 117; 121; 161 ; 169; 181, I. -a, Plur, ending of Neuters, 125, 2 ; 136; 141; 173. -a, Adverbs in, 202. -a, Nom. of Substant. in, 172. -a, from ao in theGenit.,122, Obs, ayaBoq, Comparison, 199, i. ayajLLai, (a7a0|aat), 312, 8 — Pass. Depon., 328, 2. ayavaKTeta, with the Particip., 592. (iyaTTw, with the Dative, 439, Oba. — with the Partic., 592. ayyeKKofj.at, construed person- ally, 571 — iyyeAAo), with a Partic, 59 j. aye S^, 642, 4, a. i-yeipui, 2 Aor., 257, D. — Perf., , 275, I. ayTJOxo, 279. ayiveui, 32}, D. 39. iyvvfiL, 319. 13— Perf., 275, 2 — Signif. J30, I. oyX'-t Comparison of, 203, D. — with the Genlt, 415. ayui, 2 Aor., 257— Imper, of i Aor., 263, D. a3eA,0o!r, Voc. Slug., 129, aStKe'w, with, the Accus., 396 — Signif., 486, Obs. ae (aij) into a, 38; into t], 243, D. 2— into aa, 336, D. aet into a, 38 — into a, 243, Obs.— into at, 38, Obs. ae'^to, 312, D. 13. aea-a, 327, D. 17. -a^io. Verbs in, 353, 6— Fut. 263. a.7}Butv, Gen. Sing., 163. afjixL, 313. D. 3. oLYjp, Masc, 140. at, in the Compar. for o or o), 195— into 77, 235. -at, Elided, '64, D.— Short in regard to the Accent, 83, Obs. 2 ; 108 ; 229 ; 268, Obs. i. at, al6e, see el, et$e. atSeojuat, alSofxai, 301, 1 ; 326, JO — Piiss. Depon., 328, 2— with the Accus. 399. 'AtSijs, 177, D. 19 — €1/, €ts 'Atfiou, 411- atS(09, i6j. -aiv, in the Dual, 173, 4. -atva, Fein, ending, 115, i b. alveia, 301, 3- atvviJiti.1, 319, D. 27. -aivaj, Verbs in, 353, 7. at|, of both genders, 140. atpe'o), 327> 1— Perf., 275, D. I — Distinct, between Act. and Mid., 481 b. — Pass, meaning, 483. 3- atpio, Aor., 270, Obs. -ats, Subst. in, 172. -at?, in the Dat. PI., 119. aladd.vofji.aL, 322, II — with the Gen., 420— with the Partic, aia^poi;. Comparison of, 198. attrviji'oiu.at, with Ace, 399 — with Dat., 439, Obs. — with Partic., 592— with the Inf., 594 — alaxuvio, Perf., 286, D. aiTe'ti), with double Ace, 402. aKaxt'^w, 319, D, 30. aKeojuat, 30I1 !• aicqKoa., 275, I ; 280, Obs aKvjxefittTO, 287, D. aKovji, Perf. Act, 27,, I — Perf. Mid., 288— with the Nom., 392, Obs.— with Gen., Digitized by Microsoft® afJi€vai. 420, and Obs. — with Partic. 591. aKparos, Comparison of, 196 5. CLKpoaof'.ai, rut., 261 — witU Gen., 420. aKoiv, Gen. Abs., 585, b. oXaKKov, 326, D. II. aKa>a]p.at, 275, D. dAao/iot, Pass. Uepon., 328, 2 —Perf., 275, D. I, a.\yeiv6<;. Comparative of, , 199.8. aAS^CTKto, 324> D- 30. aAe'ao-^at, 269, D. aX.et4>ap, 176. aAei'^iu, Perf, 27$, I. okeKTpvcov, of both genders, 140. aX€v, aX-^fjLevat, 325, ^- d. aki^tii, 326, II. akibi, 301, r. oX-f\Qe<;, 165. oASo/iat, 326, D. 39. aAty, with Gen., 414, 2. okia-KOfiaL, 327, 17 — Perf., 275. 2 — Aor., 316, 12— with the Genit., 422. aKiTaCvtii, 323, D. 37. aAK:)7, Dat Sing., 175, D. oAAo, 629 — a/Aa yap, 636, 6, d. ; aXX' Jj, 629, Obs. 3 — aXX.' ofiv, 637, 2. aAAao-o-o), I Aor. Pass., 294, _ Obs. oAA-^Aotv, etc., 211. oAAo/i-at, I Aor., 270, Obs. — 2 Aor., 316, D. 32. oAAos, 211 — oAAo Tt ^ ; aAAo Tt ; 608. oAAo); TE Ka.i, 624. 4- oAs, 150. dAu'tTK-to, 324. 27, Obs. aA(/)dva>, 323, D. 38. dAtii'at, 324. IT dAwTnj^, irreg. Nom. Sing., 14^. a/ia, with Dat., 43b c— with Part, 587, I. VLfxap-TOLvui, 322, 12 — with Genit, 419 e. a.fx^\i 3^9> ^9 — Distinction, 279. avrjvoBev, 275i D> awJii, 153; 177. 1— Genit., 51, Obs. 2. omJp, 65, Obs. I. av9' &v,6oi. avoCyio, Augm., 237— Perf., 275. 2; 279- . avopBooi, double Augm., 240. avra, avrqv, avTiKpii, seej^ avTi. - avrexofitu, with Gemt-, 419 0. apxvv. avri, 451 — without Ana- strophe, 90. oi/ti), Compar. 204 — with Genit,, 415. avtaya, 3 17, D. 1 1 — Plup., 283, D. a^tos. With Genit., 414, 4 — with inf., 562. aftdxpetos, 184. 00 into a, 37, D J ; 122, D. 2. — into w, 37; 122, 13. 3 c — intoew, 37, D. 2; 122, D. 3 b; 132; 243, D. 3. ■ao, Genit. Sing., 1 22, Obs., etc., D. 3 y. aot, into w, 37. aou, into Eta, 24J, D. 3 h. airayopopeuta, with Part., 59'^* aTravToib}, Fut. Mid. with Act, meaning, 266. aTraxj)L(rK(o, 324, D. JJ. aireiTTOV, 327, 12. aTretpos, with Genit., 414, 3. aTTCx^avo/xai, 322, J6. airexofxai, with Genlt., 419 e. iird, 452 — Apocope, 64, D. ; Compar., 204. atroSCSofiaL, with Genit., 421. airoSiSpaa-Kui, with Ace, 398. aTTOEpcra, 270, D. a.7roA.auw, Fut. Mid.'with Act. meaning, 266 — with Genit., 419. d. 'AnoWtJiv, A CO., 171; Voc, 148, Obs. oLTroa-repeia, with Double Acc., 402. aTTorvyxo-vta, with Genit., (MToupa?, 316, D, 18. airo^aCvta, with Part., 593. airoxpV' 512, 6. aTTTO/Ltat, with Genit., 419, &. -ap, Subst. in, 172. apa and Spa, Distinction, 99. dpa (ap'), Apocope, 64, D. ; 637. I. 5pa, in questions, 607, & — in- direct, 610; 5p* ov, Spa jlitJ, 607, Obs. dpapla-K(o, 324, D. 34— Perf., 275. D.J. apeCuiv, dpnTTOff, 199, i, and ^ Obs. apetrKta, 324, 10. dpTjpws, 280, D. 'Api]?, 177. 2- . -apLOF, Neuters m, 3 47, Obs . 1 . apK4(a, Aor., 301, 1. apjuoTTto, 250, Obs. — Filt., 260, 3- apveofiai, Depon. Pass., 328, 2. api'de, etc., 177, 3. apW^Lai, Aor., 319. I*- 29. apdw, 3or, I— Perf. Pass., 27 J, D.I. apX^»'» 4°5. Obs z. /3ao"tA.€Uff. dpxop-aL and ap^d), Distinction, 481, 6. opxop.ot, with Genit., 419, b— with inf., 560, 1 —with Part,, 590 — with Inf. and Part. 594- dpxf^, with Genit., 423— DifF. of Pres. and Aor., 498. -a?, Ending of the Acc. PL, 141. -d9, Fem. in, 138. -a5, Neut, in, 139. -a?, Subst. in, 172. ao-jLievo?, 319, i). — Compar,, 196, h. S^aov, atrcroTipoi, 203, D. afTTTJp, Dat. PI., 151. d' o5, 556; 601. a^vtrcria, i Aor,, 269, D, dxapis, compar. 19 j, D. dxBofjiai, 326, 12 — Depon. Pass., 328, 2 — with Part., 592. dxwfj,ai, 319. D. 30— Plup. 287. D. aXpt(0. 69, Obs. 3; 445; 455, & ; without Elision, 64, Obs. I— dxpi.o5, 556. -aw. Verbs In, 353. 2, and Obs. 2— lengthening, 24J, D.J. -aw, P'ut. iO, 263, D. p, inserted between p. and p, 51, Obs. 2, andD.; )3 for /x, see ft. pa&t^u}, Fut. Mid. with Act. meaning, 266. PatVw, 321, I, andD. — Perf, 317, I — 2 Aor., 316, I — X Aor. Mid., 268, D.— meaning, 329, 2 — of the Perf., 50 J. ^dAAw, Aor., jif), D. 19 — Perf., 282— Signif., 476, 2. ^dpStoTos, 198, D. ^ao-iAeta and ^ao'tA.eta, Il7< PflwtAevs, i6r, D. 358 GREEK INDEX. ^acrtXevta, with Gen it., 42 J — Dlff. of Pves. and Aor„ 498. ^e^ftiaOa}, J24, D. I J. iSeiofiat, /Seo/j-at, 265, D. Pet'u, ^^T), etc., ^16, D. I. ^eKTLoiv, j3e'A,Ti(rros, 199, I. ^Ld^oixai, Pass, meaning, 48J> 3- ^L^aq, }11, D. 14. pCfikoq, Fern., 127, 5. fii^pJia-Kio, ^24, ij — Aor., J 1 6, D. 23— Perf. Piirt., J 17, D. 16. 3id(i>, Aor., ii6, ij. ^A, Redup., 274, Kx. )3Aa(3eTat., Horn. Pres., 249, D. ^KdiTTio, Aor. Pass., 299 — with Ace, J96. ^kaerrdvto, 522, I4- /SA^o-flat, etc., Jl6, 19. (SAiTTO), 250, Obs, |8A«iTKu, 324, 12; 51, D. /Socitoj, Fut. Mid. with Act. Meaning, 2j6. ^dAeTa^, j66, D. 14. ^oppdq, Genit. Sing., 122, Obs. ^otr/co), J26, 13- (SoTpug, ilasc, r4o. j3ouAo/j.a[, J26, 14 — Augm., 2?4, Obs. — 2 Sing. Pros. Mid., 233, J — Depon. Pass., J28, 2. |3ou?, 159; 160; 35, Obs.— of two Genders, 140. ^pdcra-ti}, 250, Obs. ^pdrrtTiav, 198, D. Ppaxv<;, with Inf., 562. fiporos, $1, D. ^v^a^, 32J, J2 jSutras. J5. U- I- y, Pronunt., 4 — Char, of Verb.s, 251, Obs. — their Fut., 260, J— Perf., 279. yafidii), J25, I. ydmifiat, I19. D. JI. yap, 6j6, 6— yap oSi/, 6j7, i. yoo-TTip, 151— Fern., 140. yv, Ohar. of Verbal Stems, 251, Obs. y4, 641, I— Affix, ibid. ye'yoftt, Jl'], 14- yeyioviia, J 25. 0. tt. yeicojuat, Signif., J29, 8. yeAoto, joi, I — Aor. Pass., 298 — Fut. Mid. with Act. meaning, 266. yeAws, 169, D. yejiAui, with Genit, 418. •vei/4o-6aLt yei'^o'o/i.ai, etc., J27, ^wfTC, 316, D. 3J. yepaids. Compar., 194. yevuj, with Genit., 419, D. yijfle'u), 325, 2. yijpaffKw, 324, 1 — Aor., J16, 2. yi into ^, 58; 251. yt'yi/ojaat, 32"', 14 — Perf., 317, 2— with Genit., 417— with Dat., 4 J 2. ytyi/wo-Kw, J24, 14— Aor., 316, 14— with I'art, 591. yA, yv, Redupl. with, 274, Ex. yoao), 325, D. n. ydvu, I77> 4- yovv, 641, 2. ypauy, 159. ypd^ofiat, with Genit., 422. ypd<^ofi.a.i and ypa^io, Diff., 481, &. S inserted betw, v and p, 51, Obs. 2; 287, D.; 612— Cha- racter, 251. See Dentals. Sat, 642, 8. Saotwc, of two Genders, 140. SiaLvvixL, 319. U. 32 — Opt., 318, D. 8a.u>i, Meaning, 330, D. 9. SdKviii, 321, 8. SdKpvov, 175* SdiJ-ap, 147, I, Ex. SdjULi^p.t, 312. I'- a — Aor. Subj. Pass., 293, D. Savei^di, DifF. of Act. and Mid., 481, b. BapBdvui, 322, 15. 5^9, Accent, of Genit. Pi. and 'Dual, 142, J. SariofiaL, 325, D. b— I Aor. Inf., 269, D. -Se, affixed, 94; 212; 216— Enclitic, 92, 5— ]iOcal Sufiix, 178. 5e, 628—5' oSc, 637, a. Searo, 269, D. Se'yjaat, 312, D., T4, b. Se'Saoc, 324, D. 28; 326, D.40. SeSeyfj-ai, Se^u>, etc., 318, D. SeSia, SehoLKo., 317, 5, and D. Set (see Se'cu), with Ace. and Inf., 567, Obs. I— I5et, 490. &€iS(o, forms Position, 77, D. — Doubling of the 5, 254, D. 6etK»T;/xt, 318 — with Part., 593- Selua, Indef. Pronoun, 215. Snivoq, with Inf., 562. Setpv), 115. SeVfipoi*, l'}ly. S4ofj.aL, Depon. Pass., 328, 2. See Seia. Seov, 586. aeiray, Dat. PI., 169, D. BepKOfxai, Depon. Pass., 328, 2 —2 Aor., 257, D. ; 59, D.— with Ace,, 400, c. Bea-fios, Nom. and Ace. PI., J7?, D. SecnroTTK, Voc. Sing., 121 — Ace. Sing., 174, D. 5evoju.ai, 326, D. 15. SeuVaros, 199, ^' (Defectives). SevTEpos , with Genit., 416, bi^^-esd by Microsoft® SpOTOS. dixo/J-ai, Perf., 273, D.— 2 Aor., 316, D. 34 — Aor. Pass. Signif., 328, 4. Setu (I bind), 301, 2 — Con- traction, 244, 1. Sd(o, SeofjLai, (I am in want of), 326, 15— with Genii., 418. St}, 642, 4— Affix, 218. S^flef, 642, 7. S-^Aof oTt, 633, I, a, StjAow, Meaning, 476, i — 6t7Aoco and SijAds eifii, with Part., 590, A>j^tJtt)p, 153. St^v, makes position, 77, D. 5T77roT6, afBx, 218. SrJTTov, S-qirovOev, 642, 5. -5»]s, Masc. in, 348. S^a-a, J 26, D. 15. S^To, 642, 6. 5t into ^, 58; 251. 5ta, 448 ; 458— without Ana- strophe, 90— with Inf. and Article, 574, 2, 3. Sta, 181, D. Stayto, StaAetTTto, BiareXeta, with Part., 590. Siatra, IiJ. fiiatTow, With double Augm., 240. Siojcoveai, with double Augm., 240. 5iaA€yop.ai, Depon. Pass., 328, 2— Redupl., 274, Ex.— with Dat., 436, a. SioAeKTos, Fem., 127, 5*. SLa. SpoMj Aor. Pass., 298. fipotros, Fem., ii'j, 5. 6vvafxait 512,9 — Angm,, 254, Obs. — Subj., Opt., Accent., 309 — Depou. Pass., j28, 2— with Inf., 560, I. Su's, Compounds with, j6o, Obs. — Augm., 241. fiiiftj, fiwoi, J2I, T ; 301, 4 — I Aor. Mid., z68, D.— 2 Aor., J 16, 16 — Meaning, ^29, 4. e for a, 268, D.— bee. a, 257 ; 282; 285; 295; 298. e bee. 7}, 40; 147, 2; 151; 161, D.; 2JJ, 4; 23S; 29J. e bee. et, 24, D. j ; 42 ; 147, i ; 236 ; 24J, D. B ; 270 ; 29?, D. e bee. o, 165 ; 278 ; J40, Obs. 3 —bee. oj, 278. € for digamma, 34, D. 4; 237. D- e inserted, 264; 269, D. € rejected, 153; 24J, D. B; 257, D.— in Synizeais, 59, D. £ eontr. with preceding vowel, 166, D. e affixed to tbe Stem, 322, Obs.; j24,Obs.; J25, etc.— considered as Stem-vowel, 4^ e in the Augm., 236; 275. See Syllabic Augm. e inRedupl., 275— asliedupl., 274* h 4- e conneqtlng vowel, 133, h and D, J, 6; 262; 336, D. ; m, D. -e in Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual, 141. ea bee. d, 130— bee. 17, 38. -ea for eta, 185, D. — for vv in Ace. Sing., 185— In t and ^u Stems, 157 — in Diphth. Stems, 161— bee. ij and a, ibid. — bee. ij in the Ace, VI., ibid. — bee. a or 77 in Fem. of Adj., rSj— Ending of the Plup., 283. D. eava, 275, 2; 319, 13. ecu, bee. t/, 38 — bee. ei, ibid., Obs. * edv, 639, 2 — in Condit. Sent., 5i5; 545; 548— "Whether," 610— Comp. €1. edi/re-eavre, 627. €a$a,3t9' U- -eas bee. -et5 in Acc. PI., 157 —from Tjaff, 161, Obs. earai, etc., 315, D. 2. eauToi), 2io — used as a pos- sessive, 472, a. edta, Angm., 236. eyyus, Compar., 204 — with feenit., 415, , eyfiovirqcra, 325, D. c. ryetpw, 2 Aor,, 275. D.~-Perf., 275,1 ; 3I7,D. 12— Meaning, 3iO, 2. eliTov. {ypvyopa^ 275. e-yveXus, 158. eyo), Synizesis, 66 — eytuye, 641, I. eS^et-at, 31?. D. 3* J27, D. 4. efiojitai, Fut,, 265. See eo-fltw. ee bee. ei, 36— bee. et and 77, 243, D. B — bee. i} in the Dual. See -tj. eepxo-TO, 287, D. -ees bee. €is in Nom. PL, 157 — bee. ew and tjs, 161, d. -CT) for -eia, 185, D. ei]"5, 213, D. eeC^ta, Augm., 236, et for e, 24, D, 3— for ai, 267, etc, — from e, t, see «, i. et, Redupl., 274, etc.— in the Plup., 283. -et in the Dat, Sing., 157 ; 161, & — connecting vowel, 233. 1—3 Sing. Ind. Act, 233. 2—2 Sing. Ind, Mid., 233. 3. et, 639, I — Atonon, 97, 3 — in Cond. Sent., 535— with Ind., 536 — with Opt., 546, etc, — for edv, 545, Obs. 2. £t, etde, et yap, In a wish, 514 — " whether " in Depend. Interr, Sent., 525 ; 610. et-^, 611 — €t Kev, see edv — ei apa, 637, I — et yap, 637, 6, dr — el KaC, 640, I — et firj, 639. I- -eta, Fem. in, 185 — Quantity, 117 ; 341, Obs,; 342, Obs. ei'aTO, 3i5r D. 2, eUov, 327, 8, -etTj, Fem, in, 115, D. z, el/ce, etKTOi', 317, D, 7. eiKoo-t(i'), 68, 3 ; 220. etKu, with Genit., 419, e. e'lKuv, Genit., 163. dKioi, 625, D. d. €L\T]\ovea., 40, D.; 317, D. 13. elKT} D. 5. eiiLiaprat, 274* ^'^' eifii. 315. I— EncIIt., 92, 3; 315, Obs. 2 — with Part., 287; 289; 291; 505; 59o> Obs. — with Genit., 417 — with Dat., 432 — Accent of compounds of eip-L, 31$, Obs. 3—&V, 428, Obs,; 580; 585, 6 — Tf^ ovTi, 441. eV, 314. I — Meaning, 314. Obs. EtVeKa, see eVe/co, elvvov, 319- D- 5- el^atri, 317, 7. -etov, Neuters in, 345, 2. etTrep, 639, I. etTTOv, 327, 13— Aor, Imper. pig^sff^bpMhrosoft® efxireipoi, -etp, Subs, in, 172. eipyiofjixt, 319, 15. etpyto, Perf, and Plup., 287, D. ^— with Genit., 419, e eipTjKa, 274, Ex.; 327, 13. eipop,at, 326, D, 16. etpto, I Aor., 270, D. — Perf. and Plup,, 275, D. 2. elff, 2 Sing, of etp.t, 92, D. els, h, 448 ; 449 — Atonon, 97, 2— with Inf. and Art., 574. 2— ets 6, 556, -et9, Kom. PI., 157; i6r, d. -eis, Mas. and Fem, in, 172. •sts, 2 Sing, Ind. Act., 233, 2. -eis-etro-a-ei/, AdJ, in, J52, 5; 187 — Dat. Pl„ 50, Obs. 1; 149. elo-o, def. Aor., 269, D. eta-Kta, 324, D. 35- ettJOjuat, etc., 314, D. I. ettrw, with Genit., 415. etro, with Part, 587, 4*. etT€, 94 — etre-eire. Oil ; 627, ettofla, 275, 2; 278, €K, ef, 69, Obs, 2; 448; 453— with Augm., 238 — Atonon. 97, 2— with Inf. and Art, 574< 3— unaltered, 45, Obs. ; 47, Ex.— e^o{l, 556; 601. eKas, Compar., 203, D. eKeti'Off, 212. eKc'/cAero, 257, D.; 6t, D eK£;^etptoL, 53, TO, d. eKKkncrLd^ia, Augm., 239, eKAeiTro), with Acc, 398. eK\r]$dvio, 322, D. 26. eKTrA'^TTOjuat, with Ace., 399. eKTOS, 327. 6. eKTog, witii Genit, 415. eKiav, Genit Abs., 585, 6. — eKtav etvai, 570, Obs, e\d); 327,4 — with Genit., 419, d, etTKov, 337, D, ecTTreitr/xai, 286, T, Obs, ecnrd^T)!', etc., 327, 5, eoTTOv, 327, U, IJ. -eo-o-a, Fcm. of Adj., 187. ecra-ai. etc., 269, D. -eo-' (are, 601. c^eo^ 269. ex^pos, Compar., 198. exto, 327, 6— Augm., 236— Meaning, 476, 1 — DifF. of Pres. and Aor., 498— with Inf., 560, 1 — with Part., 590 — eX*^"* 580 — expiJ.aL, with Genit., 419, b. ei//oj, 326, 19, eo* for ao, see ao — in the Attic Declens., i?2, etc. — in Con- tracted Verbs, 243, D., Herod. — as one SylL, 121, D. 3, &; 131. i; 157- 6to, Genit. Sing., 121, D. 3, 6; 177, II — Verbs in, 248; 253, 3 — Fut., 260, 2; 264; 263. e J^- 7JWT0, 319. D. 28. 7)0 bee. ti), 37 — 1JOS, -rjo, -Tjaj, 161, Obs. — Tjov bee. u, 37. '^Trap, 176. r)ira)p, Nom., 172. ^p, 142, 4. HpaxA^S, 167, D. ■npapov, 3 24, D. 34. iqpiirov, meaning, 329, D. ■ijpofLTnv, 326, 16. •^q, Nom. PI., 161, d. -7j?, Nom. Sing., 172; 174, D. -yjff, Prop, names in, 174. -ns, Adj. in, 355— Compar., 197. ^o-i(i/), Dat. PI. l^opai, 3z6, 21. -tffti, Verbs in, 353, 5 — Fut,, 263. LT}, Char, of the Opt, 293 ; 302, 4. tTjjLit, 313, 1. I6vs, Superl., 193, D, LKp.evo9,3 16, D.; 323,0.33. LKviop.ai, LKvovp.ai, 323. 33 — I Aor., 268, D. -iKog, Adj. in, 351 — with Genit., 414, 6. l\d 2. la-OS, Compar,, 19S— with i^l, 4i^ &. 362 GEEEK INDEX. Compar., ■itTTepoy, 197. i.(mjju.i, Perf., 3 17, 4 — Meaning, 529, I— of the Perf., 503. icTXT^w, Diff. of Pres. and Aor., 498. Ix'Sv^f Dat. Sing., 158, D.— Ace. PI., 158 — Masc, 140. t^wp, Ace. Sing., 17?, D. -twf, Nom, of Masc. in, 348, Obs. -itov, -LOTOS, Compar., 198. K, in ovK, 6g, Obs. i — New. Ion. for IT, 216, D. — Asp. in the Perf., 279.-866 also Gutturals. -Ka, I Aor. in, jio, Kade&0VlJi.aL, J26, 21, KadevSui, 326. 18— Augm., 240. KaOrifiai, J 1 5. 2— Augm., 240. KoBC^ui, Fut., etc., 326. 21 — Augm., 240. Kttt, 624, b — Crasis, 6; — with Numbers, 222 — with IVrt., 587* 5 — >^<^'- 05, /cat Tov, 369, 2 — zeal 5e, 624* i — KaC-KaC, 624, 2) 3— Kal Si) Kat, 624, 4 — Kctl ei, 640, 2 — Kal t6t€ Si], 642, 4, a. KaCvv{J.ai, 319' I^- ^J- KaCirep, with Part., 587, 5. KaiToi, 630, 6; 94. Kauu, 35» Obs.; 253, Obs.— Fut., 260, 2 — I Aor., 269, D. KaKov \4y(o, KaKus TTOieu, with Ace., 402; 396. KOKos, Compar., 199, 2. koAeoj, 3oi> 3* KoXoff, Compar., 199, 6. KdiJivto, jzi, 9 — Pei-f., 282— with Ace., 400, & — with Part., 590. KO-veov, Kavovv, lii, 3- Kapa, 177, D. 22. KapTepeu), with Part., jqo. Kara, 448 ; 459^Apocope, 64, D. — with Inf. and Art., 574. 2; /caTaTrXijTTOjUiai, With Acc., 599- Kanjyope'ttf, Augm., 2J9- KttTto, Compar., 204. KeltLL, etc., 269, D. K€ijLiai, 3i4> 2. KCtl/O?, see €K€lVO^. KeCpo}, f'ut^ 262, D. KEKacT/iai, 320, D. J J. K€K\7tfj,ai, Meaning, 50J. KeKTYfftai, 274, Ex. — Moods, 289 — Meaaing, 503. KsKaSebi, 325, D. e. Kekevta, Perf., 288. Ke'AAcu, Fut., 266, Ex. KeKofjLCLi., Aor., 257, D. «e(v), 68, D.— Enclit., 92, 5.— See af. KevTcw, 325, D./. Kepa.wvu.1, 319- I — Sub. Mid. 312, D. 16. KepSaCvtii, Aor., 270. Obs.— Perf., 322, Obs. KeaKBTo, 33 7» ^■ K^ai, etc., 269, D. KYJSu}, 326, D. 41. KVjpvi, 8 J, Obs. r; 145. KtK\-qaK(a, 324t t). ?!. KLWfJiai,, 319, D. 34. Kipvy\}i.i, 312, D. 6. Kivavta, 321, 18. KL^-qfii, 313. I>. 6; 322, 18. Ktvpyj/Ai, 312, 7. (cieoi', etc., 319, D. 34. KKa^ta, 251, Obs. — Meaning of the Perf. Act., 276, D. KAat'tt), 253, Obs.; 326, 22 — Fut., 260, 2. KAaw, 301, I. KAct's, Acc,, 156. KAet'w, Kk-mi, Perf. Mid., 288. KAe'jTTTjs, Compar., 197. KAeTTToj, Perf., 279 — Aor. Pass., 295. -kAiJs, Proper Names in, 167 ; 174. KXivui, Perf., 282. kA-u'w, Aor., 316, D. 27. Kvona, Contr., 244, 2. KvCtray], 115, D. 2. Kotfdy, KOLi/ufEu, with Genit., 414, i; 419, a — with Dat., 436, a, &. fcoio?, Kocro?. etc., 216, D. KoKoKevio, with Acc, 396. KOTTTw and cJDmpounds, Mean- ing, 476, 2. Kopdvwf±L, 319, 6. KOpe'o), Aor., 301, D. KOpiJ, KOppT}, Hy. KopvMi, 326, 25— Augm., 234, Obs.— as Fut., 501 — iruff, Ti oil jLieAAw, 50T, Obs. 2. fietutTov, etc., 317, D. 9. fiefi^\tTaL, etc., J26, I). 24. (*e>^AuKa, 51. D.; 282, D.; 324, D. 12. fiefieTifxevo^, JiJ, D. I. fj.efj.vr}fj.at, 274, Ex.— Sub. Opt., 289, D. — meaning, 50; — with Part., 591. jLte'c, coinp. fivv — fj-ev- Si, 628 — ftey oSv, 037, 2. -/xei', I Pers. Dual and PI. Act, 226. -fievaL, -ju.ev, Inf. Act,, 2J3, I). 3 ; 255, D. — A.or, Pass., 29J, 1). — in Verbs in fit, J02, D. fiii/TOLt 6 JO, 5, fAfiW, J 26, 26. fj-eoTitippia, 5(, Obs. 2. iu.e'o-0?, C3ompar., 195 — mean- ing, 301. ju-ecTTOs, with Genlt., 414, 2. fterd, 448; 464— Ad verb, 446. ^eTa6t5a)/j.t, fxerakafi^dvia, with Genit., 419, a. lxeTati,4\ofj.at, Dep. Pass., 528, 2 — with Part., 592. Heraiv, 445; 448; 455, 7— with Part., 587, 2. fi.e7aTrifi.iT0fxa.it Pass, mean., 48J, 3— Indir. Mid., 479. ^erexci), /ac'toyos, with Genit., 4T9, a, and Obs. ; 414, 5. fj^ixp'-(s), 69, Obs. 3; 445; 448 ; 455, 6 ; 556 — without Elision, 64, Obs. i. fiT}, Synizesis, 66— Neg., 6r2, etc. — in sentences of pur- pose, 5JO — with Verbs of prohibiting, 518 ; 51" ""*^ Verba of fearing, 512; 533; 616, Obs. i — with Fut. and Perf. Ind., 533, Obs,— with Hypoth. Partic, 583— ln'(luestions, 608 — " whether perchance," 6ro — /atj ov, 621; 512; 5ii—M Sti, 622, 4. fi.Tj&ei^, fjuijiTta, etc., see ouSei's, ovTTOi, etc. jU.i)Kdo/Li,aL, 325, D. 0. fi.-ffv, 64J, 12. M-Tj-njp, 150, lyj, -ju.1,, I Pers. Sing, Act., 226 ; 302, I — Subj., 233. D. 1; ^255. a fi.lywp.1, 3191 18. fiLKpo?, Gompar., 199, 3. fi-LfLeofiat, meaning, 328, 4 — with Ace., J98. fLtflir/ja-Kto, 274, Ex.; 324,6 — li.i.ii.v7j(rK0iJ.at., with Genit., 420. jutV, 205, D. MtVcu?, Ace. Sing,, 163, D. ; 1 74, a fi.C. irdpa, 90. Trapavo/ieu), irreg. Augm., -239, 7rapa7rA.Tjo"t.os, with Dat., 436, 6 —Compar. 195. TrapariBefxai,, ^Sx. Trapaxwpe'tij.with Genit., 419. £■ irapeyiii and Trapevoiitai, 480. Trapex*^, with Ini,, 561. irapoLi/eu, double Augm. 240. irap6v, 586, Trapos, 565; 635, 12 irappTqo'Ld^Ofiai, Augm., 239- jtSsj Genit. and Dat. Accent., 142, 2 — meaning with and without Art., 390, and Obs. Trdo-o-u), 250, Obs. — Fu^2(io, 3. irda-iTiav, 198, D. irda-xto, 327, 9— Perf. 317, D. 14. GREEK INDEX. 365 irariofjLaL, irareoftai, ;25t 7> irarrjp, l5i- iTa.voiJ.ai, Aor., 298 — with Genit., 419, e — with Part. mean., 590. 7rei9io, Aor., 257, D. — Perf., J17, D. 15 — Fut, and Aor. Part., 326, D. 43 — meaning, iio,i\ $03. Treivdo), Contr,, 244> ^^ ireitro/xou, 527, 9. ireXa^ti), I Aor. Imper., 268, D. ire\eKv6, 5. jrev^ojLMLt, 322, 29. irivov, 257t D- Tre^yfoTCS, 277, D. TT^, IlSlclit., 92, 4. jnjwuiitt, 319. 23 — 2 Aor. Mid., 316, D. 39— Meaning, 530,4. irnvLKa, with Genit., 415. jnjxvy, Masc, 140; 154. TTtc^e'w, TTte'^w, 3 25( -D- ^■ TTtflt, 316, 15. jrtA,paju.at, Aor., 3 1 2, D./. TTi/i-TrAij/ii, 3 12, 3— with Genit., 418. 7rtJLtirpT7ju,i, 312, 4- irtVw, 321, 4; ?27, 10— P^lt, 265— Aor.,32T, 4; 316, 15— Meaning, 329, 7 — ^itb Genit., 4r9, d, and Obs. — -rrCofJLaL, 265 ; 327, i°' irtTTto-Kw, 324, 20. TrtirpaffKW, 324» 7- irtiTTOi, 327, 15 — Perf. Part., 317. !>• 17- fft'trupes, 220, D. 4. TTLTviui, 323, 35- iriTTrqp.i, 312, D. gf. n-i.0aua'K(t>, 324, 1'- 32. TTWdi', Compar., ig6, a. irXd^oi, 251, Obfl. 7rAao-(7w, 250, Obs. — Fut. 260,3. irKeCoiv, irAeioTO?, 199. ? — TrAe'of, without Tj, 626, Obs. ■ — n\evv, 199, D. 5. TrAeKu, Aor. Pass., 295. ttX&m, 248— Fut. 260, 2; 264 —Perf. Mid., 288. TrAe'w?, 184 — with Genit., 414. 2. Tr\r}$(j>, 312, 3— with Genit., 418. ■n-K-qu, 445 ; 4?5. 9- ir\rjpTjs, ttXtjpoiii, with Genit., 414,2; 418. jrXTjtrtoc, Compar., 195 — with Genit, 415- irKrjcra-u, 1 Aor. and Fut. Paes,, 295. ttA^to, 316, D, 22. -TrAouff, in Multiplicat., 223. TrAoucrtoy, with Genit., 414, 2. ttAww, Perf, 282. ttAww, Aor., 316, D. 24. m/ew, 248 — Fut., 260,2; 264 —Perf., 285, D,— with Ace, 400, c. IXz^Jf, 177, 14. TTofios, see TTous. TToOiv, Encl,, 92, 4. TToOeui, 301, 4, 7ro5^ see wou. JTO^ End., 92, 4. TToie'oj and 7roteoju.ati 4^° — with Genit-, 417. irtJAts, 157, D.— Gender, 138, 6 Compos., 189, 3. TToAtreuw and n-oAireuojitat, 480. Obs. TroAAaKt(s), 69, Obs. 3 ; 224. iroAuV, I9X— Compar., 199, _5 — TToAu, 404, Obs. TTOAA^, with Comp., 440. TToveo), 30T, 4- < ■iroppu), with Genit., 415. IXoo-eLfiwi', Ace. Sing., 171 — Vac., 148, Obs. TTore, End., 92, 4. irorepov ij, 611 — in depend. interr. sentences, 525. TTOTL, see TTOO?. Ti-ov, Encl., 92, 4 — with Genit., 415. irovAu'?, Fem., 185, D. iTovs, 142. ^; 147. i» y-^.— Dat. PI., 49, D.; 141, D.; 149, D.— in Compos., 160 — Masc., 140. , Trpaos, 191. npoTTOfiai, with doable Ace., 402. wpeV/3us, 177, 15. TrpnObi, 312, 4. irpia^aty 2 Aor., 316, 8 — Accent, of Aor. Sub. C^t., 309. TTptV, 556; 635, II— with Inf^ 565, and Obs, i, 2. irpCto, Perf. Mid., 288. trpo, 448, B ; 454— Crasis, 65— with Augm., In Compos., 238— with Inf. and Art., 574» J — T^po Toi), 369, 3. TTpoff (ttoti, irpoTt), 448, Til. ; 467— Adv., 446— with Inf. and Art., 574, 2, 4. TTpoffflei/, TTpomo, with Genit., Trpos^Koi', 586, irpo^toTTov, Nom. Ace. Pl„ 175. D. TTpOTepOff, TTpWTOff, 200. irpovpyov, Compar., 195, TTpwioy, Compar., 195. TTTntrwoj, 316, D. 2I. jTrttrerw, 250, Obs. — Fut-, 260,3. TTTUft), 301, I. irTwxos, Compar., 197. TTvOifrQai, 322, 29. UvKvS^, 177, 14. n-u/iaros, 190, D. (Defect,). nvvOdvoiMii, 322, 29 — with Genit., 420. TTvp, 142, b; 151 ; 175— Neut.. 140. jr«, 7rt6(s), Encl., 92, 4. TTus, with Genit., 415 — ^ws ydp oil, 636, 6, d, p, doubled, 62 — after the Augm., 234^-after Kedupl., 274, 4— Metathesis, 59 — in 2 Aor,, 257, O— p. pp, 13, pa. End., 92, 5. — See apa. pa/3So9, Fem., 127, 5. paSios, Compar., 199, 7. poLLvoi, Plup. 287, D. ^€^£d, 327. 3- pepUTTtojLteVos, 274, D. ^e'w, 248; 326.35— Fut. 260,2. p^Vi/ufLt, 319, 24; 278 — mean- ing, 330, 5. pr]9^(rop.ai, etc., 327, 13. piyeto, 325, D. i. pCyiov, T99, p. piyota, Contr,, 244, 3. plTTTeb), ptTTTW, 315, 8. pva-Bai, etc., 314, D. piawufii, 3x9, 10. o", 2; 33, c— effect on pre- cedii^ Vow. and Cons., 46, etc, ; 260, etc, ; 286 —Cora- bin., 48— Assim. to p, 50, 6 — to A, jit, r, p, 270, D. — bee. Spir, A^,, 60, b ; jo8; 327 5 Obs. — from t, see t. 366 GREEK INDEX. ff, dropped, 6i, a, h — in Sigma Stems, i66— in Pres. Stems, 233. J, 4, 5 — In the Fut., 262, Obs., etc.— in the i Aor., 268 ; 269, D. ; 270— in the 2 Aor. Mid., 307 — In the Perf. and Plup. Mid., 284, D. (T, inserted in the Perf,, 288 — in the Weak Pass. Stem, 298— in the Verb. A^J, joo in deriv., 340, Obs. 2 — in Compos., 358, 2. ff, doubled in the Dat. PI., 158, D.— in the Fut., 261, D. in the 1 Aor., 269, D.— after Syl. Augm., 234, D. b, dropped, 69, Obs. j Compar., 204. s, ending of Norn. Sing, 173, i ; 113; 122, I ; IJ4, i; 141; 145; 147, i; 155; 160— wanting, 122, D. i ; 147, 2 ; 151; 163. s, ending of Dat. PI, 119 134, 8— of Ace. PL, IJ4, loj 173. 7— of 2 Pers, Sing, in Hist. Tenses Act., 226 — Nom. of Fem., 348; J49, Obs. -o-d, Fem, ending, 187. o-aATTt'^oj, 251, Obs. -a-av, 3 PI, in Preter., 302, 7. SapTTTyfiwi', 174, D. a-^evvviXL, 319, 7 — 2 Aor., 316, 9j 3 1 3, 5 — meaning, 329, 5. -o-e, Local Suffix, 178. .h; 319.4. CKOTriia and eoftai, 480, (TKOTOg, 174* 2kuAAi7, 115, D. 2. CTKtop, 176. ufLOM, Contr., 244, 2, -o-o, 2 Pers, Smg, Imper, M id,, 228, o-Traw, 301, I— Perf, Mid., 288. oTTeuSo), Fut., 260, I— Perf. Mid., 286, Obs, UTreos, 166, D. (Tir4(r&a.t, etc., 327. 5- (nreuSw, with Inf., 560, 3. o-JTovSa^o), meaning of Fut, Mid., 266. o-c. 57 ; 250, -CTo-w, Verbs in, 250 — Fut.,, 260, 3. -OTO, 307, ara^oi, 251, Obs. — Fut,, 260,3. . Tot, 64J, 10 — End., 92, 5. Toiyap, Totyapoui/, TOtyapTOt, 043, 10; 6 J 7, 5 — ToCvvv, 6J7, 4- TOto, etc., 212, D. TotovTOS, TOLOsSe, 212; 475. Totsfieo-t, 212, D. TO^jLtO, 115 (EXO- -Toc, 2 and ; Pers. Ehi. Act., 226 — J Pers. Du. Imperf., 21J, D. 7—2 Pers. Du, Im- perf., 228. -Tos. Verbal Adj. tn, joo. too-oOto9, TotrdsSe, 212; 475. Tore, with Part., 587, 4. Tov, Tw, 214, Obs. I. -Tpa ioT -rep In the Dat. PL, 153- , ^ ■Tpa, Fern, in, 344, Obs. rparot, 2 Aor. Act,, 257 — 2 Aor. Pass., 294 — Perf., 279; 285. Tpe^oi, 54, c— Perf., 279; 285 Aor. Pass., 295— Aor. Act. Meaning, 329, D. rpe\w. 54.C; J27, II. rp^o-w, ?27, 16. -rpto. Fern, in, 341, 2— Quan- tity, 117. Tpi^pTj?, Genit. Pi., 166. "Tpts, Fern, in, J4I' 2- Tptxds, see BpC$ •Tpov, Neut, in, 344. Tpioyiu, 2 Aor. Act., 257. Tpcoff, Genit. PI. and Du., 142, j. Tpdita, 324, D. 16. TT, TTW) see cro", -o"o-to. ifisi&Ofiai. Tvyxdvui, 322, 30, etc. — with Llie Genit,, 419, c — with J-*art., 590. Tvvrf, 205, 1>. TUTTTtO, 326, 37, TVi})u}, 54i c. Tu;^eii', 322, Jo. -riu, Tuv, 3 Pers. Sing, and l)u, Imper. Act., 228. -Tup, Nom. Masc. in, 341, 2; n7- -Two-ai', 3 Pers. PI. Imper. Act., 228. V bea p, 3^, J->. 2; 160; 248, Obs. — beu V, 4o^bec. e.v, 40; 278 — bee. ov, 40, 0. — of the Stem bee. e, 157 — Long by nature, 83, Obs. i — lengthened, 253, Obs. — dropped, 253— not dropped, 64. -V, Neut. in, 139; 172. v^pi^ia, with Acc., 396. ujBptcTT^?, Compar., 197. -vSptof, Neut. in, 347, Obs, i. v&tap, 176 — Neut., 140. ve bee. v, 158. vt, Dlphth., 28. -uta, Fem. of Perf. Part., 188. vlo'i, 177, 17. vp.iv, SjLLti', etc., 207 — vfi.6^, 203, D. •vv, Nom. of Masc. and Neut, in, 172. ■vvui. Verbs in, 353, 8. virai, see vir6. UTToiTO?, 200. virip (u7retp),448, II., A.; 460 ' — with Inf. and Art,, 574, 3- viTia-xvovp.0.1, 323, 36 — with Inf., 569. vTTo, 448, III.; 468— Apoc, 64, D. vn-OTTTevo), Augm., 2^. -us, Nom. Masc. and Fem., 172 — Barytones in Acc. Sing., 156. va-fLLVT}, Dat. Sing., 175, D. vavep6^ eifil, With Part, 590, (ftda-Kio, 324, 8. ^eiSofiai, 326, D. 45— Aor. and Fut., 257, D.— with Genit., I 419, e. Digitized by Microsoft® Xpioi. (fiepTe, 315, D. 4. ijiepTepos. epTaTOi, ^ept(7T0S, 199, D. I. ^epM, 327, 12 — Imperat. ol I Aor. Act., 268, D.— Mean- ing, 476, 2—(}}epoiV, 580. ^Gvyiii, 322, J I— Fut. Mid., 264 —Perf. Mid., 285, D.— with Acc, 398 — with Genit. 422, —Meaning, 486, Obs. i\iui, 325, D. 1, 0tA.o?, Compar., 195. (jytKoTifxeop^ai, Dep. Pass., 328, 2. •^t(y}, 178, D. ^o/Sou/iat, Mean, of Aor., 328, 3 — with Inf., 560, J. <^oti/tf, 83, Obs. i; 145. ^op^ifat, see Adpiii. 4>pdywfj.t, ^apytnjfJLL, 3l9i 26. 0pafa>, Aor., 257, D. (ftpeap, 176. 4>p-'}V, Fem., 140. ^uyotSe, 178, D. i^uyyaj'to, 322, 3T, and Obs. -upu), Fut, 262, D. . ipvia, Aor., 316, 17 — Meaning, 329. 3- I- XaXeiraCvu}, with Dat., 439, Obs. XoXeiro^, with Inf., 562. XaKeiTti}^ ^epoi,vfith Part., ^02. XO-vBdvui, 323, D. 41- XavovfiaL, 324, 9. xdpiv, 404, Obs. xcipt?, Compar. of compounds witti, 197. Xda-Kio, 324, 9. xeip, i77> )8 — Fem., 140 XeLpwv, x^^P^(^°^> ^99» ^• X^icrofAaL, 323, D.-4I. Xep7)s, etc., 199, D. 2. X6W, 248 — Fut., 265 — Perf. 28i~i Aor., 269—2 Aor. 316, D. 31. Xpo-to'P-eoi, 325, D. in. Xpaofxai, XP°^' Contr., 244, 2 — Fut,, 261 — with Dat., 438. Obs. Xp-n, ?I2, 6— xpflp,49o— with Acc. and Inf., 567, Obs. i. Xpijo-TTjs, Genit. Pi., 123. xpt'w, Perf. Mid., 288. 368 GREEK INDEX. Xpoo, 115 (Ex.). Xppa(ri(y), 179* -wff, Nom. 172 — Adj., 184— Perf. Part, 276 ; 188— Fem., ij8 — Adv. 201 ; 203 — Ending of Genit Sing, in, 161 — with I- and v- Stems, 157 — in -eu Stems, i6t, a. W9 and<5s, 217. wgand m, Diff., 99; 217 D. 631. (1)9, Atonon, 97, 3 ; 98 — with Compar. 6ji, a — with Inf., lis enrelv, dis to vvv eli/at, etc, 564 — " as though," etc., with Part, 588—" when," "as," 556 — with Aor. Ind., 493 — "that," in Dependent Declarative Sentences, 525 — " in order that," in Sen- tences of Purpose, 530 — with av, 631, 6, Obs.— in expressing a wish, 514. w?, Prep., 445; 448, A.; 450. wsTrep, 632 — with Part, 588. wsre, 94; 566; 632, 4— with Inf., ;66— Joined with fjn^ 617, Obs. 2. oiTos, see oS?. uiv, IJiphth., 26, D. tovTo?, etc., 209, D. a)0eA.e'w, with Acc., 396 u)if>e\ov, 326, 32 — in exprasfi ing a wish, 515 THE END. XONUON : PEIHTKD BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS AND CHABINQ CEOSS. 8TA1IFOKD Si'rttKT Digitized by Microsoft® Digitized by Microsoft® STANDARD PUBLISHEB SCHOOL BY ME. BOOKS, MURRAY. DR. WM. SMITH'S DICTIONARIES. A LATIN-ENGLISH DICTIONARY. (1200 pp.) Medium 8vo. 21s. "Of Latin and English Dictionaries, tlio best representation gf the scholarship of the day is uudoubtsdly that of Dr. Wm. Smith."— Rev. Dr. DoNALDSox. A SMALLER LATIN-ENGLISH DICTIONARY. With Proper Names, Calendar, Weights and 3lEASl)Kii:s. Abridged from the above. Square 12mo. 7s. tSd. AN ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY. Compiled from original sources. By Wm. Smith, LL.D., and Theopuilus D. Hall, M.A. (040 pp.) Medium Svo. 21t. A SMALLER ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY. Abridged from the .ibove. Square 12mo. 7s. 6d. A CLASSIC.iL DICTIONARY OF MYTHOLOGY, BIOGEAPHV, and GEOGRAPHY. For the Higher Forms IN Schools. Compiled from the larger Dictionaries. With 750 Woodcuts. Svo. ISs. A SMALLER CLASSICAL DICTIONARY OF MYTHO- LOGY, BIOGEAPHY, and GEOGRAPHY. Abridged from the above. With 200 Woodcuts. Crown Svo. 7s. Cd. A SMALLER DICTIONARY OF GREEK AND ROMAN ANTIQUITIES. Abridged from the larger Dictionary. With 200 Woodcuts. Crown Svo. 7s. 6d. A CONCISE BIBLE DICTIONARY: its Antiquities, Biography, Geography, and Natural History. With Illustra- tions. Medium Svo. 21s. A SMALLER BIBLE DICTIONARY: ita Antiquities, Biography, Geography, and Natural History. With 40 Maps and Illustrations. Crown Svo, , 7s. tjd. DR. WM. SMITH'S GREEK COURSE. INITIA GRJ5CA. Part I. A First Gbkbk Course. Containing a Delectus, Exercise Book, and Vocabularies. 12mo. 3s. ijd. INITIA GR^CA. Part II. A Greek Reading Book.' Containing short Tales, Anecdotes, Fables, Mythology, and Gre- cian History. Arranged in a systematic Progression. With a Lexicon. 3s. Gd. INITIA QR^CA. Part IIL Gbeek Pbose Composition. Containing the Bules of Si'ntax, with Copious Examples and Exercises. 12mo. 3s. iid. THE STUDENT'S GREEK GRAMMAR Fob the Use OF Colleges and the Upper Forms in Schools. By Professor Clrtids. Post Svo. Cs. ELUCIDATIONS of the STUDENT'S GREEK GRAMMAR. Translated from the German of ERNEST CURTIUS, with the Author's aid and sanction, by EVELYN ABBOT. A SMALLER GREEK GRAMMAR. Fob the Use op the Middle and Lowep. Forms, Abridged ii'ora the above 12mo. 8s. 6d. MATTHI^'S GREEK GRAMMAR FOR SCHOOLS. Abridged by the late BISHOP BLOJtFIELD. An entirriy new and enlarged Edition. By E. S. CROOKE. B.A, formerly Assistant-Matter in M-irlbQTOUf?h Cclkge. Post Svo, 4s. ICoiUinued, Digitized by Microsoft® Digitized by Microsoft® Digitized by Microsoft®